Intermec Technologies EM3420 EM3420 User Manual legal

Intermec Technologies Corporation EM3420 legal

Users Manual

Download: Intermec Technologies EM3420 EM3420 User Manual legal
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]Intermec Technologies EM3420 EM3420 User Manual legal
Document ID450650
Application IDgWqKJ4QCW97bqHeaIzVL9Q==
Document DescriptionUsers Manual
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize328.8kB (4109964 bits)
Date Submitted2004-07-16 00:00:00
Date Available2004-09-21 00:00:00
Creation Date2004-07-06 08:37:08
Producing SoftwareAcrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod2004-07-16 18:48:00
Document Titlelegal
Document CreatorPScript5.dll Version 5.2
Document Author: ThingA

User's Manual
700 Series Color
Mobile Computer
Intermec Technologies Corporation
Corporate Headquarters
6001 36th Ave. W.
Technical Communications Department
550 Second Street SE
Everett, WA 98203
U.S.A.
Cedar Rapids, IA 52401
U.S.A.
www.intermec.com
The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers
to operate and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for
any other purpose without written permission of Intermec.
Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior notice and do
not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation.
E 2002 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved.
The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, CrossBar, Data Collection Browser, dcBrowser,
Duratherm, EasyCoder, EasyLAN, Enterprise Wireless LAN, EZBuilder, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under
license), InterDriver, Intermec Printer Network Manager, IRL, JANUS, LabelShop, Mobile Framework,
MobileLAN, Nor*Ware, Pen*Key, Precision Print, PrintSet, RoutePower, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, UAP,
Universal Access Point, and Virtual Wedge are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec
Technologies Corporation.
Throughout this manual, trademarked names may be used. Rather than put a trademark (™ or ®) symbol in
every occurrence of a trademarked name, we state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion,
and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention of infringement.
There are U.S. and foreign patents pending.
Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.opensssl.org/).
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (EAY@cryptsoft.com).
ii
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Document Change Record
This page records changes to this document. The document was originally released as Revision A.
Revision
Date
Description of Change
11/2002
Added information about the Siemens MC45 radio module, the tethered scanner, CAB
extraction, FTP Server parameters, and Data Collection control panel applet imager options.
04/2003
Added information about the ambient light sensor, the beeper, keypad sequences, the
alphanumeric keypad, the vibrator, an accessories list, programming notifications, the
MaxiCode symbology, the Utilities control panel applet, and the Wireless Network control panel applet.
08/2003
Upgraded Pocket PC 2002 information to Windows Mobile 2003, upgraded all illustrations to gray-scale, added new Imager functions, moved the Automatic Data Collection
COM Interface material to the SDK User’s Manual.
01/2004
Added 730 Computer information, revised CDMA Setup information, and revised Wireless Area Network Printing information.
04/2004
Updated 802.11 security supplicant information. Added new network selection APIs.
Incorporated information about the Intermec Settings control panel applet for PSM
Builds 3.00 or newer. Added information about the PhoneUtility application. Revised
Chapter 4, “Network Support.” Added tethered scanner and internal scanner configuration and troubleshooting information to Chapter 6, “Scanner Support.”
10/2004
Added information about resetting the 700 Series Computer. Updated the Profile Wizard
information in Appendix A, “Configurable Settings.” Revised information about using
Sprint Watcher in Chapter 4, “Network Support.” Added information about the 700CXL
Computer, including the Phone CDMA and Phone GSM applications.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
iii
iv
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Contents
Contents
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Do not repair or adjust alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
First aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Resuscitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Energized equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Safety Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Global Services and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Web Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Telephone Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Who Should Read this Manual? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Introduction
............................................................... 1
Ambient Light Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Headset Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Enable the Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Disable the Scanner Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Select a Beeper Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Disable the Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backlight for Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Gold] or [Gold/White] Plane Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alpha (Blue) Plane Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
11
12
12
14
Modem Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PSM Build Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Resetting Your 700 Series Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Software Build Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Contents
Storage Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
CompactFlash Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Secure Digital Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Vibrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Wireless Network Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
What’s New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Windows Mobile 2003
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Software Builds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Where to Find Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Basic Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation Bar and Command Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pop-up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typing With the Onscreen Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Block Recognizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Letter Recognizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Transcriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Typed Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converting Writing to Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using My Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding and Organizing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing Your 700 Color Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding or Removing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
26
27
28
29
29
30
31
32
33
33
33
34
34
35
37
37
37
38
38
39
40
41
41
41
Microsoft ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
vi
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Contents
Microsoft Pocket Outlook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calendar: Scheduling Appointments and Meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Use Categories in the Calendar? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What’s an All Day Event? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What’s a Recurrence Pattern? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating or Changing an Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating an All Day Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting a Reminder for an Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Note to an Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making an Appointment Recurring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning an Appointment to a Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending a Meeting Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding an Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting an Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Calendar Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacts: Tracking Friends and Colleagues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating or Changing a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Note to a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning a Contact to a Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending a Message to a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Contacts Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tasks: Keeping a To Do List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing E-mail Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing E-mail Messages and Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to a Mail Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Composing and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
46
47
47
48
49
49
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
58
59
60
61
61
62
63
64
65
65
66
67
67
68
69
70
70
71
71
72
73
73
74
75
77
Companion Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pocket Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing Pocket Word Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pocket Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Workbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for Working in Pocket Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
78
78
79
80
80
81
81
82
82
83
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
vii
Contents
MSN Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up an Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signing In and Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microsoft Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Books on Your 700 Color Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading a Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Reader Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
85
85
86
87
88
89
90
90
91
92
93
93
Pocket Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Mobile Favorites Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Favorite Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using AvantGo Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Pocket Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Mobile Favorites and Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Browsing the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
94
94
95
96
96
97
97
Getting Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Connecting to an Internet Service Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Creating an Ethernet Connection to an ISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Connecting to Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Creating a Modem Connection to Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Creating a Wireless Network Connection to Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Creating a VPN Server Connection to Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Creating an Ethernet Connection to Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Ending a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Setting Up an E-mail Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Installing Applications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Packaging an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Installing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Microsoft ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the FTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying to a CompactFlash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying to a Secure Digital Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
119
120
120
120
121
Updating the System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
viii
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Contents
Application Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Migrating from a 700 Monochrome Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Cabinet File Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Network Support
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
CORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating CORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install an Available Radio Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a Radio Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
126
126
126
Network Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
802.11b Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
802.11b Radio CORE Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Selection APIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WWAN Radio Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDMA/1xRTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSM/GPRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PhoneUtility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AT Command Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless Personal Area Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
128
129
129
132
132
133
134
134
164
166
169
174
174
174
AutoIP/DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
SNMP Configuration on the 700 Series Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Management Information Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring with SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Support
179
179
180
180
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Printing ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Directly to a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Directly to a Generic Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
IrDA Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
ix
Contents
NPCP Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About NPCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NPCP Driver Installation and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the NPCP Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing the NPCP Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading from the NPCP Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing to the NPCP Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NPCP Driver I/O Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NPCP Printer Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NPCP Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
183
183
183
184
184
184
184
185
186
186
187
O’Neil Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTR Driver Installation and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the DTR Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing the DTR Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing to the DTR Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTR Printer Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
188
189
189
189
189
Scanner Support
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Scanner Control and Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
EasySet Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Data Collection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Internal Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner and Imager Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Scanner Supported Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194
194
195
195
Tethered Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling and Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Comm Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limitations and Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Tethered Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the 1551E/1553 Tethered Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tethered Scanner Supported Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
196
196
196
197
197
199
199
201
201
204
204
205
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Contents
Programming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Creating CAB Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Device-Specific CAB Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating an .INF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample .INF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Installation Functions in SETUP.DLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After the CAB File Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating CAB Files with CAB Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the CAB Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208
208
208
217
220
220
223
224
Customization and Lockdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
FTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurable Parameters Via the Registry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BlockSize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeviceName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeviceURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IDNATarget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ManifestName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PauseAtStartup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring Files Over TCP/IP Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the FTP Server from Your Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autostart FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
228
228
228
228
229
229
229
229
230
233
233
Kernel I/O Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
235
235
236
240
242
243
244
245
245
246
247
248
249
250
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
xi
Contents
Network Selection APIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Connect/Disconnect Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RadioConnect() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RadioDisconnect() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RadioDisassociate() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Query Information Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetAssociationStatus() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetAuthenticationMode() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetBSSID() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetDiversity() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetLinkSpeed() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetMac() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetNetworkMode() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetNetworkType() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetSSID() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetPowerMode() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetRSSI() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetTXPower() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetWepStatus() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetRadioIpAddress() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetCCXStatus() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Information Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AddWep() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EnableWep() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EncryptionStatus() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SetAuthenticationMode() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SetChannel() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SetNetworkMode() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SetPowerMode() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SetSSID() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SetCCXStatus() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SetMixedCellMode() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RemoveWep() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Helper Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ConfigureProfile() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EnableZeroConfig() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
isZeroConfigEnabled() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
isOrinoco() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
isSupplicantRunning() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StartScanList() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StartSupplicant() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StopSupplicant() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
isDHCPEnabled() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RenewDHCP() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GetCurrentDriverName() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ResetRadioToSystemSave() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EnableSuppLogging() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SwitchPacketDriver() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deprecated Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
251
253
253
253
254
254
254
255
255
256
256
257
257
258
258
259
259
260
261
262
262
263
263
263
264
265
265
266
266
267
267
267
268
268
268
269
269
269
270
270
270
271
271
271
272
272
272
273
273
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Contents
Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
NLEDGetDeviceInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
NLEDSetDevice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Reboot Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
276
276
276
276
Remapping the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unshifted Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gold Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alpha (Blue) Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alphanumeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Key Values Are Stored in Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Keypad Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scan Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alphanumeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample View of Registry Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
277
277
277
278
278
278
278
279
279
279
280
280
281
283
Configurable Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Changing a Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
About Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Data Collection Control Panel Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telepen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QR Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MaxiCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
298
299
300
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
xiii
Contents
Symbology Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbology ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Beeper/LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Beeper Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Beeper Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Good Read Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Good Read Beep Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aimer LED Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sticky Aimer Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1D OmniDir Decode Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Postamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
310
310
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
324
325
326
327
328
329
329
330
332
334
335
Intermec Settings Control Panel Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
xiv
SNMP Control Panel Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read Only Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read/Write Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encryption Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
337
338
338
339
340
341
342
343
343
344
345
345
346
347
Unit Information Control Panel Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAB Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
348
349
350
351
Utilities Control Panel Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registry Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wakeup Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
App Launch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
353
354
355
356
357
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Contents
Wireless Network Control Panel Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Your Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
359
359
359
361
362
363
381
Other Configurable Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backlight Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Clicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
382
382
382
383
383
383
Using Reader Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Change Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Set Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Configuration Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backlight Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Clicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Wedge Grid, Preamble, Postamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Postamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bar Code Symbologies
386
386
387
387
388
389
389
389
389
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Encoded Code 39 (Concatenation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Encoded Code 39 (Full ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Data Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
EAN (European Article Numbering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
xv
Contents
I 2 of 5 (Interleaved) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
MaxiCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Micro PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
MSI Code (Variant of Plessey) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
QR Code (Quick Response Code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Telepen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
UPC (Universal Product Code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Index
Classes and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
General Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Files Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
xvi
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Before You Begin
Before You Begin
This section provides you with safety information, technical support
information, and sources for additional product information.
Safety Summary
Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and
cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec
equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be
damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions.
Do not repair or adjust alone
Do not repair or adjust energized equipment alone under any
circumstances. Someone capable of providing first aid must always be
present for your safety.
First aid
Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury.
Never neglect an injury, no matter how slight it seems.
Resuscitation
Begin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breathing.
Any delay could result in death. To work on or near high voltage, you
should be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods.
Energized equipment
Never work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsible
authority. Energized electrical equipment is dangerous. Electrical shock
from energized equipment can cause death. If you must perform
authorized emergency work on energized equipment, be sure that you
comply strictly with approved safety regulations.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
xvii
Before You Begin
Safety Icons
This section explains how to identify and understand dangers, warnings,
cautions, and notes that are in this manual. You may also see icons that tell
you when to follow ESD procedures and when to take special precautions
for handling optical parts.
A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition,
or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious
injury to the persons working on the equipment.
Avertissement: Un avertissement vous avertit d’une procédure de
fonctionnement, d’une méthode, d’un état ou d’un rapport qui doit
être strictement respecté pour éviter l’occurrence de mort ou de
blessures graves aux personnes manupulant l’équipement.
A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or
statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage
or destruction, or corruption or loss of data.
Attention: Une précaution vous avertit d’une procédure de
fonctionnement, d’une méthode, d’un état ou d’un rapport qui doit
être strictement respecté pour empêcher l’endommagement ou la
destruction de l’équipement, ou l’altération ou la perte de données.
Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain
special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of
circumstances.
xviii
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Before You Begin
Global Services and Support
Warranty Information
To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec
web site at http://www.intermec.com and click Service & Support. The
Intermec Global Sales & Service page appears. From the Service &
Support menu, move your pointer over Support, and then click
Warranty.
Disclaimer of warranties: The sample code included in this document is
presented for reference only. The code does not necessarily represent
complete, tested programs. The code is provided “as is with all faults.” All
warranties are expressly disclaimed, including the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
Web Support
Visit the Intermec web site at http://www.intermec.com to download our
current manuals in PDF format. To order printed versions of the Intermec
manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor.
Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at
http://intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request
technical support for your Intermec product.
Telephone Support
These services are available from Intermec Technologies Corporation.
In the U.S.A. and Canada
call 1-800-755-5505
and choose this option
Service
Description
Factory Repair and
On-site Repair
Request a return authorization
number for authorized service
center repair, or request an
on-site repair technician.
Technical Support
Get technical support on your
Intermec product.
Service Contract
Status
Inquire about an existing
contract, renew a contract, or ask
invoicing questions.
Schedule Site Surveys Schedule a site survey, or request 4
or Installations
a product or system installation.
Ordering Products
Talk to sales administration,
place an order, or check the
status of your order.
Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec
representative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermec
web site, click Contact.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
xix
Before You Begin
Who Should Read this Manual?
This manual provides you with information about the features of the 700
Series Color Mobile Computer and how to configure, troubleshoot, and
support it. You must be familiar with your host PC, your network, and
your other Intermec equipment.
Related Documents
This table contains a list of related Intermec documents and their part
numbers.
Document Title
Part Number
700 Color with Windows Mobile 2003 Quick Start Guide
962-054-069
730 Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide
962-054-068
Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual
073529
Intermec Developer’s Library CD
235-114-001 (Kit)
700C Recovery CD Windows Mobile 2003 Edition English
235-110-001 (Kit)
The Intermec web site at http://www.intermec.com contains many of our
documents that you can download in PDF format.
To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local
Intermec representative or distributor.
xx
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
1
Introduction
This chapter introduces the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer, developed by Intermec Technologies Corporation to enhance wireless connectivity needs.
This chapter contains hardware and software configuration information to
assist you in making the most out of your 700 Color Computer. The components include:
S Ambient light sensors (next page)
S Audio system (page 3)
S Battery (page 5)
S Beeper (page 7)
S Keypad (page 11)
S Modem support (page 16)
S PSM build version (page 16)
S Resetting your 700 Series Computer (page 17)
S Software build version (page 18)
S Storage media (page 19)
S Vibrator (page 20)
S Wireless network support (page 21)
Note: Desktop icons and control panel applet icons are shown to the left.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Ambient Light Sensor
Note: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer.
The ambient light sensor turns on the display lighting when conditions
warrant but automatically turns if off again as surrounding light increases.
This conserves your 700 Color and 700CXL battery power.
Ambient Light
Sensor
Ambient Light
Sensor
This illustration shows the 700 Color Computer with a numeric keypad (left) and an alphanumeric
keypad (right).
To adjust the ambient light sensor, tap Start > Settings > the System tab >
the Backlight icon > the Both Power tab. Make your selections, then tap
ok to exit this applet.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Audio System
The audio system consists of the speaker, internal microphone, and the
external headset jack.
Speaker
A speaker capable of variable volume levels is located on the back of the
computer. This speaker has a transducer volume of 85 dB min at 10 CM
and a frequency range of 1–8 KHz.
Speaker
700 Color or 700CXL Computer
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Speaker
730 Computer
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Microphone
The built-in microphone is located on the bottom of the unit next to the
Hirose docking connector.
Charging/Docking
connector
Microphone
This is the bottom of the 700 Color Computer. Note that the keypad is to the bottom in this
illustration.
External Headset Jack
The external headset jack connects a mobile phone style headset to your
mobile computer for use in noisy environments. The jack is a 2.5 mm,
three-conductor jack, with autosensing of the headset jack insertion which
disables the internal speaker and microphone. The external headset jack is
located on the bottom of the mobile computer next to the Hirose docking
connector.
Headset jack
Charging/Docking
connector
This is the bottom of the 700 Color Computer. Note that the keypad is to the bottom in this
illustration.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Battery
The 700 Series and 700CXL Computers come with a 14.4 Watt-hour,
7.2V, replaceable Lithium-Ion (LiIon) battery.
The 730 Computer comes with an 8.8 Watt-hour, 3.7V, replaceable LiIon
battery.
To view the status of this battery from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start
> Settings > the System tab > the Power icon > the Power tab to view the
current status of both the main battery and the backup battery. Tap ok to
exit this information.
For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00
You can also view the battery status for the 700 Series Computer by
accessing the Unit Information control panel applet. Tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > the Unit Information icon > the Battery Status tab to
view the current status. Tap ok to exit this information.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 1 — Introduction
If your computer shuts down because of low battery conditions, your computer does not operate. This is done to ensure that data is protected. Although the battery does protect the data against loss for several hours, you
should connect your computer to a power source when you first detect a
low battery condition.
Your computer contains an internal super capacitor, a temporary power
storage device, that protects data for up to ten minutes. This is to give you
time to replace the main battery pack before that data is lost. Be sure to put
the computer in a suspend mode before doing so.
If you have at least one device in your 700 Series Computer (radio, scanner, imager, or Ethernet), the battery power fail level is set so that after the
system shuts down in a low battery condition, there is still sufficient charge
to allow the unit to remain configured, keep proper time, and maintain
DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) for at least 23 to 32 hours at
room temperature if the main battery remains in the mobile computer.
The configuration and time are lost if:
S The battery discharges beyond this level.
S The battery is removed when the computer is not in suspend mode.
S A cold reset is performed on the computer.
You can modify RAM maintenance in a limited way. On the 700 Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Power icon > the Battery tab. Drag the slider bar to the right to change the suspend voltage to
favor suspend time over rundown time, then click ok to exit.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Beeper
Note: Each time the 700 Computer is cold-booted, all default settings are
restored.
If the beeper is disabled on your 700 Color Computer, do the following
instructions to enable the beeper. If you are not able to enable the beeper,
then contact Customer Support.
For information about setting volume levels for screen taps, ActiveSync
alert noises, etc., tap Start > Help > Pocket PC Basics, then select
Notifications.
Enable the Beeper
Do the following to enable the beeper:
1 Tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > Sounds & Notifications > the
Volume tab.
2 Drag the System volume slider bar to the right off the “Silent” position.
3 Tap ok to exit this applet.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Disable the Scanner Mute
Note: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer.
Do the following to disable the mute feature on the scanner.
1 Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Audio icon, then select
User defined audio settings.
2 Tap the Input Mixing tab, then clear the SCAN Mute box.
3 Drag its slider bar (note the greyed slider bar) to the appropriate level of
loudest, with the left side being the most quiet and the right side being
the most loud. Tap ok to exit this applet.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Select a Beeper Volume
Note: The 730 Computer does not support the laser scanner.
To determine your PSM Build version, tap Start > Programs > File Explorer > the Flash File Store folder > the PSMinfo text file.
For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00
Do the following to select a beeper volume. 700 Computers built with a
laser scanner have three options: Off, High, or Medium. 700 Computers
built with an imager have just two: Beeper or Vibrate. 730 Computers
have just the Beeper option. See Appendix A, “Configurable Settings,” for
more information about the Beeper Volume or Beeper option.
1 Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Data Collection icon to
access its control panel applet.
2 Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper/LED tab, then tap
this tab.
3 For units with laser scanners:
Tap Beeper Volume, select an option, then tap Apply to change the setting.
For units with imagers:
Select either option, then tap Apply to change the setting. For 730 Computers, the Vibrate option is not supported.
4 Tap ok to confirm this change, then tap ok to exit the Data Collection
control panel applet.
700 Color with Laser Scanner
Screen
700 Color with Imager Screen
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
730 Screen
Chapter 1 — Introduction
For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer
To select a beeper volume for the 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon. Tap the 700 Settings
folder twice, tap (+) to expand the Beeper folder, then tap (+) to expand
the Volume option. Select an item, then tap (+) to close this option.
700 Color Screen
730 Screen
Note: Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec
Settings control panel applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual (P/N: 073529). The online manual is available
from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com.
Disable the Beeper
Do the following to disable the beeper:
1 Tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > Sounds & Notification > the
Volume tab.
2 Drag the System volume slider completely to the left to “Silent.”
3 Tap ok to exit this applet.
10
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Keypad
Instructions for the keypad include the backlight and keypress sequences.
Backlight for Keypad
Note: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer.
You can configure your keypad to turn on a backlight to assist you when
you are working in low lighting. To adjust the backlight for the keypad,
tap Start > Settings > the System tab > Backlight. Use the left/right scroll
arrows to move to and tap the Keyboard tab. Make your selection, then
tap ok to exit this applet.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
11
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Key Sequences
Use the following key sequences to enter characters into your 700 Color
Computer using either a numeric keypad or an alphanumeric keypad.
[Gold] or [Gold/White] Plane Keys
The [Gold] b plane key (numeric keypad) or the [Gold/White] c plane
key (alphanumeric keypad) provides you access to display controls, special
characters, and Pocket PC options.
Press the [Gold] b key or the [Gold/White] c key for each gold plane
key stroke you wish to make. For example to turn on the front light, press
and hold the [Gold] b key plus the 3 key on the numeric keypad or
press and hold the [Gold/White] c key plus the I key on the alphanumeric keypad. To turn the front light off, press the appropriate keys again.
Below and on the next page are the key sequences.
Numeric Keypad
The following table lists sequences that use the [Gold] b plane key. See
Chapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003,” for information about the Pocket PC
applications.
Press the Keys
To Do This
[Gold] b 3
Toggle the backlight on or off (also goes through backlight
power levels if held down)
[Gold] b a
Access the Pocket PC Record application (see Note).
[Gold] b 4
Access the Pocket PC Calendar application (see Note).
[Gold] b 5
Access the Pocket PC Contacts application (see Note).
[Gold] b 6
Access the Pocket PC Tasks application (see Note).
[Gold] b 7
Move up one page.
[Gold] b 8
Enter an asterisk (*).
[Gold] b 9
Move down one page.
[Gold] b 0
Access the Pocket PC Start menu.
[Gold] b e
Enter an at symbol (@).
[Gold] b K
Enter a backslash (/).
[Gold] b E
Enter a minus sign (–).
[Gold] b A
Enter a plus sign (+).
[Gold] b →
Tab to the right.
[Gold] b ←
Tab to the left.
Note: Pocket PC applications are accessible only if configured to do so in the App Launch
portion of the Utilities control panel applet. See page 365 for more information.
12
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Alphanumeric Keypad
Note: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer.
The following table lists sequences that use the [Gold/White] c plane
key. See Chapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003,” for information about the
Pocket PC applications.
Press the Keys
To Do This
[Gold/White] c I
Toggle the backlight on or off (also goes through backlight
power levels if held down)
[Gold/White] c A
Access the Pocket PC Record application (see Note).
[Gold/White] c B
Access the Pocket PC Calendar application (see Note).
[Gold/White] c C
Access the Pocket PC Contacts application (see Note).
[Gold/White] c D
Access the Pocket PC Tasks application (see Note).
[Gold/White] c J
Move up one page.
[Gold/White] c G
Enter an asterisk (*).
[Gold/White] c P
Move down one page.
[Gold/White] c E
Access the Pocket PC Start menu.
[Gold/White] c K
Enter an at symbol (@).
[Gold/White] c H
Enter a backslash (/).
[Gold/White] c L
Enter a minus sign (–).
[Gold/White] c R
Enter a plus sign (+).
[Gold/White] c l
Tab to the right.
[Gold/White] c j
Tab to the left.
Note: Pocket PC applications are accessible only if configured to do so in the App Launch
portion of the Utilities control panel applet. See page 365 for more information.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
13
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Alpha (Blue) Plane Keys
The alphabet can be entered with either the numeric keypad or the alphanumeric keypad. Below and on the next page are the key sequences.
Numeric Keypad
When you press F, the Scanning/Alpha LED (C) shows ‘red’ for
the Alpha mode. The keypad stays in Alpha mode until you press F.
To type a lowercase ‘c,’ press F 2 2 2 (the [2] key three
times). To type a letter on the same key as the last letter entered, wait two
seconds, then enter the correct series of keystrokes to create the next letter.
While you are in the Alpha mode and you press 1 to initiate the CAPS
mode, you will render a CAPS LOCK until you press 1 again. Once
you are in CAPS mode, you stay in CAPS until it is pressed again.
Press 0 to enter a space.
To Enter
Press the Keys
To Enter
Press the Keys
F 2
F 1 2
F 2 2
F 1 2 2
F 2 2 2
F 1 2 2 2
F 3
F 1 3
F 3 3
F 1 3 3
F 3 3 3
F 1 3 3 3
F 4
F 1 4
F 4 4
F 1 4 4
F 4 4 4
F 1 4 4 4
F 5
F 1 5
F 5 5
F 1 5 5
F 5 5 5
F 1 5 5 5
F 6
F 1 6
F 6 6
F 1 6 6
F 6 6 6
F 1 6 6 6
F 7
F 1 7
F 7 7
F 1 7 7
F 7 7 7
F 1 7 7 7
F 7 7 7 7
F 1 7 7 7 7
F 8
F 1 8
F 8 8
F 1 8 8
F 8 8 8
F 1 8 8 8
F 9
F 1 9
F 9 9
F 1 9 9
F 9 9 9
F 1 9 9 9
F 9 9 9 9
F 1 9 9 9 9
14
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Alphanumeric Keypad
When you press d, the Scanning/Alpha LED (C) lights ‘red’ to indicate Alpha mode. The keypad stays in the Alpha mode until you press d
again.
If you want to type a lowercase ‘c,’ press d C. If you want an uppercase
“C,” press and hold the g key, then press C.
Press b to enter a space.
To Enter
Press the Keys
To Enter
Press the Keys
d A
d g A
d B
d g B
d C
d g C
d D
d g D
d E
d g E
d F
d g F
d G
d g G
d H
d g H
d I
d g I
d J
d g J
d K
d g K
d L
d g L
d M
d g M
d N
d g N
d O
d g O
d P
d g P
d Q
d g Q
d R
d g R
d S
d g S
d T
d g T
d U
d g U
d V
d g V
d W
d g W
d X
d g X
d Y
d g Y
d Z
d g Z
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
15
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Modem Support
The 700 Series Computer has the following modem options:
S Modem dock that provides charging and includes a built-in modem and
a serial port between which an application can switch.
S Snap-on modem, a stand-alone product, that attaches to the bottom of
your 700 Color Computer. Note that you cannot place this modem in a
dock, printer, or other devices. Contact your Intermec representative for
more information.
PSM Build Version
The Persistent Storage Manager (PSM) is an area of storage which is embedded in a section of the system’s FLASH memory. This storage area is
not erased during a cold-boot. It may, however, be erased during the reflashing process. In addition to storing applications and data files, you do
have the option to store a persistent registry to the PSM region.
To determine what PSM Build is on your 700 Series Computer, tap Start
> Programs > File Explorer. Access the Flash File Store folder from the
My Device root directory, then tap the PSMinfo text file. Take note of
your information, then tap ok to exit.
16
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Resetting Your 700 Series Computer
In some cases where the 700 Series Computer completely stops responding, it may be necessary to perform a cold reset. Because cold resetting may
result in data loss, it is not recommended unless all other recovery methods
have failed.
Note: Cold resetting deletes all programs and data stored in RAM including the Object Store. Make sure data is backed up to your host computer
or a storage card before performing a cold reset.
1 Release the lower clip of the hand strap.
2 Remove the battery pack.
3 Press the Reset button.
4 Reinstall the battery pack.
Reset button
700 Series Computer
Reset button
730 Computer
This illustration shows the back of the 700 Series Computer on the left and of the 730 Computer on the right.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
17
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Software Build Version
To check to see if your 700 Series Computer has the latest software build,
select Start > Internet Explorer > the Intermec logo.
The latest software build version is displayed beneath the Version
Information title. This information would be useful should you need
assistance.
700 Color Screen
700CXL Screen
730 Screen
For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00
You can also view the latest software build by accessing the Unit
Information control panel applet. Select Start > Settings > the System tab
> the Unit Information icon > the Versions tab to view the current build.
700 Color Screen
18
730 Screen
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Storage Media
Note: MultiMediaCards (MMCs) are not supported in 700 Series Computers.
The 700 Color Computer supports both CompactFlash and Secure Digital
storage cards. To access either card slot, locate the access door at the top of
the 700 Series Computer, remove its two screws, then remove the door.
See the 700 Color with Windows Mobile 2003 Quick Start Guide (P/N:
962-054-069) for more information.
The 730 Mobile Computer only supports the Secure Digital storage card.
The CompactFlash card slot is embedded in the 730 Computer and cannot be removed. To access the Secure Digital card slot, locate the access
door at the top of the 730 Computer, remove its screws, then remove the
door. See the Model 730 Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide (P/N:
962-054-068) for more information.
CompactFlash Cards
On 700 Color Computers, the CompactFlash card slot accepts either a
storage card or the 802.11b radio, which is factory-installed and cannot be
removed. The 730 Computer does not support CompactFlash storage
cards.
Secure Digital Cards
The Secure Digital card slot accepts storage cards only.
Storage Media
Access Door
700 Color Computer
730 Computer
This illustration shows the top of the 700 Color Computer on the left and of the 730 Computer on
the right. Note that the keypad is to the bottom.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
19
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Vibrator
Note: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer.
If your 700 Color Computer is built with an imager or scanner and the
vibrator is disabled, do the following instructions to enable the vibrator. If
you are not able to enable the vibrator, then contact Customer Support.
For information about setting volume levels for screen taps, ActiveSync
alert noises, etc., tap Start > Help > Pocket PC Basics, then select
Notifications.
See Chapter 7, “Programming,” to see how to programmatically control the
vibrator. See Appendix A, “Configurable Settings,” for more information
about the Beeper Volume option.
Note: Each time the 700 Computer is cold-booted, all default settings are
restored.
For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00
1 Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > Data Collection to access its
control panel applet.
2 Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper/LED tab, then tap
this tab.
3 Tap Beeper, select the “Vibrate” option, then tap Apply.
4 Tap ok to confirm this change, then tap ok to exit the Data Collection
control panel applet.
20
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 1 — Introduction
For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer
Do the following to enable the vibrator for the 700 Color Computer. Tap
Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon. Tap the
700 Settings folder twice, tap (+) to expand the Beeper folder, then tap (+)
to expand the Vibrate option. Select an item, then tap (+) to close this option.
Note: Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec
Settings control panel applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermec
web site at www.intermec.com
Wireless Network Support
Radios are installed at the factory and cannot be installed by a user. The
700 Color Computer must be serviced to install or replace radios. Contact
your Intermec representative for more information. See Chapter 4, “Network Support” for information about supported radios.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Intermec
Technologies Corporation could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
21
Chapter 1 — Introduction
Accessories
The following accessories are available for the 700 Series Computer. Note
that this is not a complete list. Contact your Intermec representative for information about these and other accessories that are not in this list.
Accessory Descriptions
Intermec
Part Number
Single Dock Charger with Ethernet and Auxiliary Battery Charger
225-681-001
Single Dock Charger with USB and Ethernet
225-683-001
Quad Battery Charger
852-060-001
852-054-001
Single Battery Charger
852-060-002
Multidock — Charge Only (holds four 700 Computers)
225-682-004
Multidock Charging with Ethernet support (holds four units)
225-682-003
Modem Dock
225-683-002
Vehicle Dock
225-685-001
Vehicle Cradle
225-680-101
Snap-On Modem
225-687-001
Long Range Tethered Scanning Adapter (3.3v to 5v)
225-686-002
DEX Adapter
225-683-001
Standard Scan Handle Option
714-525-001
714-502-001
Dockable Scan Handle
714-525-002
Belt Clip
805-612-001
700 Color
730 Computer
X **
X **
** No Ethernet Support
What’s New
The newest functionality is available in PSM builds 3.40 or greater. These
changes have occurred since the last release of this manual:
S Added information about resetting the 700 Series Computer to this
chapter.
S Updated information about the Profile Wizard in Appendix A, “Configurable Settings.”
S Revised information about using Sprint Watcher in Chapter 4, “Network Support.”
S Added information about the 700CXL Computer, including the Phone
application.
22
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
2
Windows Mobile 2003
This chapter introduces Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PC.
While using your 700 Color Computer, keep these key points in mind:
S Tap Start on the navigation bar, located at the top of the screen, to
quickly move to programs, files, and settings. Use the command bar at
the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in programs. The command
bar includes menus, buttons, and the onscreen keyboard.
S Tap and hold an item to see a pop-up menu containing a list of actions
you can perform. Pop-up menus give you quick and easy access to the
most common actions.
Below is a list of Windows Mobile 2003 components described in this
chapter. Additional information on these and other Windows Mobile
components can be found on your 700 Color Computer by tapping Start
> Help.
Windows Mobile 2003 Components
Microsoft ActiveSync Client (page 44)
Microsoft Pocket Outlook (page 46)
Pocket Word (page 78)
Pocket Excel (page 82)
MSN Messenger (page 84)
Windows Media Player for Pocket PC (page 89)
Microsoft Reader (page 90)
Pocket Internet Explorer (page 94)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
23
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Software Builds
Do the following to determine which Intermec build of Windows Mobile
2003 is on your unit.
1 Select Start > Internet Explorer > the Intermec logo.
2 Note the “Software Build” information displayed beneath the Version
Information title.
700 Color Screen
730 Screen
700CXL Screen
3 Tap the Close icon in the top right corner to exit the Internet Explorer.
24
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Where to Find Information
This chapter describes your 700 Color Computer hardware, provides an
overview of the programs on your 700 Color Computer, and explains how
to connect your 700 Color Computer to a desktop, a network, or the Internet. For instructions on setting up your 700 Color Computer and
installing ActiveSync, see the Quick Start Guide. The following is a guide
to more information to assist you use your 700 Color Computer.
For information on:
See this source:
Programs on your mobile computer.
This chapter and mobile computer Help. To view Help,
tap Start > Help.
Additional programs that can be installed on the mobile
computer.
The Windows Mobile Companion CD.
Connecting to and synchronizing with a desktop.
The Quick Start Guide or AutoSync Help on your desktop. To view Help, click Help > Microsoft ActiveSync
Help.
Last-minute updates and detailed technical information.
The Read Me files, located in the Microsoft ActiveSync
folder on the desktop and on the Windows Mobile Companion CD.
Up-to-date information on your Windows Mobile.
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/resources/
communities/default.mspx
Windows Mobile and many of the technologies supported by the 700 Color Computer are not from Intermec Technologies. Many of the utilities
and features on a Windows Mobile device come directly from Microsoft
without any modification from Intermec Technologies. There may be certain Microsoft-specific issues that Intermec Technologies would not be
able to support, so contact our front-line support personnel to determine
the best source of assistance.
Use these URLs for additional information about Microsoft Windows
Mobile (Pocket PC):
S http://msdn.microsoft.com/support/
S http://support.microsoft.com/
S news://news.microsoft.com (a free support option)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
25
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Basic Skills
Learning to use your 700 Color Computer is easy. This section describes
the basic concepts of using and customizing your 700 Color Computer.
Today Screen
When you turn on your 700 Color Computer for the first time each day
(or after four hours of inactivity), you see the Today screen. You can also
display it by tapping the Start flag (shown left) and then Today. On the
Today screen, you can see important information for the day.
Tap to start a program.
Tap and hold to change time format.
Tap to change date and time.
Tap to change owner
information.
Your day at a glance. Tap
to open the associated
program.
Tap to create a
new item.
Tap to disconnect from ActiveSync.
To customize what is displayed on the Today screen, including the background image, tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > Today.
Status icons display information such as low batteries or when the 700
Color Computer is connected to a desktop or to the Internet. You can tap
an icon to open the associated setting or program.
26
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Programs
You can switch from one program to another by selecting it from the Start
menu. (You can customize which programs you see on this menu. For
information, see “Adjusting Settings” on page 41.) To access some
programs, tap Start > Programs, and then the program name.
You can also switch to some programs by pressing a program button. Your
700 Color Computer has one or more program buttons located on the
front or side of the computer. The icons on the buttons identify the programs to which they switch.
Note: Some programs have abbreviated labels for check boxes and dropdown menus. To see the full spelling of an abbreviated label, tap and hold
the stylus on the label. Drag the stylus off the label so that the command is
not carried out.
The following is a partial list of programs that are on your 700 Color
Computer. Look on the Windows Mobile Companion CD for additional
programs that you can install onto your 700 Color Computer.
Synchronize information between your 700 Color Computer and desktop.
Keep track of your appointments and create meeting requests.
Keep track of your friends and colleagues.
Send and receive e-mail messages.
Browse Web and WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) sites, and download new programs and files from the Internet.
Create handwritten or typed notes, drawings, and recordings.
Keep track of your tasks.
Play digital audio and video files that are stored on your 700 Series Computer or on a network.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
27
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Navigation Bar and Command Bar
The navigation bar is located at the top of the screen. It displays the active
program and current time, and allows you to switch to programs and close
screens.
Tap to switch to a program
that you recently used.
Tap to switch to a program.
Tap to see more programs.
Tap to change device
settings.
Tap to see a Help topic
for the current screen.
Use the command bar at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in programs. The command bar includes menu names, buttons, and the Input
Panel button. To create a new item in the current program, tap New. To
see the name of a button, tap and hold the stylus on the button. Drag the
stylus off the button so that the command is not carried out.
Tap to display the input
panel.
Tap to select
button commands.
Tap to select
menu commands.
28
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Pop-up Menus
Use pop-up menus to quickly perform an action on an item. For example,
you can use a pop-up menu to delete or make a copy of an item. To access
a pop-up menu, tap and hold the item on which you want to perform the
action. When the menu appears, tap the action you want to perform, or
tap anywhere outside the menu to close the menu without performing the
action.
Tap and hold to display the
pop-up menu.
Lift the stylus and tap the action
you want.
Tap outside the menu to
close it without performing
an action.
Notifications
When you have something to do, your device notifies you in a variety of
ways. For example, if you have set up an appointment in Calendar, an email message arrives, or a friend sends you an instant message, you are notified in any of the following ways:
S A message box appears on the screen.
S A sound, which you can specify, is played.
S A light flashes on your 700 Color Computer.
S The 700 Color Computer vibrates.
You can choose notification types.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
29
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Entering Information
You can enter information on your 700 Color Computer in several ways,
depending on the type of device you have and the program you are using:
S Synchronizing
Using Microsoft ActiveSync, synchronize or copy information between
your desktop and 700 Color Computer. For more information on ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on your desktop.
S Typing
Using the input panel, enter typed text into the 700 Color Computer.
You can do this by tapping keys on the onscreen keyboard or by using
handwriting recognition software.
S Writing
Using the stylus, write directly on the screen.
S Drawing
Using the stylus, draw directly on the screen.
S Recording
Create a stand-alone recording or embed a recording into a document or
note.
Use the input panel to enter information in any program on your 700
Color Computer. You can either type using the onscreen keyboard or
write using Block Recognizer, Letter Recognizer, or Transcriber. In either
case, the characters appear as typed text on the screen.
To show or hide the input panel, tap the Input Panel button. Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button to see your choices.
Select an input method.
Tap to see your choices.
Input Panel button.
30
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
When you use the input panel, your 700 Color Computer anticipates the
word you are typing or writing and displays it above the input panel.
When you tap the displayed word, it is inserted into your text at the
insertion point. The more you use your 700 Color Computer, the more
words it learns to anticipate.
Tap a text box to display
the currently selected
input panel (in this case,
Keyboard).
Tap to insert anticipated
word.
To enter characters, tap
them on the onscreen
keyboard.
To change word suggestion options, such as the number of words suggested at one time, tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > Input > the
Word Completion tab.
Typing With the Onscreen Keyboard
Tap the
arrow, then tap Keyboard. On the soft keyboard that is displayed, tap the keys with your stylus.
S To type lowercase letters, tap the keys with the stylus.
S To type a single uppercase letter or symbol, tap the Shift key. To tap
multiple uppercase letters or symbols, tap the CAP key.
S To convert a letter to uppercase, tap and hold the stylus on the letter
and drag up.
S To add a space, drag the stylus to the right across at least two keys.
S To backspace one character, drag the stylus to the left across at least
two keys.
S To insert a carriage return, tap and hold the stylus anywhere on the
keyboard and drag down.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
31
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Note: If you want to use larger keys, tap the
arrow, tap Options,
select “Keyboard” from the Input method drop-down list, then select
Large keys.
Using Block Recognizer
Character recognition software gives you a fast and easy method for entering information in any program on your 700 Color Computer. Letters,
numbers, and punctuation you write are translated into typed text.
Tap the
arrow, then tap Block Recognizer. Write a letter in the box.
When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text that appears on the
screen.
For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer, with Block Recognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area.
Tap for assistance.
32
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Using Letter Recognizer
With Letter Recognizer, you can write letters using the stylus just as you
would on paper.
Tap the
arrow, then tap Letter Recognizer. Write a letter in the box.
When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text that appears on the
screen. For specific instructions on using Letter Recognizer, with Letter
Recognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area.
Tap for assistance.
Using Transcriber
With Transcriber, you can write anywhere on the screen using the stylus
just as you would on paper. Unlike Letter Recognizer and Block Recognizer, you can write a sentence or more of information. Then, pause and let
Transcriber change the written characters to typed characters.
Tap the
arrow, then tap Transcriber. Write anywhere on the screen.
For specific instructions on using Transcriber, with Transcriber open, tap
the question mark in the lower, right-hand corner of the screen.
Tap for assistance.
Selecting Typed Text
If you want to edit or format typed text, you must select it first.
S Drag the stylus across the text you want to select.
You can cut, copy, and paste text by tapping and holding the selected
words and then tapping an editing command on the pop-up menu, or by
tapping the command on the Edit menu.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
33
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Writing on the Screen
In any program that accepts writing, such as the Notes program, and in
the Notes tab in Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks, you can use your stylus to
write directly on the screen. Write the way you do on paper. You can edit
and format what you have written and convert the information to text at a
later time.
S Tap the Pen button to switch to writing mode. This action displays
lines on the screen to help you write.
Tap to use your stylus like a pen.
Note: Some programs that accept writing may not have the Pen button.
See the documentation for that program to find out how to switch to writing mode.
Selecting the Writing
If you want to edit or format writing, you must select it first.
1 Tap and hold the stylus next to the text you want to select until the insertion point appears.
2 Without lifting, drag the stylus across the text you want to select.
If you accidentally write on the screen, tap Tools > Undo and try again.
You can also select text by tapping the Pen button to deselect it and then
dragging the stylus across the screen.
You can cut, copy, and paste written text in the same way you work with
typed text: tap and hold the selected words and then tap an editing command on the pop-up menu, or tap the command on the Edit menu.
34
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Converting Writing to Text
You can convert words you write in print or cursive to text by tapping
Tools > Recognize. If a word is not recognized, it stays in its written form.
If you want to convert only certain words, tap Pen to disable the writing
function, tap twice over the word or phrase to highlight, then tap Tools >
Recognize.
Select the text you want to
convert and tap Recognize
on the pop-up menu.
The writing is turned
into text.
Tap to disable the pen function.
If the conversion is incorrect, you can choose different words from a list of
alternates or return to the original writing. To do so, tap and hold the
incorrect word (tap one word at a time). On the pop-up menu, tap
Alternates. Tap the word you want to use from the menu with a list of
alternate words, or tap the writing at the top of the menu to return to the
original writing.
Tap to return to your
original writing.
Or, tap the word you
want to use.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
35
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Tips for getting good recognition:
S Write neatly.
S Write on the lines and draw descenders below the line. Write the cross
of the “t” and apostrophes below the top line so they are not confused
with the word above. Write periods and commas above the baseline.
S For better recognition, try increasing the zoom level to 300% by using
the Tools menu. Recognition does not work well below a 150% zoom
level.
S Write the letters of a word closely and leave big gaps between words so
that the 700 Color Computer can easily tell where words begin and end.
S Hyphenated words, foreign words that use special characters such as accents, and some punctuation cannot be converted.
S If you add writing to a word to change it (such as changing a “3” to an
“8”) after you attempt to recognize the word, the writing you add is not
included if you attempt to recognize the writing again.
36
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Drawing on the Screen
You can draw on the screen in the same way that you write on the screen.
The difference between writing and drawing on the screen is how you select items and how they are edited. For example, you can resize selected
drawings, while you cannot resize writing.
Creating a Drawing
S Cross three ruled lines on your first stroke. A drawing box appears. Subsequent strokes in or touching the drawing box become part of the drawing. Drawings that do not cross three ruled lines are treated as writing.
The drawing box indicates
the boundaries of the
drawing.
Pen button.
Note: You may want to change the zoom level so that you can more easily
work on or view your drawing. Tap Tools and then a zoom level.
Selecting a Drawing
If you want to edit or format a drawing, you must select it first.
S Tap and hold the stylus on the drawing until the selection handle appears. To select multiple drawings, deselect the Pen button and then
drag to select the drawings you want.
You can cut, copy, and paste selected drawings by tapping and holding the
selected drawing and then tapping an editing command on the pop-up
menu, or by tapping the command on the Edit menu. To resize a drawing,
make sure the Pen button is not selected, and drag a selection handle.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
37
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Recording a Message
In any program where you can write or draw on the screen, you can also
quickly capture thoughts, reminders, and phone numbers by recording a
message.
In the Inbox program, you can add a recording to an e-mail message. In
Calendar, Tasks, and Contacts, you can include a recording in the Notes
tab. In the Notes program, you can create a stand-alone recording or add a
recording to an open note.
Creating a Recording
1 Hold the 700 Color Computer’s microphone near your mouth or
source of sound.
2 Tap
and make your recording.
3 Tap
when finished. If you are recording in an open note, an icon
appears in the note. If you are creating a stand-alone recording, it appears in the note list.
4 To play a recording, tap the recording icon in the open note or tap the
recording in the note list.
Note: To quickly create a recording, hold down the Record hardware button. When you hear the beep, begin your recording. Release the button
when you are finished. The new recording is stored in the open note or as
a stand-alone recording if no note is open.
To play a recording, tap it in the list or tap its icon in the note.
Indicates an embedded recording.
Tap to show or hide the Recording toolbar.
Tap to begin recording.
38
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Using My Text
When using Inbox or MSN Messenger, use My Text to quickly insert preset or frequently used messages into the text entry area. To insert a message, tap My Text and tap a message.
S To quickly add common messages, tap My Text and tap a desired message.
S To edit a My Text message, tap Tools > Edit My Text Messages. Tap
the message you want to edit and enter new text at the bottom of the
screen.
Tap to select a prewritten message.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
39
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Finding and Organizing Information
The Find feature on your 700 Color Computer helps you quickly locate
information.
Tap Start > Find. Enter the text you want to find, select a data type, and
then tap Go to initiate the search.
Note: To quickly find information that is taking up storage space on your
700 Color Computer, select Larger than 64 KB in Type.
You can also use the File Explorer to find files on your 700 Color Computer and to organize these files into folders. Tap Start > Programs > File
Explorer.
Tap the folder name
to open it.
Tap New Folder to
create a new folder.
Note: You can move files in File Explorer by tapping and holding the item
you want to move, and then tapping Cut or Copy and Paste on the popup menu.
40
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Customizing Your 700 Color Computer
You can customize your 700 Color Computer by adjusting settings and
installing additional software.
Adjusting Settings
You can adjust settings to suit the way you work. To see available options,
tap Start > Settings > either of the following tabs located at the bottom of
the screen. You might want to adjust the following:
Personal Tab
Menus:
To customize what appears on the Start menu, and to enable a pop-up
menu from the New button.
Owner Information:
To enter your contact information.
Password:
To limit access to your 700 Color Computer.
Today:
To customize the look and information displayed on the Today screen.
System Tab
Clock:
To change the time or to set alarms.
Power:
To maximize battery life.
Adding or Removing Programs
Programs added to your 700 Color Computer at the factory are stored in
ROM (Read Only Memory). You cannot remove this software, and you
cannot accidentally lose ROM contents. ROM programs can be updated
using special installation programs with a *.XIP extension. All other programs and data files added to your 700 Color Computer after factory
installation are stored in RAM (Random Access Memory).
You can install any program created for your 700 Color Computer, as long
as your 700 Color Computer has enough memory. The most popular
place to find software for your 700 Color Computer is on the Windows
Mobile Web site (http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/resources/
communities/default.mspx).
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
41
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Adding Programs Using ActiveSync
Install the appropriate software for your 700 Color Computer on your
desktop before installing it on your 700 Color Computer.
1 Determine your 700 Color Computer and processor type so that you
know which version of the software to install. Tap Start > Settings > the
System tab > About > the Version tab, then make a note of the
information in Processor.
2 Download the program to your desktop (or insert the CD or disk that
contains the program into your desktop). You may see a single *.XIP,
*.EXE, or *.ZIP file, a SETUP.EXE file, or several versions of files for
different 700 Color Computer types and processors. Be sure to select
the program designed for the Windows Mobile and your 700 Color
Computer processor type.
3 Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation that
comes with the program. Many programs provide special installation
instructions.
4 Connect your 700 Color Computer and desktop.
5 Double-click the *.EXE file.
S If the file is an installer, the installation wizard begins. Follow the directions on the screen. Once the software is installed, the installer automatically transfers the software to your 700 Color Computer.
S If the file is not an installer, an error message stating that the program
is valid but it is designed for a different type of computer is displayed.
Move this file to your 700 Color Computer. If you cannot find any
installation instructions for the program in the Read Me file or documentation, use ActiveSync Explore to copy the program file to the
Program Files folder on your 700 Color Computer. For more information on copying files using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help.
Once installation is complete, tap Start > Programs, and then the program
icon to switch to it.
Adding a Program Directly from the Internet
1 Determine your 700 Color Computer and processor type so that you
know which version of the software to install. Tap Start > Settings > the
System tab > About > the Version tab, then make a note of the
information in Processor.
2 Download the program to your 700 Color Computer straight from the
Internet using Pocket Internet Explorer. You may see a single *.XIP,
*.EXE, or *.ZIP file, a SETUP.EXE file, or several versions of files for
different 700 Color Computer types and processors. Be sure to select
the program designed for the Windows Mobile and your 700 Color
Computer processor type.
3 Read program installation instructions, Read Me files, or other documentation. Many programs provide installation instructions.
4 Tap the file, such as a *.XIP or *.EXE file to start the installation wizard. Follow the directions on the screen.
42
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Adding a Program to the Start Menu
Tap Start > Settings > Menus > the Start Menu tab, and then the check
box for the program. If you do not see the program listed, you can either
use File Explorer on the 700 Color Computer to move the program to the
Start Menu folder, or use ActiveSync on the desktop to create a shortcut
to the program and place the shortcut in the Start Menu folder.
Using File Explorer on the 700 Color Computer
Tap Start > Programs > File Explorer, and locate the program (tap the
folder list, labeled My Documents by default, and then My Device to see a
list of all folders on the 700 Color Computer). Tap and hold the program
and tap Cut on the pop-up menu. Open the Start Menu folder located in
the Windows folder, tap and hold a blank area of the window, and tap
Paste on the pop-up menu. The program now appears on the Start menu.
For more information on using File Explorer, see “Finding and Organizing
Information” on page 40.
Using ActiveSync on the desktop
Use the Explorer in ActiveSync to explore your 700 Color Computer files
and locate the program. Right-click the program, and then click Create
Shortcut. Move the shortcut to the Start Menu folder in the Windows
folder. The shortcut now appears on the Start menu. For more information, see ActiveSync Help.
Removing Programs
Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > Remove Programs.
If the program does not appear in the list of installed programs, use File
Explorer on your 700 Color Computer to locate the program, tap and
hold the program, and then tap Delete on the pop-up menu.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
43
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Microsoft ActiveSync
Visit the following Microsoft Web site for the latest in updates, technical
information, and samples:
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/resources/communities/default.mspx
Using Microsoft ActiveSync, you can synchronize the information on your
desktop with the information on your 700 Color Computer. Synchronization compares the data on your 700 Color Computer with your desktop
and updates both computers with the most recent information. For example:
S Keep Pocket Outlook data up-to-date by synchronizing your 700 Color
Computer with Microsoft Outlook data on your desktop.
S Synchronize Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel files between your
700 Color Computer and desktop. Your files are automatically converted to the correct format
Note: By default, ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types
of information. Use ActiveSync options to turn synchronization on and off
for specific information types.
With ActiveSync, you can also:
S Back up and restore your 700 Color Computer data.
S Copy (rather than synchronize) files between your 700 Color Computer
and desktop.
S Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization
mode. For example, you can synchronize continually while connected to
your desktop or only when you choose the synchronize command.
S Select which information types are synchronized and control how much
data is synchronized. For example, you can choose how many weeks of
past appointments you want synchronized.
Before you begin synchronization, install ActiveSync on your desktop from
the Windows Mobile Companion CD. For more information on installing
ActiveSync, see your Quick Start card. ActiveSync is already installed on
your 700 Color Computer.
After installation is complete, the ActiveSync Setup Wizard helps you connect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop, set up a partnership so
you can synchronize information between your 700 Color Computer and
your desktop, and customize your synchronization settings. Your first synchronization process automatically begins when finished using the wizard.
After your first synchronization, look at Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks on
your 700 Color Computer. Notice that information you have stored in
Microsoft Outlook on your desktop was copied to your 700 Color Computer, and you did not have to type a word. Disconnect the 700 Color
Computer from your computer and you are ready to go!
44
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Once you have set up ActiveSync and completed the first synchronization
process, you can initiate synchronization from your 700 Color Computer.
To switch to ActiveSync on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start >
ActiveSync. Note that if you have a wireless LAN card, you can
synchronize remotely from your 700 Color Computer.
For information about using ActiveSync on your desktop, start ActiveSync
on your desktop, and then see ActiveSync Help.
View connection status.
Tap to connect and synchronize.
Tap to stop synchronization.
View synchronization status.
Tap to synchronize via IR or change
synchronization settings.
For more information about ActiveSync on your 700 Color Computer,
switch to ActiveSync, then tap Start > Help.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
45
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Microsoft Pocket Outlook
Microsoft Pocket Outlook includes Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Inbox, and
Notes. You can use these programs individually or together. For example,
you can use e-mail addresses stored in Contacts to address e-mail messages
in Inbox.
Using ActiveSync, you can synchronize information in Microsoft Outlook
or Microsoft Exchange on your desktop with your 700 Color Computer.
You can also synchronize this information directly with a Microsoft Exchange server. Each time you synchronize, ActiveSync compares the
changes you made on your 700 Color Computer and desktop or server
and updates both computers with the latest information. For information
on using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop.
You can switch to any program by tapping it on the Start menu.
Calendar: Scheduling Appointments and Meetings
To switch to Calendar on the 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Calendar.
Use Calendar to schedule appointments, including meetings and other
events. You can check your appointments in one of several views (Day,
Week, Month, Year, and Agenda) and set Calendar to remind you of appointments with a sound or other method.
Appointments for the day can display on the Today screen.
If you use Outlook on your desktop, you can synchronize appointments
between your device and desktop.
Tap to go to Today
Tap to display or edit
the appointment details.
Tap to create a new appointment
46
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Synchronizing Calendar
Calendar items stored on your device can be synchronized with calendar
items on your desktop or Microsoft Exchange Server. (Note that you can
only synchronize information directly with an Exchange Server if your
company is running Microsoft Mobile Information Server 2002 or later.)
Calendar synchronization is automatically selected in ActiveSync.
Calendar items entered on one computer are copied to the other during
synchronization. Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as metafiles
(pictures).
For more information on synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on the
desktop.
Why Use Categories in the Calendar?
Use categories to group related tasks, contacts, and appointments. Then,
use these groupings to quickly display only the information you want. For
example, you can easily share your device with another by assigning your
appointments to a category with a special project’s name. You can then use
this category to filter Calendar and only display appointments for that
project.
Note: In Month View, the day of an appointment assigned to the Holiday
category appears in red.
This day was assigned
the Holiday category.
Tap to access the Month view
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
47
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
What’s an All Day Event?
An appointment can either be a normal appointment or an all day event,
which lasts the full day or spans many days. Examples include a trade
show, a vacation, or a seminar. You can also use all day events to schedule
an annual event, such as a birthday or anniversary. In this case, change the
Status box to Free (you may need to scroll to see it) so that it does not
show time as busy in your calendar. All day events do not occupy blocks of
time in Calendar; they appear in banners at the top of the calendar.
Note: You cannot modify or create all day events with attendees on the
device. If you create all day events with attendees on your desktop, use ActiveSync to copy such events to the device. Then, view them in Calendar.
For more information on copying files, see ActiveSync Help. To use the
device to schedule an appointment with attendees lasting all day, set type
to “Normal,” then adjust the date and time appropriately.
This describes the all
day event.
Tap to access the Day view
48
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
What’s a Recurrence Pattern?
If you have an appointment or task that you do on a regular basis, such as
a weekly team meeting or a monthly status report, enter the item once and
set a recurrence pattern for it. If the default patterns in the list are not
what you need, you can create your own pattern using the wizard.
Select your recurrence
pattern from this dropdown list.
Select 
to access the wizard
with which to customize your recurrence.
Viewing Appointments
You can view appointments in one of several views (Agenda, Day, Week,
and Month). In Agenda view, upcoming appointments are displayed in
bold. To see detailed appointment information in any view, tap the appointment. To see a list of available actions for an appointment, tap and
hold the appointment.
This displays the appointment in bold.
Tap to access the Agenda view
Note: Tap Start > Today to quickly see your appointments for the day.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
49
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Month view displays symbols to indicate the types of appointments you
have on a given day. An upward triangle indicates a morning appointment;
a downward triangle indicates an afternoon appointment. If you have appointments in the morning and afternoon, a solid square is displayed. If
you have an all day event not marked Free, a hollow square is displayed.
This displays an all day
event not marked Free.
This displays a morning appointment.
This displays appointments in both morning
and afternoon.
This displays an afternoon appointment.
Tap to access the Month view
50
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Creating or Changing an Appointment
To create an appointment, tap New. To select a new date from a pop-up
calendar, tap the display date. To enter or select a new time, tap the display time. Enter the appointment details, and when finished, tap OK to
return to the calendar.
If you are working in Day view, tap the time slot for the new appointment
and then tap New to have the time automatically entered for you.
To change an appointment, tap it in the calendar, and then tap Edit.
Change any appointment detail by tapping it and entering the new information.
Note: Tap the arrows to the right of the description and location boxes to
choose from previous entries.
When entering a time, you can type military and abbreviated time forms,
such as 2300 (becomes 11:00 PM), 913pm (becomes 9:13 PM), 911 (becomes 9:11 AM), and 9p (becomes 9:00 PM).
Tap to return to the calendar
(the appointment is saved
automatically).
Tap to choose from
predefined text.
Tap to choose from previously
entered locations.
Tap to select a time.
Tap to select a date.
Notes is a good place for
maps and directions.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
51
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Creating an All Day Event
To create an all day event, do the following:
1 Tap New.
2 Tap All Day, then select Yes.
Tap to select either
Yes or No whether
this is an all day
event.
Note: To change an all day event, switch to Day or Agenda view, tap the
event listed at the top of the calendar, and then tap Edit. Change any appointment detail by tapping it and entering the new information.
You cannot modify or create all day events with attendees on the 700 Color Computer. If you create all day events with attendees on your desktop,
use ActiveSync to copy such events to the 700 Color Computer. Then,
view them in Calendar. For more information on copying files, see ActiveSync Help. To use the device to schedule an appointment with attendees
lasting all day, set type to Normal, then adjust date and time accordingly.
52
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Setting a Reminder for an Appointment
Do the following to set a reminder for an appointment in the calendar:
1 Tap the appointment, then tap Edit to change the appointment.
2 Tap Reminder and select Remind me.
3 To change how many minutes before the appointment you are reminded, tap the minutes displayed, then select the new minutes from a
drop-down or enter the new minutes.
Tap minutes to change hours, days, or weeks.
Tap to select Remind me
to enable the reminder
feature.
Note: To automatically set a reminder for all new appointments, in the
calendar, tap Tools > Options, select Set reminders for new items, then
tap the number and timeframe options to change the information given.
Tap this to set reminders
for new appointments
automatically.
To choose how you are reminded, for example by a sound, Tap Start >
Settings > the Personal tab > the Sounds & Notifications icon.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
53
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Adding a Note to an Appointment
You can add written or typed notes and even recordings (if your device
supports recordings) to an appointment. This is a good place for maps,
drawings, and other detailed information.
1 In the calendar, tap the appointment, then tap Edit.
2 Tap the Notes tab to enter notes. For specific instructions, tap Start >
Help > Notes to see Notes Help.
These are controls for
the recorder.
Use your stylus to write
or draw your information here.
Tap to activate the keyboard.
Tap to activate the writing pad.
Tap to activate the recorder.
Note: To edit an existing note, tap the appointment in the calendar, tap
Edit, then tap the Notes tab.
54
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Making an Appointment Recurring
Do the following to make a recurring appointment:
1 In the calendar, tap the appointment, then tap Edit
2 Tap Occurs and select a pattern from the list. Or, to create a new pattern, tap , and follow the steps in the wizard.
Select your recurrence
pattern from this dropdown list.
Select 
to access the wizard
with which to customize your recurrence.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
55
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Assigning an Appointment to a Category
1 In the calendar, tap the appointment, then tap Edit.
2 Tap Categories.
3 On the Select tab, select the categories to which you want to assign the
appointment.
4 To create a new category, tap the Add/Delete tab, enter the category
name, then tap Add. The new category is automatically selected in the
Select tab.
5 Tap ok to return to the appointment.
A check mark indicates
a selected category.
Note: To find an appointment assigned to a category, tap Tools > Categories and select the type of appointment that you want displayed. To show
all appointments again, tap Tools > Categories and clear all categories.
56
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Sending a Meeting Request
Use Calendar to schedule meetings with people who use Outlook or Pocket Outlook. When attendees receive a meeting request, they can accept or
decline the meeting. If they accept, the meeting is automatically added to
their schedule. In addition, their response is sent back to you, and your
calendar is updated.
Before you can send a meeting request, you must enter e-mail addresses in
Contacts Help and set up Inbox to send and receive messages. For more
information on sending and receiving meeting requests, tap Start > Help >
Calendar to see Calendar Help, and tap Start > Help > Inbox to see Inbox
Help.
1 Tap New, then enter the meeting information.
2 Hide the onscreen keyboard, if needed, then tap Attendees. Only those
contacts with e-mail addresses are displayed. Select the contacts you
want to invite, then tap ok to return to the appointment.
3 Select other desired options and then tap ok.
4 Inbox automatically creates a meeting request and sends it to the attendees the next time you synchronize with your desktop. Textual notes
entered in the Notes tab (excluding writing or recordings) are sent also.
A check mark indicates
a selected attendee.
Note: If you are sending the meeting request through a connection to an
ISP or the network, rather than through synchronization with your desktop, tap Tools > Options. From the Send meeting requests via drop-down
list, tap the service to use to send the meeting request.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
57
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Finding an Appointment
There are two ways to find an appointment:
S Tap Start > Find, enter the appointment name, tap the Type arrow and
select Calendar from the drop-down list, and then tap Go.
S In the calendar, tap Tools > Categories and select the type of appointment you want displayed. To show all appointments again, tap Tools >
Categories and clear all categories.
Tap this to select from a drop-down
list or enter a phrase.
Tap this for a drop-down list of
areas where to search this phrase.
Tap this to see its details.
Note: In Find, you can tap the Find arrow to select from a list of items of
previously searched items or phrases.
Deleting an Appointment
1 In the calendar, tap and hold the appointment.
2 On the pop-up menu, tap Delete Appointment. The next time you
synchronize, the appointment is also deleted from the desktop.
58
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Changing Calendar Options
In the calendar, tap Tools > Options.
S To see appointment indicators, select icons to display in Show icons.
You can choose to display indicators for such things as recurring appointments, appointments with notes, and appointments with reminders. Tap and hold an icon to see its name.
S If you are having trouble reading the calendar, select Use large font.
You may see less appointment information.
Tap this to view larger text.
Tap to indicate private.
Tap to indicate attendees.
Tap to indicate locations.
Tap to indicate notes.
Tap to indicate recurrences.
Tap to indicate reminders.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
59
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Contacts: Tracking Friends and Colleagues
To switch to Contacts on the 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Contacts.
Contacts maintains a list of your friends and colleagues so that you can
easily find the information you are looking for, whether you are at home
or on the road. You can enter both personal and business information.
If you use Microsoft Outlook on your desktop, you can synchronize
contacts between your 700 Color Computer and your desktop.
Select the category of contacts you
want displayed in the list.
Tap and enter part of a name
to quickly find it in the list.
Tap to see additional phone
numbers and e-mail addresses.
Tap to display or edit the
contact details.
Tap and hold to display a
pop-up menu of actions.
Tap to toggle to By Company (note the Name view)
Tap to create a new contact.
60
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Creating a Contact
1 Tap New.
2 Using the input panel, enter a name and other contact information.
Scroll down to see all available fields.
3 To assign the contact to a category, scroll to and tap Categories and select a category from the list. In the contact list, you can display contacts
by category.
4 To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create a
recording. For more information on creating notes, see “Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas” on page 71.
5 When finished, tap OK to return to the contact list.
Tap to return to the contact list (the
contact is saved automatically).
Scroll to see more fields.
Notes is a good place for
maps and directions.
Synchronizing Contacts
Contacts stored on your device can be synchronized with Outlook contacts
stored on your desktop or with Mobile Information Server 2002 or later.
New items entered in one location are copied to the other during synchronization. Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as pictures when synchronizing with your desktop, but are removed when synchronizing with a
server.
For more information on synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on the
desktop.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
61
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Viewing Contacts
The contact list displays the contact name and the first primary phone
number or e-mail address specified for that contact. Contacts are ordered
by name of contact or company.
S Tap the default letter (home, w ork, mobile, or e-mail) to the right of
the contact to see additional phone numbers and e-mail addresses.
S Select a contact and press the Left/Right controls to change the default
number, displayed as a letter to the right of the contact name.
S To see more contact information, tap the contact.
S To see a list of available actions for a contact via a pop-up menu, tap
and hold the contact.
S To see a list of contacts employed by a specific company, tap View > By
Company. Then, tap the desired company name.
Note: You can change the appearance of the contact list by tapping Tools
> Options.
Tap for a list of phone numbers and e-mail addresses.
Indicates the default number.
Tap to toggle By Name and By Company views.
62
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Creating or Changing a Contact
S To create a contact, tap New. To enter notes, tap the Notes tab. When
finished, tap ok to return to the contact list.
S To change a contact, tap it in the contact list, and then tap Edit. To
cancel edits, tap Edit > Undo. When finished making changes, tap ok to
return to the contact list.
Note: If you enter a name with more than two words, the middle word
is recorded as a middle name. If your contact has a double first or last
name, tap the Name arrow and enter the names in the proper box.
Tap to access the Name
fields.
Tap anywhere outside the box
to close and return to details.
Note: New contacts are added to the displayed category.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
63
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Adding a Note to a Contact
You can add written or typed notes and even recordings (if your device
supports recordings) to a contact. Notes are handy for maps and drawings.
1 In the contact list, tap the contact.
2 Tap the Notes tab. For specific instructions, tap Start > Help > Notes
to see Notes Help.
These are controls for
the recorder.
Use your stylus to write
or draw your information here.
Tap to activate the keyboard.
Tap to activate the writing pad.
Tap to activate the recorder.
Note: To edit an existing note, tap the contact, tap Edit, then tap the
Notes tab.
64
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Assigning a Contact to a Category
1 In the contact list, tap the contact, and then tap Edit.
2 Scroll to and tap Categories.
3 On the Select tab, select the categories to which you want to assign the
contact.
4 To create a new category, tap the Add/Delete tab, enter the category
name, then tap Add. The new category is automatically selected in the
Select tab.
5 Tap ok to return to the contacts.
A check mark indicates
a selected category.
Copying a Contact
1 In the contact list, select the contact. To select multiple contacts, tap
and drag.
2 Tap Tools, and then select Copy Contacts.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
65
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Sending a Message to a Contact
1 In the contact list, tap and hold the contact. To select multiple contacts,
tap and drag. Then, tap and hold the selected contacts.
2 On the pop-up menu, select Send Email or Send SMS, depending
upon the type of message to send.
Note: To send an e-mail message, you must have an e-mail address configured for the contact. To send an SMS (Short Messaging Service) message,
you must have an SMS number for the contact, which is usually the mobile phone number.
66
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Finding a Contact
There are four ways to find a contact:
S Tap Start > Find, enter the contact name (first, last, or middle), phone
number, or address, select Contacts for the type, then tap Go.
S From Contacts, start typing a contact name until you see it displayed on
the screen. To show all contacts again, tap the text box at the top of the
screen and clear the text, or tap the arrow to the right of the text box.
S In the contact list, tap the category list (labeled All Contacts by default)
and tap the category to which you have assigned a contact. To show all
contacts again, select All Contacts.
S To view the names of companies for which your contacts work, in the
contact list, tap View > By Company. The number of contacts that
work for that company is displayed to the right of the company name.
Note: To quickly move through a long list of contacts, tap one of the sets
of letters displayed at the top of the contact list. This takes you to the contact names beginning with those letters.
Enter the first few letters of
the contact in question here.
Tap to jump to that portion of the contacts list.
Tap to toggle to By Name (note the Company view)
Deleting a Contact
1 In the contact list, tap and hold the contact. To select multiple contacts,
tap and drag. Then, tap and hold the selected contacts.
2 On the pop-up menu, tap Delete Contact. The next time you synchronize, the contact is deleted from the desktop also.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
67
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Adding a Contact to Speed Dial
You can create speed dials to call frequently-called numbers with a single
tap. Before you can create a speed dial entry for a phone number, that
number must already exist in Contacts.
1 From the Phone keypad, tap Speed Dial > New.
2 Tap the desired contact name and number.
3 In the Location field, tap the Up/Down arrows to select an available
location to assign as the new speed dial entry. The first speed dial location is reserved for your voice mail.
To delete a speed dial entry, go to the Speed Dial list, tap and hold the
contact name in the box to the right of the assigned speed dial number,
then tap Delete.
Changing Contacts Options
In the contact list, tap Tools > Options.
S The area code and country/region for new contacts are automatically
entered based on the information in Country/Region settings.
S If you are having trouble reading the contacts in the contact list, select
Use large font.
S To increase the available space for displaying contacts in the list, clear
Show ABC tabs.
Clear this to view more
contacts per screen.
Tap this to view larger text.
Enter the three-digit area code.
Select from a drop-down list.
68
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Tasks: Keeping a To Do List
To switch to Tasks on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Tasks.
Use Tasks to keep track of what you have to do. A variety of task information can display on the Today screen. If you use Microsoft Outlook on
your desktop, you can synchronize tasks between your device and desktop.
Select the category of tasks you want displayed in the list.
Select the sort order of the list.
Use this entry bar to assign a task quickly.
Indicates a high priority.
Tap to display or edit the
task details.
Tap and hold to display a
pop-up menu of actions.
Tap to create a new task.
Note: To change the way information is displayed in the list, tap Tools >
Options.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
69
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Creating a Task
S To quickly create a task, enter text in the Tap here to add a new task
box at the top of the screen. If you do not see this box, tap Tools >
Entry Bar.
S To create a task with detailed information, such as start and due dates,
tap New. To enter notes, tap the Notes tab.
You can enter a start date and due date or enter other information by
first tapping the field. If the input panel is open, you need to hide it to
see all available fields.
You can enter text, draw, or create a recording. For more information
on creating notes, see “Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas” on page 71.
S To change a task, tap it in the task list, and then tap Edit.
S Using the onscreen keyboard, enter a description.
S To assign the task to a category, tap Categories and select a category
from the list. In the task list, you can display tasks by category.
S When finished, tap ok to return to the task list.
Tap to return to the task list (the
task is saved automatically).
Tap to choose from predefined
subjects.
Notes is a good place for
maps and drawings.
Note: To quickly create a task with only a subject, tap Entry Bar on the
Tools menu. Then, tap Tap here to add a new task and enter your task
information.
Synchronizing Tasks
Tasks stored on your 700 Color Computer can synchronize with Microsoft Outlook on your desktop. Task synchronization is automatically selected in ActiveSync.
New items entered on one computer are copied to the other during synchronization. Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as metafiles (pictures).
For more information on synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on the
desktop.
70
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas
To switch to Notes on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Notes.
Notes helps you quickly capture your ideas, notes, and thoughts. You can
create a note using written and typed text, drawings, and recordings. You
can also share your notes with others through e-mail, infrared, and synchronization with your desktop.
Tap to change the sort
order of the list.
Tap to open a note or
play a recording.
Tap and hold to display a
pop-up menu of actions.
Tap to record.
Tap to show or hide the Recording toolbar.
Tap to create a new item.
Note: To create documents with advanced formatting or templates, such
as bulleted lists and tabs, use word processing software developed for your
device, such as Pocket Word.
Creating a Note
To create your note, tap New, then write, draw, type, or record your information. For information about using the input panel, writing and drawing, and creating recordings, see “Basic Skills” on page 26.
S Writing
Using the stylus, write directly on the screen.
S Drawing
Using the stylus, draw directly on the screen.
S Typing
Using the input panel, enter typed text into the 700 Color Computer.
Do this by tapping keys on the onscreen keyboard or by using handwriting recognition software.
S Recording
Create a stand-alone recording or embed a recording into a note.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
71
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Synchronizing Notes
Notes can be synchronized between your desktop and device either
through notes synchronization or file synchronization. Notes synchronization synchronizes the notes on your 700 Color Computer with Outlook
Notes on your desktop. File synchronization synchronizes all notes on
your 700 Color Computer with the My Documents folder for the 700
Color Computer on your desktop.
To synchronize your notes through notes synchronization, first select the
Notes information type for synchronization in ActiveSync. The next time
you synchronize, all notes in My Documents and its subfolder on your
device appear in Outlook Notes on your desktop. Notes that contain only
text appear as regular notes in Outlook on your desktop, while notes containing written text or drawings appear in the device format. In addition,
all notes in the Notes group in Outlook on the desktop appear in Notes on
the device.
To synchronize your notes as files, in ActiveSync, select the Files information type for synchronization and clear the Notes information type. When
you select Files, the My Documents folder for the 700 Color Computer is
created on your desktop. All .PWI files placed in the My Documents folder on your device and all .DOC files placed in the My Documents folder
for the 700 Color Computer on your desktop are synchronized. Passwordprotected files cannot be synchronized.
ActiveSync converts documents during synchronization. For more information on synchronization or file conversion, see ActiveSync Help on the
desktop.
Note: When you delete or change an item on either your desktop or 700
Color Computer, the item is changed or deleted in the other location the
next time you synchronize.
Note: If you synchronize your notes using file synchronization and then
later decide to use notes synchronization, all of your notes are synchronized with Outlook on your desktop and no longer store in the My Documents folder for the 700 Color Computer.
72
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages
To switch to Inbox on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Inbox.
You can receive Internet e-mail messages and SMS messages in Inbox. Internet e-mail messages are sent by using an address you receive from your
Internet service provider (ISP) or your employer. SMS messages are sent
and received through your wireless phone service provider by using a
phone number as the message address.
You can send and receive e-mail by synchronizing with your desktop, or
by connecting to a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4) mail server. You need to set up an e-mail account
for each method that you use except for Microsoft ActiveSync, which is set
up by default. The ActiveSync folder on your 700 Color Computer stores
messages that you send and receive through synchronization with a desktop. Account names appear as folders in the folder list (located on the left,
under the navigation bar) in the Inbox message list.
With synchronization, messages are synchronized between the device Inbox and the PC Inbox by using ActiveSync and Microsoft Exchange or
Microsoft Outlook. For more information, see “Synchronizing E-mail Messages” below.
When connecting to a POP3 or IMAP4 server, you use a modem to connect to your Internet service provider (ISP), or a modem or Ethernet card
to connect to the local area network to which your e-mail server is connected. You can also use your phone to connect by using a cellular line connection. For more information, see “Connecting to a Mail Server” on page
75.
Synchronizing E-mail Messages
After selecting Inbox for synchronization in ActiveSync, e-mail messages
are synchronized as part of the general synchronization process. During
synchronization:
S Messages are copied from the Inbox folder on your desktop or the
Microsoft Exchange server to the Inbox folder on your 700 Color Computer. (Note that you can only synchronize information directly with an
Exchange Server if your company is running Microsoft Mobile Information Server 2002 or later.) By default, you receive messages from the
last three days only, the first 100 lines of each new message, and file attachments of less than 100 KB in size.
S Messages in the Outbox folder on your device are transferred to Exchange or Outlook and then sent from those programs.
S The messages on the two computers are linked. When you delete a message on your 700 Color Computer, it is deleted from your desktop the
next time you synchronize.
S Messages in subfolders in other e-mail folders in Outlook are synchronized only if they were selected for synchronization in ActiveSync.
For information on initiating Inbox synchronization or changing synchronization settings, see ActiveSync Help on your desktop or select Start >
Help > Connections to see Connections Help.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
73
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Managing E-mail Messages and Folders
Each e-mail account and SMS account has its own folder hierarchy with
five default folders: Inbox, Outbox, Deleted Items, Drafts, and Sent Items.
The messages you receive and send through the mail account are stored in
these folders. You can also create additional folders within each hierarchy.
The Deleted Items folder contains messages that were deleted on the device. The behavior of the Deleted Items and Sent Items folders depends on
the Inbox options you have chosen.
The behavior of the folders you create depends on whether you are using
ActiveSync, SMS, POP3, or IMAP4.
S If you use ActiveSync,
e-mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook automatically synchronize with your device. You can select to synchronize additional folders
by designating them for ActiveSync. The folders you create and the
messages you move are then mirrored on the server. For example, if you
move two messages from the Inbox folder to a folder named Family,
and you have designated Family for synchronization, the server creates a
copy of the Family folder and copies the messages into that folder. You
can then read the messages while away from your desktop.
S If you use SMS,
messages are stored in the Inbox folder.
S If you use POP3
and you move e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link is broken
between the messages on the device and their copies on the mail server.
The next time you connect, the mail server sees that the messages are
missing from the device Inbox and deletes them from the server. This
prevents you from having duplicate copies of a message, but it also
means that you no longer have access to messages that you move to folders created from anywhere except the 700 Color Computer.
S If you use IMAP4,
the folders you create and the e-mail messages you move are mirrored
on the server. Therefore, messages are available to you anytime you connect to your mail server, whether it is from your 700 Color Computer
or desktop. This synchronization of folders occurs whenever you connect to your mail server, create new folders, or rename or delete folders
when connected.
For all accounts except ActiveSync, you can access folder options by tapping Tools > Manage Folders.
74
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Connecting to a Mail Server
In addition to synchronizing e-mail messages with your desktop, you can
send and receive e-mail messages by connecting to an e-mail server using a
modem or network card connected to your 700 Color Computer. You
need to set up a remote connection to a network or an ISP, and a connection to your e-mail server. For more information, see “Getting Connected”
on page 98.
When you connect to the e-mail server, new messages are downloaded to
the 700 Color Computer Inbox folder, messages in the 700 Color Computer Outbox folder are sent, and messages that were deleted on the e-mail
server are removed from the 700 Color Computer Inbox folder.
Messages that you receive directly from an e-mail server are linked to your
e-mail server rather than your desktop. When you delete a message on
your 700 Color Computer, it is also deleted from the e-mail server the
next time you connect based on the settings selected in ActiveSync.
You can work online or offline. When working online, you read and respond to messages while connected to the e-mail server. Messages are sent
as soon as you tap Send, which saves space on your 700 Color Computer.
When working offline, once you have downloaded new message headers or
partial messages, you can disconnect from the e-mail server and then decide which messages to download completely. The next time you connect,
Inbox downloads the complete messages you have marked for retrieval and
sends the messages you have composed.
Setting Up or Changing an Account
To set up an account:
S To set up a POP3 or IMAP4 e-mail account, tap Accounts > New Account. Follow the instructions in the New Account Wizard.
S To set up an SMS account, tap Accounts > Accounts, and then tap
SMS. Follow the instructions on the screen.
To change options for an account:
1 Tap Accounts > Accounts.
2 Tap the name of the account, and follow the instructions on the screen.
To delete an account:
1 Tap Accounts > Accounts.
2 Tap and hold the name of the account, and then tap Delete.
Note: You can set up several e-mail accounts including your ActiveSync
account, but you can set up only one SMS account.
Note: You cannot add a new account while connected. Tap Accounts >
Disconnect to disconnect.
Note: You cannot delete your SMS account.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
75
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Downloading Messages from the Server
In Inbox, tap Accounts > Connect to open a connection to the Internet or
your corporate network, depending on the account. For more information,
tap Start > Help > Connections to see Connections Help.
1 Tap Accounts and ensure that the account you want to use is selected
(marked by a bullet.)
2 Tap Connect. The messages on your 700 Color Computer and e-mail
server are synchronized: new messages are downloaded to the 700 Color
Inbox folder, messages in the 700 Color Outbox folder are sent, and
messages that were deleted from the server are removed from the 700
Color Inbox. Tap a message in the message list to open it.
3 If you read a message and decide that you need the full copy, tap Edit >
Mark for Download while in the message window. If you are in the
message list, tap and hold the message, and then tap Mark for Download. This also downloads message attachments if you selected those options when you set up the e-mail account. You can also choose to download full copies of messages by default.
4 When finished, tap Accounts > Disconnect.
Note: Receiving entire messages consumes storage memory.
Note: The size column in the message list displays the local size and server
size of a message. Even when a message has downloaded fully, these numbers may differ because the size of a message can vary between the server
and the device.
76
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Composing and Sending Messages
To compose a message:
1 In the message list, tap New.
2 To select an account, tap the From list and select “ActiveSync,” “SMS,”
or the desired e-mail account.
3 Enter the e-mail address or SMS address of one or more recipients, separating them with semicolons. To access addresses and phone numbers
from Contacts, tap To.
4 Enter your message. To quickly add common messages, tap My Text
and tap a desired message.
5 To check spelling, tap Edit > Spell Check.
6 Tap Send. If you are working offline, the message is moved to the Outbox folder and is sent the next time you connect.
Tap to show or hide the
complete header.
Tap to show or hide the recording tool bar.
Tap to display the Address Book.
Tap to insert common (preset) messages.
Note: If you are sending an SMS message and want to know if it was received, before sending the message, tap Edit > Options > Request SMS
text message delivery notification.
You can directly call the sender of an SMS message by tapping the icon
shown to the left, then Call.
Note: Depending on the e-mail address options that you select, you can
use a directory service in addition to your contact list to verify names.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
77
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Companion Programs
The companion programs consist of Microsoft Pocket Word, Microsoft
Pocket Excel, Windows Media Player, and Microsoft Reader. To switch to
a companion program on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start >
Programs, then tap the program name.
Pocket Word
Pocket Word works with Microsoft Word on your desktop to give you
access to copies of your documents. You can create new documents on
your 700 Color Computer, or you can copy documents from your desktop
to your 700 Color Computer. Synchronize documents between your desktop and your 700 Color Computer to have up-to-date content in both
locations.
Creating a Document
Use Pocket Word to create documents, such as letters or meeting minutes.
To create a new file, tap Start > Programs > Pocket Word > New. You get
either a blank document or a template, depending on what you have selected in the Tools > Options dialog box. Select an input mode from the
View menu.
You can open only one document at a time; when you open a second document, you have to save the first. You can save a document you create or
edit in formats such as Word (.DOC), Pocket Word (.PSW), Rich Text
Format (.RTF), and Plain Text (.TXT).
Pocket Word contains a list of files stored on your 700 Color Computer.
Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, and send files,
tap and hold a file in the list, then, select the action on the pop-up menu.
Tap to change the sort
order of the list.
Tap to open a document.
Tap and hold an item to
see a pop-up menu of
actions.
Tap to create a new document.
78
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
You can enter information in Pocket Word in one of four modes (typing,
writing, recording, and drawing), which are displayed on the View menu.
Each mode has its own toolbar, which you can show and hide by tapping
the Show/Hide Toolbar button on the command bar.
You can change the zoom magnification by tapping View > Zoom, then
select the percentage you want. Select a higher percentage to enter text and
a lower one to see more of your document.
If you are opening a Word document created on a desktop, you may select
View > Wrap to Window so that you can see the entire document.
To check spelling, select text, then tap Tools > Spell Check. To use your
new document as a template, move the document to the Templates folder.
You can insert the data in a document. First, make sure that no drawings
are selected, tap and hold anywhere on the document, then tap Insert
Date from the pop-up menu.
Typing Mode
Using the input panel, enter typed text into the document. For more information on entering typed text, see “Basic Skills” on page 26.
To format existing text and to edit text, first select the text. You can select
text as you do in a Word document, using your stylus instead of the mouse
to drag through the text you want to select. You can search a document to
find text by tapping Edit > Find/Replace.
Tap and hold to see a pop-up menu of actions.
Tap to return to the
document list (changes are
saved automatically).
Tap to change formatting
options.
Tap to format text.
Tap to show or hide the toolbar.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
79
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Writing Mode
In writing mode, use your stylus to write directly on the screen. Ruled
lines are displayed as a guide, and the zoom magnification is greater than
in typing mode to allow you to write more easily. For more information
on writing and selecting writing, see “Basic Skills” on page 26.
With Space button selected,
drag to insert space. An arrow
appears showing the space
direction and size.
Tap to highlight selected text.
Tap to select formatting options, such as
pen weight and line color.
Space button.
Pen button.
Note: If you cross three ruled lines in a single stylus stroke, the writing
becomes a drawing, and can be edited and manipulated as described in
“Drawing Mode” on the next page.
Note: Written words are converted to graphics (metafiles) when a Pocket
Word document is converted to a Word document on your desktop.
Recording Mode
In recording mode, embed a recording into your document. Recordings
are saved as .WAV files. For more information on recording, see “Basic
Skills” on page 26.
For more information on using Pocket Word, tap Start > Help > Pocket
Word to see Pocket Word Help.
80
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Drawing Mode
In drawing mode, use your stylus to draw on the screen. Grid lines appear
as a guide. When you lift your stylus off the screen after the first stroke, a
drawing box indicating the boundaries of the drawing appears. Every subsequent stroke within or touching the drawing box becomes part of the
drawing. For more information on drawing and selecting drawings, see
“Basic Skills” on page 26.
Resize an object by dragging
the selection handles.
Tap to select formatting options, such as
line weight, fill color, and line color.
Tap an arrow to see your choices.
Pen button.
Synchronizing Pocket Word Documents
Pocket Word documents can be synchronized with Word documents on
your desktop. To synchronize files, first select the Files information type
for synchronization in ActiveSync. When you select Files, the My Documents folder for the 700 Color Computer is created on your desktop.
Place all files you want to synchronize with the device in this folder. Password-protected files cannot be synchronized.
All Pocket Word files stored in My Documents and its subfolders are synchronized with the desktop. ActiveSync converts documents during synchronization.
For more information on synchronization or file conversion, see ActiveSync
Help on the desktop.
Note: When you delete a file on either your desktop or your 700 Color
Computer, the file is deleted in the other location the next time you synchronize.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
81
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Pocket Excel
You can create and edit workbooks and templates in Microsoft Pocket Excel as you do in Microsoft Excel on your desktop. Pocket Excel workbooks
are usually saved as .PXL files, but you can also save them in .XLS format.
When you close a workbook, it is automatically named and placed in the
Pocket Excel workbook list. You can attach a password to a workbook to
help ensure privacy.
Creating a Workbook
Use Pocket Excel to create workbooks, such as expense reports and mileage
logs. To create a new file, tap Start > Programs > Pocket Excel > New. A
blank workbook appears. Or, if you have selected a template for new
workbooks in the Tools > Options dialog box, that template appears with
appropriate text and formatting already provided. You can open only one
workbook at a time; when you open a second workbook, save the first.
You can save a workbook you create or edit in a variety of formats,
including Pocket Excel (.PXL) and Excel (.XLS). You can also save a
workbook as a template by moving the workbook to the Templates folder.
Pocket Excel contains a list of the files stored on your 700 Color Computer. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, and send
files, tap and hold a file in the list. Then select the appropriate action from
the pop-up menu.
Pocket Excel provides fundamental spreadsheet tools, such as formulas,
functions, sorting, and filtering. To display the toolbar, tap View >
Toolbar.
Cell contents appear
here as you enter them.
Zoom button.
AutoSum button.
Format button.
Note: If your workbook contains sensitive information, you can protect it
with a password. To do so, open the workbook, tap Edit > Password. Every time you open the workbook, enter a password, preferably one that is
easy for you to remember but hard for others to guess.
82
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Tips for Working in Pocket Excel
Note the following when working in large worksheets in Pocket Excel:
S View in full-screen mode to see as much of your worksheet as possible.
Tap View > Full Screen. To exit full-screen mode, tap Restore.
S Tap View > Zoom and select a percentage so that you can easily read
the worksheet.
S Show and hide window elements. Tap View and then tap the elements
you want to show or hide.
S Freeze panes on a worksheet. First select the cell where you want to
freeze panes. Tap View > Freeze Panes. You might want to freeze the
top and leftmost panes in a worksheet to keep row and column labels
visible as you scroll through a sheet. Tap View > Unfreeze Panes to
undo this process.
S Split panes to view different areas of a large worksheet. Tap View >
Split. Then drag the split bar to where you want it. To remove the split,
tap View > Remove Split.
S Show and hide rows. To hide a row, select a cell in the row you want to
hide. Then tap Format > Row > Hide. To show a hidden row, tap
Tools > Go To, and then type a reference that is in the hidden row.
Then tap Format > Row > Unhide.
S Do the same to show and hide columns. To hide a column, select a cell
in the column you want to hide. Then tap Format > Column > Hide.
To show a hidden column, tap Tools > Go To, and then type a reference that is in the hidden column. Then tap Format > Column > Unhide.
For more information on using Pocket Excel, tap Start > Help > Pocket
Excel to see Pocket Excel Help.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
83
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
MSN Messenger
MSN Messenger on your 700 Color Computer provides the same chat
environment as MSN Messenger on your desktop. These features include:
S Seeing who is online
S Sending and receiving instant messages
S Having an instant message conversation with a group of contacts
S Telling contacts that you are unavailable
S Blocking contacts from seeing your status or sending you messages
To use MSN Messenger, you need a Microsoft Passport account, or a
Microsoft Exchange e-mail account that your employer provides. Once
you have one of these accounts, do the following:
1 Set up a connection on your 700 Color Computer, such as a modem or
wireless connection, that enables you to connect to the Internet.
2 Set up an account in MSN Messenger.
3 Sign in to MSN Messenger.
Note: To set up a free Hotmail account, go to http://www.hotmail.com.
To set up a Microsoft Passport account, go to http://www.passport.com.
To set up an Exchange account, see your network administrator.
For more information on using MSN Messenger, tap Start > Help > MSN
Messenger to see MSN Messenger Help.
To switch to MSN Messenger, tap Start > Programs > MSN Messenger.
84
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Setting Up an Account
Before you can use MSN Messenger, you must set up the instant messaging accounts to use. For MSN Messenger Service, you must have a Microsoft Passport or Hotmail account. For Exchange Instant Messaging, you
must have an Exchange account.
1 Create a connection for your device. To use MSN Messenger Service,
set up a connection to the Internet; to use Exchange Instant Messaging,
set up a connection to your corporate network. See page 98 for more
information on getting connected.
2 In MSN Messenger, tap Tools > Options > the Accounts tab.
3 Select Enable MSN Messenger Service or Enable Exchange Instant Messaging.
4 Enter your sign-in name and password for the selected accounts. Your
sign-in name is usually in the username@domain.com form.
5 If you selected both accounts, under Sign in using this account first, select which account to sign in to first.
Signing In and Out
S To sign in, tap anywhere on the screen. Follow the directions on the
screen.
S To sign out, tap Tools > Sign Out.
S To sign in upon connecting, tap Tools > Options > General and select
the Run this program upon connection box.
S Signing in to an Exchange account may take several minutes depending
upon your connection speed. Reducing the number of Exchange contacts decreases your sign-in time.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
85
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Working with Contacts
The MSN Messenger window shows all of your messenger contacts at a
glance, divided into Online and Not Online categories. From this view,
while connected, you can chat, send e-mail, block the contact from chatting with you, or delete contacts from your list using the pop-up menu.
Tap a contact to start a
chat.
Tap and hold to display a
pop-up menu of actions.
To add a contact, tap Tools > Add a Contact and follow the directions on
the screen.
To delete a contact, tap and hold the contact’s name, then tap Delete
Contact from the pop-up menu.
To see others online without being seen, tap Tools > My Status > Appear
Offline.
86
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Managing Contacts
To be alerted each time you are added to a contact list, tap Tools > Options > the Privacy tab.
S To block a contact from seeing your status and sending you messages,
tap the contact and tap the right arrow. This moves the contact to the
My Block List.
S To unblock a contact, tap the contact and tap the left arrow. This
moves the contact to the My Allow List.
S To receive an alert when someone adds you to their contacts list, select
Alert me when I am added to a Passport contact list.
S To see who has you listed as a contact, tap View.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
87
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Sending a Message
S Tap a contact to whom you want to send a message. Enter your message
in the text entry area at the bottom of the screen and tap Send. To
quickly add common messages, tap My Text and tap a desired message.
S To invite another contact to an ongoing chat, tap Tools > Invite and
tap a contact.
S To see who is already chatting or to switch between chats, tap Chats.
Enter a message.
Tap to send message.
88
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile
Use Microsoft Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile to play digital
audio and video files that are stored on your 700 Series Computer or on a
network.
To switch to Windows Media Player on your 700 Color Computer, tap
Start > Windows Media.
Use Microsoft Windows Media Player on your desktop to copy digital audio and video files to your 700 Color Computer. You can play Windows
Media and MP3 files on your Windows Mobile.
Indicates the progress
of the current track.
Tap to adjust volume.
Tap to skip to the next song.
Tap to play a previous song.
Tap to stop.
Tap to play or pause.
For more information about using Windows Media Player for Windows
Mobile, tap Start > Help > Windows Media Player to see Windows Media
Player Help.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
89
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Microsoft Reader
Use Microsoft Reader to read eBooks on your 700 Color Computer.
Download books to your desktop from your favorite eBook Web site.
Then, use ActiveSync to copy the book files to your activated 700 Color
Computer. The books appear in the Reader Library, where you can tap
them in the list to open them. Each book consists of a cover page, an optional table of contents, and the pages of the book. You can:
S Page through the book by using the Up/Down control on your 700
Color Computer or by tapping the page number on each page.
S Annotate the book with highlighting, bookmarks, notes, and drawings.
S Search for text and look up definitions for words.
The Guidebook contains all the information needed to use the software.
To open the Guidebook, tap Help on the Reader command bar. Or, on a
book page, tap and hold on the book title, and then tap Help on the popup menu.
To switch to Microsoft Reader, tap Start > Programs > Microsoft Reader.
Getting Books on Your 700 Color Computer
You can download book files from the Web. Just visit your favorite eBook
retailer and follow the instructions to download the book files.
Sample books and a dictionary are also included in the MSReader folder in
the Extras folder on the Windows Mobile Companion CD.
Use ActiveSync to download the files from your desktop to your activated
mobile computer as described in the Read Me file in the MSReader folder.
90
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Using the Library
The Library is your Reader home page; it displays a list of all books stored
on your 700 Color Computer or storage card. To open the Library:
1 On the Reader command bar, tap Library.
2 On a book page, tap the book title, then tap Library on the pop-up
menu.
3 To open a book, tap its title in the Library list.
Tap to scroll through
the Library list.
Tap to select a sort order.
Tap to open a book.
Tap here to navigate to
other parts of the Reader.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
91
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Reading a Book
Each book consists of a cover page, an optional table of contents, and the
pages of the book. Navigation options are listed in the bottom portion of
the cover page.
The first time you open a book, go to the first page or to the table of contents, if there is one. Subsequently, whenever you open the book, you are
automatically taken to the last page read.
In addition to the text, each book page includes a page number and book
title.
Tap to select a
navigation option.
Select an option after
dragging to select a
text.
Drag to select text.
Tap arrows to turn the
page, or tap and hold
page number to bring up
page riffle.
You can also page through a book by using the Up/Down/Left/Right controls on your 700 Color Computer.
92
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Using Reader Features
Reading a book electronically gives you several options not available with
paper books. These options are available from any book page.
Select text by dragging across the text on the page. Then, tap an option on
the pop-up menu, as described here:
S Searching for Text
Find text in a book by tapping Find on the pop-up menu. Enter the
word you want to search for, and tap the desired Find option. Reader
highlights found text on the page. To close Find, tap outside the box.
To return to your original page, tap the title and then tap Return on the
pop-up menu.
S Copying Text
You can copy text from books that support this feature into any program that accepts text. On a book page, select the text you want to
copy. Then, tap Copy Text on the pop-up menu. The text can be
pasted into the program of your choice.
S Adding Bookmarks
When you add a bookmark to a book, a color-coded bookmark icon
appears in the right margin. You can add multiple bookmarks to a book.
Then, from anywhere in the book, tap the bookmark icon to go to the
bookmarked page.
S Highlighting Text
When you highlight text, it appears with a colored background.
S Attaching Notes to Text
When you attach a note to text, you enter the text in a notepad that appears on top of the book page. A Note icon displays in the left margin.
To show or hide the note, tap the icon.
S Adding Drawings
When you add a drawing, a Drawing icon appears in the bottom-left
corner of the page, and drawing tools appear across the bottom of the
page. Draw by dragging your stylus.
S Annotations Index
To see a list of a book’s annotations, including bookmarks, highlights,
text notes, and drawings, tap Annotations Index on the book’s cover
page. You can tap an entry in the list to go to the annotated page.
Removing a Book
When you finish reading a book, you can delete it to conserve space on
your 700 Color Computer. If a copy of the book is stored on your desktop, you can download it again at any time.
To remove a book from your 700 Color Computer, tap and hold the title
in the Library list, and then tap Delete on the pop-up menu.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
93
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Pocket Internet Explorer
Use Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer to view Web or WAP pages in
either of these ways:
S During synchronization with your desktop, download your favorite
links and mobile favorites that are stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in Internet Explorer on the desktop.
S Connect to an ISP or network and browse the Web. To do this, create
the connection first, as described in “Getting Connected” on page 98.
When connected to an ISP or network, you can also download files and
programs from the Internet or intranet.
To switch to Pocket Internet Explorer on your 700 Color Computer, tap
Start > Internet Explorer.
The Mobile Favorites Folder
Only items stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites folder
in Internet Explorer on your desktop are synchronized with your 700 Color Computer. This folder was created automatically when you installed
ActiveSync.
Favorite Links
During synchronization, the list of favorite links in the Mobile Favorites
folder on your desktop is synchronized with Pocket Internet Explorer on
your 700 Color Computer. Both computers are updated with changes
made to either list each time you synchronize. Unless you mark the favorite link as a mobile favorite, only the link is downloaded to your 700 Color
Computer. Connect to your ISP or network to view the content.
1 In ActiveSync on your desktop, click Tools > Options, and select “Favorites” from the Mobile Device list. For more information on using
ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop.
2 In Internet Explorer on your desktop, save or move favorite links to the
Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites list via Favorites > Organize
Favorites. For more information on using Internet Explorer, see Internet
Explorer Help on the desktop.
3 Connect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop. If synchronization
does not start automatically, in ActiveSync on your desktop, click Sync.
94
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Mobile Favorites
If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later on your desktop,
you can download mobile favorites to your 700 Color Computer. Synchronizing mobile favorites downloads Web content to your 700 Color
Computer so that you can view pages while you are disconnected from
your ISP and desktop.
Use the Internet Explorer plug-in installed with ActiveSync to create mobile favorites quickly. To create a mobile favorite:
1 In ActiveSync on your desktop, click Tools > Options, and select
“Favorites” from the Mobile Device list. For more information on using
ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop.
2 In Internet Explorer 5.0 or greater on your desktop, browse to the page
you want to view offline, then click Tools > Create Mobile Favorite.
3 To change the link name, enter a new name in the Name box.
4 In the Update box, select a desired update schedule to keep the page in
the Mobile Favorites folder up to date. You can also update content by
clicking Tools > Synchronize in Internet Explorer.
5 To save the link in a subfolder of Mobile Favorites, click Create In and
select the desired subfolder.
6 Click OK. Internet Explorer downloads the latest version of the page to
your desktop.
7 To download the pages that are linked to the mobile favorite you just
created, in Internet Explorer on the desktop, right-click the mobile
favorite, then click Properties. On the Download tab, specify the
number of links deep you want to download. To conserve 700 Color
Computer memory, go only one level deep.
8 Connect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop. If synchronization
between your 700 Color Computer and desktop does not start, in ActiveSync on your desktop, click Sync.
Mobile favorites take up storage memory on your 700 Color Computer.
To minimize the amount of memory used:
S In the settings for the Favorites information, type in ActiveSync options, turn off pictures and sounds, or stop some mobile favorites from
being downloaded to the 700 Color Computer. For more information,
see ActiveSync Help.
S Limit the number of downloaded linked pages. In Internet Explorer on
the desktop, right-click the mobile favorite you want to change and then
Properties. In the Download tab, specify “0” or “1” for the number of
linked pages you want to download.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
95
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Using AvantGo Channels
AvantGo is a free interactive service that gives you access to personalized
content and thousands of popular Web sites. You subscribe to AvantGo
channels directly from your 700 Color Computer. Then, you synchronize
your 700 Color Computer and desktop, or connect to the Internet to
download the content. For more information, visit the AvantGo Web site.
To synchronize an AvantGo channel:
1 In Pocket Internet Explorer on your 700 Color Computer, tap
display your list of favorites.
to
2 Tap the AvantGo Channels link.
3 Tap Activate.
4 Follow the directions on the screen. Synchronize your 700 Series Computer with your desktop, then tap My Channels to complete the AvantGo setup.
5 When synchronization is complete, tap the AvantGo Channels link in
your list of favorites to see a few of the most popular channels.
To add or remove channels, tap the Add or Remove link.
Using Pocket Internet Explorer
You can use Pocket Internet Explorer to browse mobile favorites and channels that were downloaded to your 700 Color Computer without connecting to the Internet. You can also connect to the Internet through an ISP or
a network connection and browse the Web.
Favorites button
Home button
Refresh button
96
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Viewing Mobile Favorites and Channels
1 Tap the Favorites button to display your list of favorites.
2 Tap the page you want to view.
Tap the favorite you want
to view.
Tap to add or delete a folder or favorite link.
The page that was downloaded the last time you synchronized with your
desktop opens. If the page is not on your 700 Color Computer, the favorite is dimmed. Synchronize with your desktop again to download the page
to your 700 Color Computer, or connect to the Internet to view the page.
Browsing the Internet
1 Set up a connection to your ISP or corporate network using Connections, as described in “Getting Connected” on page 98.
2 To connect and start browsing, do one of the following:
S Tap the Favorites button, and then tap the favorite you want to view.
S Tap View > Address Bar. In the address bar that appears at the top of
the screen, enter the Web address you want to visit and then tap Go.
Tap the arrow to choose from previously entered addresses.
Note: To add a favorite link while using the 700 Color Computer, go to
the page you want to add, tap and hold on the page, and tap Add to
Favorites.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
97
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Getting Connected
You can set up connections to the Internet and corporate network at work
to do such activities as browsing the Internet or intranet, sending and receiving e-mail and instant messages, and synchronizing information using
ActiveSync.
Connections can be made using a modem, wireless network, or network
(Ethernet) card. You can use a modem connection to set up connections
with an external modem, or through your mobile phone network using a
cellular line or GPRS.
Your 700 Color Computer has two groups of connection settings: My ISP
and My Work Network. My ISP settings connect to the Internet, and My
Work Network settings connect to any private network, such as a corporate network you use at work.
S My ISP. Note: This is available only on 700 Color and 730 Computers.
Once connected, you can send and receive e-mail messages by using Inbox and view Web or WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer.
The communication software for creating an ISP connection is already
installed on your 700 Color or 730 Computer. Your service provider
provides the software needed to install other services, such as paging and
fax services. If this is the method you want to use, see “Connecting to an
Internet Service Provider” on page 99.
S My Work Network: Connect to the network at your company or organization where you work. Once connected, you can send and receive
e-mail messages by using Inbox, view Web or WAP pages by using
Pocket Internet Explorer, and synchronize with your desktop. If this is
the method you want to use, see “Connecting to Work” on page 105.
S PCS Vision: Note: This is available only on 700CXL Computers.
Personal Communications System (PCS) Vision expands wireless possibilities from rich, full-color graphic screens to a dynamic selection of
advanced multimedia services. PCS Vision puts the power of crytsal
clear wireless directly in your hand. With PCS Vision, you can get
email, games, and Web access. If this is the method you want to use, see
“Connecting through PCS Vision” on page 115.
98
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Connecting to an Internet Service Provider
Note: This does not apply to the 700CXL Computer.
You can connect to your ISP, and use the connection to send and receive
e-mail messages and view Web or WAP pages. You can connect to your
ISP in one of two ways:
S Create a modem connection. If this is the method you want to use, see
“Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP” below.
S Use an Ethernet card and a net tap to connect to the network. If this is
the method you want to use, see “Creating an Ethernet Connection to an
ISP” on page 103. Note: This does not apply to the 730 Computer.
Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP
Obtain the following information from your ISP. Some ISPs require information in front of the user name, such as MSN/username.
S ISP dial-up access telephone number
S User name
S Password
If you do not have a built-in modem, install a modem card, or use a
NULL modem cable and appropriate adapters to connect an external modem to your 700 Color Computer through the serial port.
To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while
changing settings, tap the Help icon.
1 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > the Connections icon. In
My ISP, tap Add a new modem connection.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
99
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
2 Enter a name for the connection, such as “ISP Connection.”
In the Select a modem list, select your modem type. If your modem
type does not appear, try reinserting the modem card. If you are using
an external modem that is connected to your 700 Color Computer with
a cable, select “Hayes Compatible on COM1.” Tap Next to continue.
3 Enter the access phone number, then tap Next.
100
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
4 Enter the user name, password, and domain (if provided by an ISP or
your network administrator).
5 You should not need to change any settings in Advanced. Most ISPs
now use a dynamically-assigned address. If the ISP you are connecting
to does not use a dynamically-assigned address, tap Advanced > the
TCP/IP tab, tap Use specific IP address, then enter the address. Tap ok
to close the Advanced page, then tap Finish.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
101
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
6 Tap the Advanced tab, then tap Select Location to specify your current
location. These settings apply to all connections. Tap Edit to continue.
7 Specify your current phone type. If your phone type is pulse dialing,
check the Pulse dialing box. If your type is tone dialing (as most phone
lines are), then clear the Pulse dialing box. Continue to tap ok to close
each page and return to the Settings page.
To start the connection, start using one of the following programs. Once
connected, you can:
S Send and receive e-mail messages by using Inbox. Before you can use
Inbox, you need to provide the information it needs to communicate
with the e-mail server. For specific instructions, see “Connecting Directly
to an E-mail Server” on page 118.
S Visit Web and WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer. For more
information, see “Pocket Internet Explorer” on page 94.
102
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
S Send and receive instant messages with MSN Messenger. For more information, see “MSN Messenger” on page 84.
Note: To change modem connection settings in My ISP, tap Manage
existing connections. Select the desired modem connection, tap Settings,
and follow the instructions on the screen.
Creating an Ethernet Connection to an ISP
Note: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer.
You do not need to create a new connection on your 700 Color Computer. Instead, you must purchase a dock to enable on-board Ethernet.
1 Obtain your user name, password, and domain name from your ISP.
2 Place your 700 Color Computer in a dock, tap Start > Today, then look
in the System Tray for the Ethernet icon (shown left). If not there, then
tap the antenna icon for the NDISTRAY pop-up menu and select Builtin Ethernet from the menu.
3 If using an on-board Ethernet, then tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > Connections > the Advanced tab > Network Card. Tap
“Built-In Ethernet (10Mbps)” from the list of adapters installed to access and configure its properties.
4 Connect the dock to the network by using a network cable. For information, see your owner’s manual.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
103
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
5 Tap ok three times to return to the Connections page. Select “The Internet” from the My network card connects to drop-down list.
To start the connection, simply start using one of the programs listed in
the preceding section. Once connected, you can perform the same activities as listed in the preceding section.
104
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Connecting to Work
If you have access to a network at work, you can send e-mail messages,
view intranet pages, synchronize your 700 Color or 700CXL Computer,
and possibly access the Internet. You can connect to work in one of two
ways:
S Create a modem connection by using a RAS (Remote Access Server)
account. Before you can create this modem connection, your network
administrator needs to set up a RAS account for you. If this is the method you want to use, see “Creating a Modem Connection to Work” below.
Your network administrator may also give you Virtual Private Network
(VPN) settings.
S Note: This does not apply to the 730 Computer. Use an embedded Ethernet card and a net tap to connect to the network. To use this method,
see “Creating an Ethernet Connection to Work” on page 114.
Get the following information from your network administrator.
S Dial-up access telephone number
S User name
S Password
If your 700 Color or 700CXL Computer does not have access to a mobile
phone network, insert a modem card.
Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > the Connections icon. In
My Work Network, set up a modem connection via work (page 106), wireless network (page 109), or VPN server (page 111).
Note: To change modem connection settings in My Work Network, tap
Manage existing connections. Select the desired modem connection, tap
Edit, and follow the instructions on the screen.
To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while
changing settings, tap the Help icon.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
105
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Creating a Modem Connection to Work
1 Tap Add a new modem connection beneath My Work Network to initiate this procedure.
2 Enter a name for the connection, such as “Company Connection.” In
the Select a modem list, select your modem type. If your modem type
does not appear, try reinserting the modem card.
S If you are using an external modem connected to your 700 Computer
with a cable, select “Hayes Compatible on COM1.”
S If you are using any type of external modem, select the modem by
name. If a listing does not exist for your external modem, select
“Hayes Compatible on COM1.”
S Wireless connections can be made via a mobile phone network or
GPRS. If you are using a mobile phone network to connect, select
“Cellular Line.” If you are using GPRS, tap “Cellular Line (GPRS).”
Tap Next to continue.
106
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
3 Enter the access phone number, using some of the following guidelines.
If you know part of the phone number changes frequently as you travel,
create dialing rules to avoid creating numerous modem connections for
the same phone number. For more information, tap Use Dialing Rules.
S Enter the phone number exactly as you want it dialed. For example,
if you call from a business complex or hotel that requires a nine before dialing out, enter “9” in front of the phone number.
S Enter the APN provided by your mobile phone service provider.
S When using dialing rules, phone numbers are entered differently. To
use additional numbers, such as a “9” to dial from an office complex
or hotel, you must use additional dialing rules or change dialing patterns. See “Create Dialing Rules” via your online help for information.
a In the Country/Region box, enter the appropriate code when dialing internationally. For more information, contact an operator at
your local phone company.
b In the Area code box, enter the area code. Area codes are not needed in all countries.
c In the Phone number box, enter the main phone number.
Tap Next to continue.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
107
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
4 Enter the user name, password, and domain (if provided by an ISP or
your network administrator). If a domain name was not provided, try
the connection without entering a domain name.
5 You should not need to change any advanced settings. Instances where
you are to change advanced settings include the following. To change
advanced settings, tap Advanced. Otherwise, tap Finish.
S You want to change baud rate settings, dialing string commands, or
credit card options.
S You need to change port settings.
S The server you are connecting to does not use dynamically-assigned
addresses, and you need to enter your TCP/IP settings.
Note: The following information applies when you have
Enable Microsoft’s Wireless Zero Config checked via the Wireless Network control panel applet. See page 373 for more information.
108
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Creating a Wireless Network Connection to Work
Networks already configured are preferred networks and are listed in
Wireless networks. You can connect to only preferred networks or search
for and connect to any available network.
A wireless network can be added either when the network is detected, or
manually by entering settings information. To determine if authentication
information is needed, see your network administrator.
1 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > Connections > the Advanced tab > Network Card > the Wireless tab > Add New Settings.
2 Tap the General tab, then enter a network name. If the network was
detected, the network name is entered and cannot be changed.
From Connects to, select to what your network is to connect: “Work”
or “The Internet.”
To connect to an ad-hoc connection, select This is a
device-to-computer (ad-hoc) connection.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
109
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
3 Tap the Authentication tab, then do the following:
S To use data encryption, tap Data encryption (WEP Enabled).
S To use Shared Key authentication, tap Network Authentication
(Shared mode). Be sure to have a network key.
S To automatically use a network key, tap The Key is provided for me
automatically. Otherwise, enter the network key.
S For increased security, select Enable network access using IEEE
802.1X. Then, select the appropriate EAP type.
4 Tap ok to return to the Configure Wireless Network screen.
5 From the Networks to access drop-down list, select “All Available,”
“Only access points,” or “Only computer-to-computer” depending on
the type of networks to which you connect.
6 To connect only to networks you have already configured, clear Automatically connect to non-preferred networks.
7 Tap ok to close this screen.
110
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Note: If you select to automatically connect to non-preferred networks,
your device detects any new networks and provide you the opportunity to
configure them.
Creating a VPN Server Connection to Work
A VPN connection helps you to securely connect to servers, such as a corporate network, via the Internet. Ask your network administrator for a
user name, password, domain name, TCP/IP settings, and host name or IP
address of the VPN server.
To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while
changing settings, tap the Help icon.
Note: To change existing settings in My Work Network, tap Manage
existing connections > the VPN tab. Select the desired VPN connection,
tap Settings, and follow the instructions on the screen.
1 Tap Add a new VPN server connection beneath My Work Network to
initiate this procedure.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
111
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
2 In Name, enter a name for the connection, such as a company’s name.
In Host name/ IP, enter the VPN server name or IP address.
Next to VPN type, select the type of authentication to use with your
device: “IPSec/L2TP” or “PPTP.” If you are not sure which option to
choose, ask your network administrator.
Tap Next to continue.
3 Select the type of authentication. If you select A pre-shared key, enter
the key provided by your network administrator.
112
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
4 Enter your user name, password, and domain name as provided by your
ISP or network administrator. If a domain name was not provided, try
the connection without entering a domain name.
5 You should not need to change any Advanced settings. Instances where
you must change advanced settings include:
S The server to which you are connecting does not use dynamically-assigned addresses, and you need to enter your TCP/IP settings.
S You need to change server DNS or WINS settings.
To change advanced settings, tap Advanced. Otherwise, tap Finish.
Insert necessary equipment, such as a network (Ethernet) card, into the
device, and use a desired program to automatically begin connecting. For
example, switch to Pocket Internet Explorer and browse to a Web page.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
113
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Creating an Ethernet Connection to Work
Note: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer.
You do not need to create a new connection on your 700 Color or
700CXL Computer. Instead, purchase a dock to enable on-board Ethernet. Obtain the user name, password, and domain name from your ISP.
1 If using an on-board Ethernet, place your 700 Color or 700CXL
Computer in a dock, tap Start > Today, then look for the Ethernet icon
(shown left) in the System Tray. If not there, tap the antenna icon for
the NDISTRAY pop-up menu, then select Built-in Ethernet.
2 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > Connections > the Advanced tab > Network Card. Tap “Built-In Ethernet (10Mbps).”
700 Color Screen
730 Screen
700CXL Screen
3 Connect the dock to the network by using a network cable. For information, see your owner’s manual.
4 To synchronize your 700 Color or 700CXL Computer, tap Start > ActiveSync to access Microsoft ActiveSync, then tap Tools > Options >
the PC tab, check Sync with this PC during manual sync, and select
your computer’s name from the Use this PC drop-down list.
Remote synchronization with a desktop works only if a partnership is set
up with that computer through ActiveSync set to allow remote connections. Other restrictions apply. See ActiveSync Help on your desktop.
114
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Use one of the programs listed in the preceding section to start a connection. Once connected, you can perform the activities listed previously.
Connecting through PCS Vision
Note: This option only applies to the 700CXL Computer.
If you have access to a network, you can send e-mail messages, view intranet pages, play online games, synchronize your 700CXL Computer, and
possibly access the Internet. You can connect to the network this way:
S Create a modem connection by using a PCS Vision account. Before you
can create this modem connection, your network administrator needs to
set up a PCS account for you.
Get the following information from your network administrator.
S Dial-up access telephone number
S User name
S Password
If your 700CXL Computer does not have access to a mobile phone network, insert a modem card.
Note: To change modem connection settings in PCS Vision, tap Manage
existing connections > the Modem tab. Select the desired modem connection, tap Edit, and follow the instructions on the screen.
To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while
changing settings, tap the Help icon.
1 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > the Connections icon. In
PCS Vision, tap Add a new modem connection to set up a modem
connection.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
115
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
2 Enter a name for the connection, such as “My Connection.” In the Select a modem list, select your modem type. If your modem type does
not appear, try reinserting the modem card.
S If you are using an external modem connected to your 700CXL
Computer with a cable, select “Hayes Compatible on COM1.”
S If you are using any type of external modem, select the modem by
name. If a listing does not exist for your external modem, select
“Hayes Compatible on COM1.”
S Wireless connections can be made via a mobile phone network or
GPRS. If you are using a mobile phone network to connect, select
“Cellular Line.” If you are using GPRS, tap “Cellular Line (GPRS).”
Tap Next to continue.
3 Enter the access phone number, using some of the following guidelines.
If you know part of the phone number changes frequently as you travel,
create dialing rules to avoid creating numerous modem connections for
the same phone number. For more information, tap Start > Help , then
click Use Dialing Rules near the bottom.
S Enter the phone number exactly as you want it dialed. For example,
if you call from a business complex or hotel that requires a nine before dialing out, enter “9” in front of the phone number.
S Enter the APN provided by your mobile phone service provider.
S When using dialing rules, phone numbers are entered differently. To
use additional numbers, such as a “9” to dial from an office complex
or hotel, you must use additional dialing rules or change dialing patterns. See “Create Dialing Rules” via your online help for information.
116
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Tap Next to continue.
4 Enter the user name, password, and domain (if provided by an ISP or
your network administrator). If a domain name was not provided, try
the connection without entering a domain name.
5 You should not need to change any advanced settings. Instances where
you are to change advanced settings include the following. To change
advanced settings, tap Advanced. Otherwise, tap Finish.
S You want to change baud rate settings, dialing string commands, or
credit card options.
S You need to change port settings.
S The server you are connecting to does not use dynamically-assigned
addresses, and you need to enter your TCP/IP settings.
Note: If you select to automatically connect to non-preferred networks,
your device detects any new networks and provide you the opportunity to
configure them.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
117
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
Ending a Connection
To disconnect, do one of the following:
S When connected via modem or VPN, tap the Connectivity icon on the
navigation bar, and then tap Disconnect.
S When connected via cable or cradle, detach your device.
S When connected via Infrared, move the device away from the other
computer or device.
S When connected via a network (Ethernet) card, remove the card from
your device. Note this does not apply to 730 Computers.
S When connected via a wireless network, switch off the connection.
Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server
You can set up a connection to an e-mail server so that you can send and
receive e-mail messages by using a modem or network connection and Inbox on your 700 Color Computer.
Note: The ISP or network must use a POP3 or IMAP4 e-mail server and
an SMTP gateway.
You can use multiple e-mail services to receive your messages. For each
e-mail service you intend to use, first set up and name the e-mail service. If
you use the same service to connect to different mailboxes, set up and
name each mailbox connection.
Setting Up an E-mail Account
Do the following to set up an e-mail service. Tap the question mark at the
top of the screen for more assistance.
1 On your 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Inbox to access the Inbox
application. Tap Accounts > New Account.
2 Enter an e-mail address, tap Next, then Skip after the status of the automatic configuration is listed as “Completed.”
118
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
3 Enter your user name and password, then tap Next.
4 Select the appropriate service type from the Account type drop-down
list, either POP3 or IMAP4, or enter a new account type, then tap
Next.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
119
Chapter 2 — Windows Mobile 2003
5 In Incoming mail, enter the name of your e-mail server. In Outgoing
mail, enter the name of your Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
host. If you are using a network connection, enter your domain name in
Domain. Tap Options to do additional configurations. Tap Finish to
assign this service.
When finished, to connect to your e-mail server, from the Inbox application, tap Accounts > Connect. For more information on using the Inbox
program, see “Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages” on page 73.
120
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
3
Installing Applications
There are multiple ways to get an application to your 700 Series Color
Mobile Computer; just as there are multiple ways to package the application for delivery.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
121
Chapter 3 — Installing Applications
Packaging an Application
Use any of these methods to package an application for installation:
S For very simple applications, the application itself might be the only file
that needs to be delivered.
S It could be a directory structure that contains the application, supporting files like ActiveX controls, DLLs, images, sound files, and data files.
S Or, you could package an application via a CAB file.
Consider any of the following when choosing a location into which to
store your application:
S In the basic 700 Color Computer, there are two built-in storage options: the Object Store and the Persistent Storage Manager (PSM). The
Object Store is RAM that looks like a disk. Anything copied here is deleted when a cold-boot is performed on the 700 Color Computer. The
PSM is an area of storage which is embedded in a section of the system’s
FLASH memory. This storage area is not erased during a cold-boot. It
may, however, be erased during the reflashing process. In addition to
storing applications and data files, you do have the option to store a persistent registry to the PSM region.
S If the optional Secure Digital or CompactFlash storage card is in the
system, then consider this card the primary location for placing an applications install files. The following folders represent either card:
S The Secure Digital storage card creates the “\SDMMC Disk” folder.
S The CompactFlash storage card creates the “\Storage Card” folder.
Note: The 730 Mobile Computer does not support the Compact
Flash storage card.
S Use the small non-volatile Flash File Store region to hold CAB files that
rebuild the system at cold-boot or install applications from a CAB file
into the Flash File Store so they are ”ready-to-run” when a cold-boot is
performed. Since the FLASH in the system has a limited number of
write cycles, do not use the Flash File Store for excessive writing purposes; however, reading is okay.
Files copied to any of these locations are safe when a cold-boot is
performed on a 700 Color Computer — providing the AutoRun system is
installed in the appropriate location You can find this system in the 700
Color Management Tools portion of the Intermec Developer’s Library CD.
Copying a CAB file to the “\CABFILES” folder on one of these cards
automatically extracts that CAB file on every cold-boot to ensure that your
system is properly set up (see page 128).
122
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 3 — Installing Applications
Installing Applications
Consider any of the following options to get the package to the preferred
location on your 700 Series Computer.
S Microsoft ActiveSync
S FTP Server (page 124)
S Secure Digital or CompactFlash storage cards (page 124)
Using Microsoft ActiveSync
Note: These instructions assume the 700 Color Management Tools portion of the Intermec Developer’s Library CD was installed on your desktop.
The Microsoft ActiveSync tool is located on the 700 Color Companion CD.
See Chapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003,” for information about this tool as
provided by Microsoft Corporation.
This can be a serial, USB, Ethernet, InfraRed, or 802.11b ActiveSync connection. Files can be copied using File Explorer on a desktop or a laptop
computer. This is usually good when updating few 700 Color Computers.
Note: The 730 Computer does not support Ethernet.
These instructions assume that Microsoft ActiveSync was installed onto
your desktop and is up and running. If not, go to Chapter 2, “Windows
Mobile 2003,” for an URL from which to download the latest application.
1 Connect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop computer via an
ActiveSync cable or IrDA.
2 Wait for a “Connected” message to appear in the Microsoft ActiveSync
application to signal a connection to the 700 Series Computer. If necessary, select File > Get Connected to initiate a connection.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
123
Chapter 3 — Installing Applications
3 Click Explore to access the Mobile Device folder on your unit.
4 From your desktop, select Start > Windows Explorer, then browse the
“C:\Intermec\700C Mgmt Tools\CabFiles” path for any CAB files
needed for your 700 Color Computer. Select the appropriate file, rightclick the file for a pop-up menu, then select Copy.
5 Within the Mobile Device directory, go to the directory where you
want the files located on the 700 Color Computer, do a right-click for a
pop-up menu, then select Paste.
6 When all of the files are pasted, perform a warm-boot on the 700 Color
Computer. When the computer reboots, wait for the LED on the top
left of your keypad to stop blinking. Tap Start > Programs > File
Explorer to locate the newly copied executable files, then tap these files
to activate their utilities.
Using the FTP Server
The 700 Color Computer has a built-in FTP Server that connects to a network via Ethernet, 802.11b, or WAN (Wireless Access Network). This
allows connections to the 700 Color Computer to perform file transfers or
computer management functions. Another benefit is you can create FTP
scripts to automate the process of copying files to the 700 Color Computer. This option is good for when a large number of 700 Color Computers
need updating. See Chapter 7, “Programming,” for more information.
Using a Storage Card
Use the following steps to install an application using a storage card:
Copying to a CompactFlash Card
Note: These instructions do not apply to the 730 Computer.
1 Suspend the 700 Color Computer and remove its CompactFlash drive,
which holds a SanDisk CompactFlash storage card.
2 Using a CompactFlash Adapter card, place the CompactFlash drive in
your desktop PC card drive.
3 Create a subdirectory on the PCMCIA CompactFlash drive in which to
store your application.
4 Use the CEImager application to add the autorun system to the storage
card. See the Software Tools User’s Manual to learn about CEImager.
5 Copy your application, data files, and all required DLLs and drivers to
the subdirectory created on the CompactFlash drive.
6 Add your application to the AUTOUSER.DAT file on the
“\Storage Card\2577” directory with the following statement:
RUN=\\
where your directory is the directory on the CompactFlash storage card
where the application was installed, and yourapp.exe is the name of your
application. Finish the “RUN=” statement with a carriage return linefeed combination. There may be multiple run statements in the file.
124
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 3 — Installing Applications
7 Remove the CompactFlash card from your desktop and reinstall it into
the 700 Color Computer.
8 Warm-boot the 700 Color Computer to add these files to the CompactFlash storage card.
If the AUTOUSER.DAT file is found and the “RUN=” statement is correct, the task manager launches and executes your program on startup.
Copying to a Secure Digital Storage Card
1 Suspend the 700 Color Computer and remove its Secure Digital drive,
which holds a Secure Digital storage card.
2 Using a Secure Digital Adapter card, place the Secure Digital drive in
your desktop PC card drive.
3 Create a subdirectory on the PCMCIA Secure Digital drive in which to
store your application.
4 Use the CEImager application to add the autorun system to the storage
card. See the Software Tools User’s Manual to learn about CEImager.
5 Copy your application, data files, and all required DLLs and drivers to
the subdirectory created on the Secure Digital drive.
6 Add your application to the AUTOUSER.DAT file on the
“\SDMMC Disk\2577” directory with the following statement:
RUN=\\
where your directory is the directory on the Secure Digital storage card
where the application was installed, and yourapp.exe is the name of your
application. Finish the “RUN=” statement with a carriage return linefeed combination. There may be multiple run statements in the file.
7 Remove the Secure Digital card from your desktop and reinstall it into
the 700 Color Computer.
8 Warm-boot the 700 Color Computer to add these files to the Secure
Digital storage card.
If the AUTOUSER.DAT file is found and the “RUN=” statement is correct, the task manager launches and executes your program on startup.
Updating the System Software
You can use the Intermec Developer’s Library CD to reinstall or update the
operating system software on the 700 Color Computer. For more information, contact your Intermec representative.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
125
Chapter 3 — Installing Applications
Application Migration
Note: These instructions assume that the 700 Color Management Tools
portion of the Intermec Developer’s Library CD was installed on your desktop and that a storage card was added to the base configuration of the 700
Color Computer.
Do the following required steps to ensure that CAB files are restored, applications automatically start, and registry is restored on cold-boot:
1 From your desktop, double-click the Intermec CE Imager desktop icon
to access the Intermec CEImager application. If this icon is not on your
desktop, then double-click the CEIMAGER.EXE executable from the
“C:\Intermec\700C Mgmt Tools\Tools\CEImager” folder.
2 Click Default under Components List to activate the components.
3 Click (+) to expand the AutoRun System component, click (+) to expand the Destination Media option, then select either the
CompactFlash Card option or the Secure Digital Card option. Do not
select both storage cards, as the AutoRun files copied will work for one storage card, but not work on the other storage card.
Note: The 730 Computer does not support CompactFlash storage cards.
4 Click Install to install the AUTORUN files onto the storage card.
5 Create a “\CabFiles” folder on the storage card. Copy any CAB files that
are to be extracted on every startup into this folder.
126
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 3 — Installing Applications
6 In the “\2577” directory, add your custom AUTOUSER.DAT file. See
the Recovery Help for more information on how to set up an
AUTOUSER.DAT file.
7 If you are using the RegFlushKey() API, the application must use a special API to make sure the registry is written to the appropriate card; or
you can use the Utilities control panel applet, as follows. See Appendix
A, “Configurable Settings,” for more information about this applet.
a From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab
> the Utilities icon > the Registry Save tab.
b Tap Enable Registry Storage to save the registry in the Flash File System (PSM) via the “\Flash_File_Store\Registry” path.
c Tap ok to save your entry and exit the Utilities control panel applet.
700 Color and 700CXL Screens
730 Screen
8 Remove the storage card from the desktop PC and install the card into
the 700 Color Computer.
9 Perform a cold-boot on the 700 Color Computer. Files automatically
install from the storage card upon reboot. Any calls to the
RegFlushKey() API automatically writes the registry to the appropriate
location.
Note: Both the warm-boot and the cold-boot procedures, via the software
API, will also flush the registry.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
127
Chapter 3 — Installing Applications
Migrating from a 700 Monochrome Computer
As you migrate from a 700 Monochrome Computer to a 700 Color Computer, you need to consider the following: When converting a 700 Monochrome Computer application to run on the 700 Color Computer, most
APIs should work without changes. Below are a few exceptions:
S The 700 Monochrome Computer uses the “\Storage Card” folder for
nonvolatile storage. You may need to change the application to store
data onto the “SDMMC Disk” folder instead of the “\Storage Card”
folder if a Secure Digital storage card is present in the system.
S If the application uses the RegFlushKey() API, it must first verify that
the proper media is available in the system and call the special API mentioned in Step 7 on the previous page.
S If the application is using the 700 Color switchable dock, use the
IOCTL_DOCK_SWITCH value from the
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM function to set the proper
port on the dock before communications. See more information about
this KernelIOControl function in Chapter 7, “Programming.”
S Some WAN radio options have changed. Review the WAN radio information in Chapter 4, “Network Support,“to determine if any changes are
required in your application.
S Arrow and tab keys are reversed from the 700 Monochrome Computer.
Keyboard remapping is available on the 700 Color Computer should
you need to map these keys like that of the 700 Monochrome Computer (see page 125).
S Special SDKs are not needed to compile applications for the Xscale processor. Targeting the SA1110 processor creates applications that run on
the 700 Color Computer.
Cabinet File Installation
CAB files (short form of “cabinet” files) are compressed folders as defined by
Microsoft. A “cabinet” file is a single file, usually suffixed with .CAB, that
stores compressed files in a file library. A compressed file can be spread
over several cabinet files. During installation, the setup application decompresses the files stored in a cabinet and copies them to the user’s system.
For the 700 Color Computer, CAB files register DLLs, create shortcuts,
modify registry entries, and run custom setup programs. Tap a CAB file to
extract that file or place the CAB file on one of the approved storage devices in the “\CabFiles” folder, then perform a warm-boot on the 700 Color Computer. There are two methods available to extract a CAB file:
S Tap a CAB file to extract it. With this method, the CAB file is automatically deleted when the extraction process is successful, unless the CAB
file is set with the read-only attribute.
S Use the AUTOCAB method to extract all files when a cold-boot is performed on the 700 Color Computer. This method is on the Intermec
Developer’s Library CD, see its Software Tools User’s Manual for information.
128
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
4
Network Support
The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer can integrate up to three radios in
a single unit, and automatically installs the appropriate software for radio
use when the unit is powered on.
The Intermec CORE (Common Object Resource Environment) application, which provides a framework for various modules that let you configure and manage your Intermec products, defaults to the most recently used
module. If a module is not yet used or set, CORE defaults to the first
module as listed alphabetically.
The following communication options on the 700 Series Computer provide wired and wireless connectivity:
S Onboard wired Ethernet (standard on 700 Color and 700CXL Computers, not available on 730 Computers)
S Wireless Local Area Network (standard on 730 Computers)
This 802.11b radio option provides up to 11 Mb/sec throughput.
S Wireless Wide Area Network (not available on 730 Computers)
Includes support for GSM/GPRS and CDMA/1xRTT radios.
S Wireless Personal Area Network
This allows for cable-free communications with peripheral devices, such
as printers, over a ten-meter range. This compatibility is provided via a
Bluetooth qualified module by Socket Communications.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
129
Chapter 4 — Network Support
CORE
The Intermec CORE application provides a framework for various modules that let you configure and manage your Intermec products. These
modules are software plug-ins that can be configuration tools, such as the
802.11b radio configuration module, or they can provide information on
your environment, such as a battery life module.
CORE modules are collections of specific information. Each module can
display general and detailed information. Tap the General and Details tabs
near the bottom to switch between general and detailed information. Note
that not all modules have detailed information.
Activating CORE
CORE is built into the operating system of every 700 Color Computer.
To run CORE for the first time, select Start > Programs > File Explorer,
select “\Flash File Store\Apps\CORE,” then tap the CORE executable file.
After CORE is run on the 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Programs >
Core to access this application henceforth.
Install an Available Radio Module
To install an available radio module onto your 700 Color Computer, tap
Modules > Add/Remove, select a module from the bottom Available box,
then tap Add to put the selected module in the upper Installed box. Click
OK to exit the Add/Remove Modules screen.
Loading a Radio Module
To load or switch to another radio module installed on the 700 Color
Computer, tap Modules > Choose Module, select a module from the
Installed Modules box, then tap Choose to initialize and begin using that
module.
To learn more about this application, see its online help. Tap Start >
Programs > File Explorer and select “\Flash File Store\Apps\CORE,” then
tap the corehelp .HTM file.
130
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Note: Once CORE is running, you can return to it by tapping its icon
from the System Tray via the Today screen. Tap Start > Today > the Core
three-ring icon (circled in the following illustration).
700 Color and 730 Screens
700CXL Screen
Network Adapters
Your 700 Color or 700CXL Computer can have up to three radios installed. The default network adapter or radio is dependent on what radios are
installed in your 700 Series Computer.
The 730 Computer only has the 802.11b radio and wireless printing.
Other radios are not supported.
Below are the the network adapters that exist as of this publication. See the
Developer’s Support web site for the latest information on network adapters for your unit.
S Ethernet Communications — page 132.
S 802.11b Radios (802.11b Wireless LAN driver) — page 133.
S WWAN (Wireless WAN) — page 138.
S Wireless Personal Area Networking — page 186.
Note that the tip of the antenna attached to your 700 Color or 700CXL
Computer is color-coded to identify its WWAN radio type. This does not
apply to the 730 Computer. Refer to the following to determine your radio
type:
S Red
CDMA (non-Sprint networks) and GSM/GPRS US/Canada
S White
GPRS US/Canada and CDMA Sprint networks
S Blue
GPRS International
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
131
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Ethernet Communications
Note: This section does not apply to the 730 Computer.
Follow the steps below to start Ethernet communications on the 700 Color
or 700CXL Computer. If your system does not contain an 802.11b radio,
then Ethernet networking using DHCP is selected as the default.
When “Built-in Ethernet” is selected from the NDISTRAY pop-up menu
(the Network Driver Interface Specification tray application),
then the Ethernet icon shown to the left appears in the System Tray as
circled in the following illustration.
700 Color and 730 Screens
132
700CXL Screen
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
802.11b Communications
When “Wireless 802.11” is selected via the NDISTRAY pop-up menu:
the 802.11 antenna icon shown to the left appears in the system tray as
circled in the following illustration.
700 Color and 730 Screens
700CXL Screen
To configure 802.11b communications on the 700 Series Computer, tap
Start > Settings > the System tab > Wireless Network to access the Profile
Wizard for the 802.11b radio module. Go to Appendix A, “Configurable
Settings,” for configuration information.
802.11b Radio CORE Module
Note: See page 130 for information on loading this module in CORE.
The 802.11b radio CORE module displays helpful information about the
802.11b radio option built into your 700 Series Computer.
Note that you can configure the 802.11b radio module from this CORE
application. Select Configure > Configure Intermec 802.11 CF from the
bottom menu bar to access the Profile Wizard application. See Appendix
A, “Configurable Settings,” for information about this application via the
Wireless Network control panel applet.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
133
Chapter 4 — Network Support
General
Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information provided via the General tab. Note that the information is listed alphabetically.
Adapter MAC Identifies the MAC address for this 802.11b adapter.
Antenna
Identifies the antenna used with the 802.11b radio: “Primary,” “Secondary,” or “Diversity.”
AP Mac
Identifies the MAC address of the access point to which this 700 Series Computer is connected.
Connected to
Reports the connection status and to which SSID this 700 Series Computer is attached.
Encryption
Reports the encryption mode and the association mode (in parentheses). See page 375 for information about WEP encryption.
ESS
Identifies the type of network to which you are attached, either an ESS (Extended Service Set)
802.11 Station, or Ad-hoc.
IP
Provides the IP address which can be set as either DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
or statically.
Link
Indicates the speed at which a connection is made.
Power
Indicates the power status of this 802.11b profile.
Signal
Identifies the radio signal strength (in dBm).
TX Power
Shows the transmit power (in milliwatts) at which transmissions are made.
History:
This bar graph displays an active history of this radio module’s quality of
connections.
Friendly Indicator:
This indicates the general quality of the 802.11b connection. Three filled
dots indicates the best quality; two filled dots dictates good quality; one
filled dot is of fair quality; and when all three dots are empty, the quality is
considered poor.
134
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Details
Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information provided via the Details tab. Note the information is listed alphabetically.
Attach-Roam Cnt Includes the number of new associations made during the current session, including any found
roaming.
CCX Status
States the status of the CCX, either enabled or disabled.
Desired SSID
Identifies the preferred Service Set Identifier (SSID).
Driver Name
Identifies the 802.1x driver installed on this 700 Series Computer.
Last 5 Supp Msgs Monitors and reports the 802.1x Security Supplicant activity.
Scanlist
Indicates whether the Scan List option was enabled or disabled.
Supplicant Status
Monitors the 802.1x security activity on the client: “Running” or “Stopped.”
Watchdog Status
Monitors the activity of the Scan List: “Running” or “Stopped.”
700 Color Screen
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
730 and 700CXL Screens
135
Chapter 4 — Network Support
No Networking
When “No networking” is selected from the NDISTRAY pop-up menu:
the disconnected icon shown to the left appears in the system tray as
circled in the following illustration.
Network Selection APIs
The Network Selection APIs change the network adapter configuration
programmatically. Both drivers support the same IOCTL function numbers for loading and unloading the drivers. Go to Chapter 7, “Programming,” to see the APIs.
136
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Network Connections
From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the Connections
tab > Connections > the Advanced tab > Network Card to access the network connections for this unit. Make the changes necessary for your network, then tap ok when finished.
700 Color Screen
730 Screen
700CXL Screen
Note: “Built-In Ethernet (10Mbps)” is for Ethernet, the ”802.11b Wireless LAN” is for 802.11b radios on 750 Computers, and the “802.11b
PRISM Wireless LAN” is for 802.11b radios on 730 and 700CXL Computers.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
137
Chapter 4 — Network Support
WWAN Radio Options
Note: This section does not apply to the 730 Computer.
Go to the following pages to learn more about your radio module:
S CDMA/1xRTT radio module (see below)
S GSM/GPRS radio module (page 169)
CDMA/1xRTT
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) is a form of wide area wireless
communications. 1XRTT supports up to 144 KB per second packet data
transmission and doubles the voice capacity of current generation CDMA
networks.
The WAN radio CORE module displays helpful information about the
CDMA/1xRTT radio option built into your 700 Series Computer.
WAN Monitor — General
Note: See page 130 for information on loading this module in CORE.
Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information provided via the General tab. Note that the information is listed alphabetically.
Activated
Indicates whether the ESN on this unit was activated by your service provider. Note a decimal
version of your ESN is on the Details page.
f/w
Identifies the firmware version, if available.
Network Type
The network type which would list “CDMA-1XRTT.”
On
Indicates when activation was provided by your service provider.
Phone Number
Identifies the telephone number (or MDN) assigned to the WAN Module installed in your unit.
Radio ESN
Lists the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) assigned to this radio module or “Unavailable” if a
number cannot be read from the radio. This number is required for activation. You must provide
this number to your service provider, such as Sprint, Verizon, Bell Mobility, etc., for activation.
Registered on
home network
If the WAN radio module has registered with a service provider network, then one of the following will appear:
S Registered on home network: Radio module is registered on its “home” network.
S Registered on roamed network: Radio module registered on another service provider’s network.
S Radio Not Registered: There is no network within range of this radio module.
RSSI
Displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) frequency or lists “Unavailable” if there
is no signal or the signal cannot be retrieved from the radio module.
Serial Status
Indicates whether serial communications passed (“Serial com OK”) or failed (“Serial com FAIL”)
in its last transaction. A status of “Serial com FAIL” typically indicates that the 700 Series Computer is unable to establish communication with the radio module installed within.
Verizon Network
Identifies your network service provider.
History:
This bar graph displays an active history of this radio module’s quality of
connections.
138
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Friendly Indicator:
Usually indicates the signal strength for this radio module. Three filled
dots indicate a high quality or strong signal. Three empty dots indicate
that the signal is out of range or there is no signal detected.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
139
Chapter 4 — Network Support
WAN Monitor — Details
Note: See page 130 for information on loading this module in CORE.
Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information provided via the Details tab. Most of this is similar to what is shown under
the General tab. Note that the information is listed alphabetically.
ESN
Lists the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) assigned to this radio module or “Unavailable” if a number cannot be read from the radio. This number is required for activation. You must provide this
number to your service provider, such as Sprint, Verizon, Bell Mobility, etc., for activation. Note
that both the hex version and the decimal version of your ESN is provided.
Firmware Rev
Identifies the firmware version, if available.
Firmware Type
Identifies the type of firmware installed in the WAN radio module. It should match the carrier
you are using as your network provider.
Hardware Rev
Identifies the hardware revision of the WAN radio module installed in your unit.
IMSI/MIN
Shows the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) number assigned to the Subscriber
Identity Module (SIM) card installed in this 700 Series Computer.
Manufacturer
Lists the name of the manufacturer that developed this radio module, such as “Sierra Wireless.”
MDN
Shows the MDN (Mobile Directory Number) or DN (Directory Number) — the number that
identifies the account tied to your device. You can consider this the “phone number.” Note that
the MDN and IMSI/MIN numbers can be the same.
Model
Lists the product name for this radio module, such as “Model 72.”
Phone Number
Identifies the telephone assigned to the WAN radio module.
PRI Version
Provides the version number of the Preferred Roaming List (PRL).
Radio Temp
Identifies the temperature of the radio module, or lists “Unavailable degrees” if no information or
temperature cannot be measured.
Rx
(abbreviation for receive) Indicates the number of bytes received over the WAN connection since
the CORE WAN Module was started.
Tx
(abbreviation for transmit) Indicates the number of bytes received over the WAN connection since
the CORE WAN Module was started.
140
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
CDMA Radio Set Up
Note: Set up and provision information is also available in the 700 Color
CDMA Radio Setup Quick Start Guide P/N: 962-054-063.
This tells you how to set up your CDMA radio in your 760 Computer.
Below are terms to familiarize you with CDMA radio technology:
Activation
The process of programming the radio with the lock code (MSL) and phone number (MIN) to
allow it to communicate on the provider’s network. Once activation is complete you can make
voice calls (if enabled by the carrier) with the mobile computer.
Data Provisioning
The process of activating the ability for the CDMA radio to establish data connections, such as
connecting to the Internet. The CDMA radio makes data connection only after it is activated
and data provisioned.
NID (Network ID) A numeric value programmed into the CDMA radio at the factory or during the activation
process. Your carrier may or may not use this value, but your carrier may provide this for activation purposes.
SID (System ID)
A numeric value programmed into the CDMA radio at the factory or during the activation
process. This number is used by your carrier to determine if the radio belongs to its CDMA
network. Your carrier may provide this number for activation purposes.
Note: Descriptions in this chapter are for Sprint PCS, Bell Mobility, Telus, and Verizon Networks versions of the SB555 Watcher program. Other carriers may be added pending regulatory and carrier approval.
Copying CDMA Radio Module CAB Files from Intermec Web Site
Copy CAB files from the Intermec web site at http://www.intermec.com
onto your desktop. Note that this is subject to change.
1 Select Service & Support > Developers Support from the blue navigation bar on the Intermec home page.
2 Select 700 Color Support from the Developers Support navigation column on the left side of the screen.
3 Select Downloads from beneath the 700 Color Support selection in the
Developers Support navigation column on the left side of the screen.
4 Select WWAN from the center of the screen, beneath the “Downloads”
title.
5 From beneath the “Sierra Wireless ‘Watcher’ Application” title, download any of the CAB files shown, then choose your carrier CAB files.
Intermec recommends two methods with which to load these CAB files
onto your 760 Computer: via the Microsoft ActiveSync application (next
paragraph) or via a CompactFlash or Secure Digital storage card (next
page). See Chapter 3, “Installing Applications,” for more information about
these methods.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
141
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Via Microsoft ActiveSync
You can transfer files from your desktop to your 760 Computer via Microsoft ActiveSync. See Chapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003” for more information about ActiveSync.
1 Obtain software from the Intermec web site as described earlier. Download the software to any location on your 760 Computer, such as the
Temp folder via the My Device root location.
2 Tap the carrier CAB file to install the application.
3 Go to “Finishing the Installation” on page 143.
Via a CompactFlash or Secure Digital Storage Card
Note: These instructions are based on default locations. You can change
the location to which to copy your CAB files.
1 Make sure the Registry Restore feature on your 760 Computer is disabled. Select Start > Settings > the System tab. Tap the Utilities desktop icon, then the Registry Save tab. Clear the Enable Registry Save
box.
2 Copy the CAB files for your carrier to your CompactFlash or Secure
Digital storage card after downloading it from the web site.
3 Cold-boot your 760 Computer. Remove the battery pack and press the
reset button in the bottom of the battery compartment.
4 Go through the normal getting started steps detailed in your 700 Color
CDMA Radio Setup Quick Start Guide.
5 Install the CompactFlash or Secure Digital memory card into the card
slot in your 760 Computer. Note that if you do not want the CAB files
erased after installation, set the CAB file attributes to “read-only” after copying them to the storage card.
6 From the 760 Computer, tap Start > Programs > the File Explorer
icon.
142
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
7 Tap the pull-down menu for My Documents and tap the My Device
root location.
8 If you are using a CompactFlash storage card,
tap Storage Card.
If you are using an Secure Digital storage card,
tap SDMMC Disk.
9 Scroll down, then tap the Sprint Watcher CAB file to install the application.
10 Go to “Finishing the Installation” in the next paragraph.
Finishing the Installation
Do the following to run the SB555 Watcher application. Be sure to do
step 1 as it is important to perform a warm-boot on your 760 Computer.
Upon restart, the Watcher application sets up on the 760 Computer for
activation.
1 Press and hold down the I button on your 760 Computer for about
12 seconds to warm start the terminal.
2 Tap Start > Programs > the Watcher icon.
3 Tap Yes, I accept to accept the license agreement, then tap OK to continue. Note that this license agreement does not appear again after this
installation.
4 Tap OK for the 760 Computer to perform a warm-boot and complete
the installation.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
143
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Activation
Note: Set the date and time before doing this activation.
SB555 Watcher is for activation and data provisioning. Once you enable
voice capability, data capability, or both depending on the carrier, remove
this program from the system by cold-booting your computer.
Intermec Technologies does not recommend using the SB555 Watcher
program to make data and voice calls on a daily basis for these reasons:
S The SB555 Watcher application is a third-party application unaware of
certain power management methods used in your 760 Computer.
Therefore, the application consumes more power than necessary.
S The application size consumes memory better used for your application
data.
The process of setting up the account with your carrier and enabling the
CDMA WAN radio in your 760 Computer is called activation.
The CDMA radio is pre-programmed for a specific carrier, such as Sprint,
Telus, Bell Mobility, Verizon, etc.). Therefore, information about your
radio should already be in your carrier’s database.
You need to notify the carrier and set up mobile accounts for each unit
you are activating. The Electronic Serial Number (ESN hex 63xxxxxx)
that you need to supply to your carrier is located in two places:
S On the outside of the 760 Computer shipping box.
S On the inside of the 760 Computer battery compartment.
The ESN comes in both decimal and hexadecimal formats. Most carriers
accept either format, but with a preference for the decimal format. You
only need to provide one number to your carrier.
S The decimal format consists of 11 digits, beginning with “099.”
S The hexadecimal format is an 8-digit number, beginning with “63.”
Accounts for Verizon and Sprint carriers can be set up for data only. Canadian carriers (Telus and Bell Mobility) can be set for data only, voice only,
or both voice and data. This is determined by your application and the
services your carrier offers.
After the all ESNs are provided to the carrier and the carrier has established the accounts, you will be provided with the lock codes and telephone numbers needed to complete the activation process. You use the
SB555 Watcher program to accomplish this task. Be sure to write down this
information for future use.
Note: Ensure that you receive a spreadsheet with your order that calls out
all ESNs in both decimal and hexadecimal formats.
144
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Note: Not all of the elements listed are required by all service providers.
ESN of the modem
Lock/Activation Code (may be termed one of the following):
S MSL — Master Subsidy Lock
S OTSL — OneTime Subsidy Lock
S SPC — Service Provisioning Code
S OTKSL — One Time Key Subsidy Lock
SID (System ID)
NID (Network ID)
User Name
Password
MIN
MSD
MDN
Note: The activation process for your Watcher version may vary from the
following steps. Thus, you may not have to do all of them.
1 Tap Start > Programs > the Watcher icon or tap the Watcher icon from
the NDISTRAY via the Today screen (circled in the following illustration) to launch the SB555 Watcher program.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
145
Chapter 4 — Network Support
2 The Activation Wizard should start automatically. If not, then tap
Admin > Activation Wizard from the bottom of the screen.
3 Follow the screen prompts, tapping Next to move from one screen to
the next.
4 When you reach the Activation screen, select Manual Activation.
5 At the appropriate screen, enter the Activation Code (OTSL, MSL,
OTKSL, or SPC) provided by your carrier and tap Next.
6 Enter the phone number provided when your 760 Computer was activated and tap Next.
146
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Verizon Automated Activation Process
Note: This process takes approximately 60 seconds.
Using Verizon Watcher
Do the following to activate Verizon on your 760 Computer:
1 After initializing the Watcher program, tap Yes, I accept to accept the
license agreement, then tap OK to perform a warm-start on the 760
Computer. Note that this license agreement does not appear again after the
installation.
2 Start the Watcher program again, select Automated Activation, then
click Next.
Note: You must be in the Verizon coverage area to activate your 760
Computer and only in the location of intended use.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
147
Chapter 4 — Network Support
3 Click Next, click Next again to dial the number displayed on the screen.
4 The activation process starts automatically.
148
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
5 You will see a series of unlock codes on your screen.
6 The following illustration shows the result of a successful activation.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
149
Chapter 4 — Network Support
7 Click the Connect button (circled in the following illustration) to connect
to the carrier’s network.
8 Select Start > Internet Explorer, then choose a web site. Your unit is
now successfully activated.
9 Perform a cold-boot on your 760 Computer to uninstall the Watcher
application. Watcher is intended for activation purposes only. Intermec
recommends using the following for establishing and maintaining connection to the WAN radio.
S Custom application using Intermec’s WWAN Toolkit API
S WWANInit demo program (see page 161)
S Custom customer application using Connection Manager Interface
Note: When connecting to the WAN radio via Pocket PC Connection
Manager, use the 10-digit phone number@vzw3g.com for the user
name (such as 1234567890@vzw3g.com) and “vzw” for the password.
150
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Sprint Automated Activation Process
Note: Sprint PCS uses a data provisioning method termed IOTA (Internet
Over The Air) to complete its activation and data enablement. The following steps detail how to properly activate and data provision your 760
Computer.
Do the following to set up activation:
1 Provide Sprint with your ESN, rate plan, and account information.
2 Sprint provides you with the following for each ESN:
S MDN, such as 214-555-5555
S MSID, such as 214-555-5555
S MSL/OTKSL (Activation Code), such as 945614
S NAI (Network Access Identifier), such as the following:
CustomerNameo103@sprintpcs.com
You must use a Secure Digital storage card with only the
SPRINT_WATCHER.CAB file in the “\SDMMC/Cabfiles” directory.
Note: Other CAB files in the “SDMMC/Cabfiles” directory may cause
problems with testing — remove or uninstall these before proceeding.
You need at least 80% (4 of 5 bars) CDMA signal strength for a successful
over-the-air activation.
Download and Activate Sprint Watcher
1 Make sure the Registry Restore feature on your 760 Computer is disabled. Select Start > Settings > the System tab. Tap the Utilities desktop icon, then the Registry Save tab. Clear the Enable Registry Save
box.
2 Perform a cold-boot on your 760 Computer, then go through the normal Pocket PC set-up (i.e. Align Screen etc.).
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
151
Chapter 4 — Network Support
3 Important! Set the Date and Time.
4 Tap the SPRINT_WATCHER.CAB file to perform the installation.
5 Perform a warm-boot on your 760 Computer to load the CAB file.
6 From the Today screen, tap the LAN Network icon in the System Tray
(circled in the following illustration).
7 In the NDISTRAY pop-up menu (the Network Driver Interface Specification tray application), select No Networking and Auto FTP Off.
Tap anywhere on the screen to close the menu.
152
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
8 Tap Start > Programs > the Watcher icon or tap the Watcher icon from
the NDISTRAY via the Today screen (circled in the following illustration) to launch the SB555 Watcher program.
9 Tap Yes, I accept to accept the license agreement, then tap OK to continue. Note that this license agreement does not appear again after this
installation.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
153
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Tap OK for the 760 Computer to perform a warm-boot and complete the
installation.
Using Sprint Watcher
Before you start using the Sprint Watcher application, make sure you
match the correct ESN with each 760 Computer and that you have at least
80% CDMA signal strength.
1 Tap Start > Programs > the Watcher icon or tap the Watcher icon from
the NDISTRAY via the Today screen (circled in the following illustration) to launch the SB555 Watcher program.
154
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
2 If your 760 Computer was not previously activated, Watcher automatically starts the Activation Wizard. Otherwise, select Manual Activation
to continue.
3 Enter the MSL or lock code received from Sprint.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
155
Chapter 4 — Network Support
4 Enter the phone number (MIN) and MSID received from Sprint.
These numbers may be the same.
5 After entering the phone number and MSID, the modem resets. Watcher displays the following two screens:
Note: If the “searching for SB555” screen does not proceed to the next
screen after 30-40 seconds, perform a warm-boot on your 760 Computer, then restart the Watcher program.
156
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Data Provisioning
At this point, the activation on the Sprint network is complete. It is recommended by Sprint to wait before you launch data provisioning to allow
time for the activation to propagate through your Sprint network.
Before you manually launch data provisioning, wait at least 30 minutes. In
some cases, you may have to wait up to two hours.
1 If Data Provisioning does not start automatically, select Admin > Data
Provisioning from the bottom menu bar.
2 Tap Yes to proceed with data provisioning.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
157
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Activation over the air typically takes 1–20 minutes.
If data provisioning fails, do the following:
S If Data Provisioning fails and the message “could not prepare data services,
please contact Sprint” displays, retry the Data Provisioning step by tapping the
“Admin” menu icon at the bottom of the Watcher screen. Select “Data Provisioning...” and answer “yes” to the request.
S If after several attempts to complete the Data Provisioning over the air, it may
be necessary to manually enter the data activation method.
S Manual activation is beyond the scope of this guide, therefore, go to Intermec
Knowledge Central (http://www.intermec.com, then select Service & Support
> Knowledge Central) The article (number 5749) is titled How to Manually
Activate a Sprint CDMA WAN Radio in the 760 Device.
158
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
3 The following screen appears once data provisioning is complete:
4 Test the data connection by tapping on the “connect” button to make a
data connection to the network. Watcher progresses through the following two screens. Once you see the second screen you know that your
mobile computer has successfully connected to the 1XRTT network.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
159
Chapter 4 — Network Support
5 Select Start > Internet Explorer, then choose a web site. Your unit is
now successfully activated.
Perform a cold-boot on your 760 Computer to uninstall the Watcher application. Watcher is intended for activation purposes only. Intermec recommends using the following for establishing and maintaining connection
to the WAN radio.
S Custom application using Intermec’s WWAN Toolkit API
S WWANInit demo program (see page 161)
S Custom customer application using Connection Manager Interface
160
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Telus and Bell Mobility Activation
Activation of Bell Mobility and Telus are similar to the first portion of the
Sprint activation process. Follow the instructions for manual activation
using the Bell Mobility Watcher.CAB or Telus Watcher.CAB file to install
the applicable application. Enter the activation lock codes and phone numbers as requested.
Username, Password, SID Information
Bell Mobility
Telus
Username
10 digit phone
number@1xbell.ca
10-digit phone
number@1x.telusmobility.com
Password
Original Voice Mail system pass- The 11-digit ESN printed inside
word (usually a 4 digit number) the 760 Computer battery
This is available from the activat- compartment, begins with 099.
ing organization.
SID
16420
16422
WWANInit Demo Program
Make sure your 760 Computer with CDMA card is activated and data
provisioned.
You must use a Secure Digital storage card with only the
WWANINITxxxxx.CAB file in the “SDMMC/Cabfiles” directory, where
“xxxxx” is the version number.
You can download this CAB file from the Intermec web site, via the following:
1 Select Service & Support > Developers Support from the blue navigation bar on the Intermec home page.
2 Select 700 Color Support from the Developers Support navigation column on the left side of the screen.
3 Select Downloads from beneath the 700 Color Support selection in the
Developers Support navigation column on the left side of the screen.
4 Under the Tools category, scroll down to “WWANInit xxx Connection
Program-WWAN Radios,” then click Download
Note: Other CAB files in the “SDMMC/Cabfiles” directory may cause
problems with testing — remove or uninstall these before proceeding.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
161
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Set Up the WWANInit Companion Program
Do the following to set up the WWANInit xxx Companion Program:
1 Make sure the Registry Restore feature on your 760 Computer is disabled. Select Start > Settings > the System tab. Tap the Utilities desktop icon, then the Registry Save tab. Clear the Enable Registry Save
box.
2 Perform a cold-boot on your 760 Computer, then go through the normal Pocket PC set-up (i.e. Align Screen etc.).
3 Tap the WWANINITxxxxx.CAB file to perform the installation.
4 Perform a warm-boot on the 760 Computer.
5 From the Today screen, tap the Ethernet icon in the System Tray
(circled in the following illustration).
162
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
6 In the NDISTRAY pop-up menu (the Network Driver Interface Specification tray application), select No Networking and Auto FTP Off.
Tap anywhere on the screen to close the menu.
Create a New Connection
Note: This does not apply to the 700CXL Computer.
1 Select Start > Settings > the Connections tab > Connetions. Under My
ISP, tap Add a new modem connection.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
163
Chapter 4 — Network Support
2 Enter “1XRTT” as the name for the connection, select “WANA on
COM4” from the Select a modem drop-down list, then tap Next.
3 Enter #777 for the phone number as it should be dialed, then tap Next
to continue. Select Start > Help for more information or tap use dialing
rules to make modifications. Note that this screen may vary based on your
dialing rules.
164
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
4 Tap Advanced to continue.
5 Tap the General tab, select “115200” from the Baud rate drop-down
list, enter “&C2” without the quotes in the Extra dial-string modem
commands field, then tap ok to return to the 1xRTT settings.
6 Tap Finish to return to the Connections page.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
165
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Using the WWANInit Companion Program
Do the following to run the WWANInit application:
1 From the Today screen, tap the WAN Network icon in the System
Tray (circled in the following illustration) or select Start > WWANInit to
start the application.
2 Tap Modem On. Let it step through process (usually about 30 seconds)
until Modem Ready for use appears.
3 Tap Connect.
4 For Telus, Bell Mobility, and Verizon carriers, click Save password.
For Sprint carriers, leave the field blank.
166
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Username and Password Information
Verizon
Bell Mobility
Telus
Username
10-digit phone
number@vzw3g.com
10 digit phone
number@1xbell.ca
10-digit phone
number@1x.telusmobility.com
Password
vzw
Original Voice Mail system password (usually a 4 digit number)
This is available from the activating organization.
The 11-digit ESN printed inside
the 760 Computer battery
compartment, begins with 099.
5 Click OK. You should see a pop-up message with “Connecting to my
connection→then connected”.
6 Tap Setup, then the Backup tab. Choose the location of the backup file,
then tap Backup Pocket PC connection settings now.
7 Tap ok when prompted.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
167
Chapter 4 — Network Support
8 Select Start > Internet Explorer, then tap the large MSN Mobile link.
9 Tap the small connect to MSN Mobile link. After about 20 seconds,
you should connect to the web.
168
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
GSM/GPRS
GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open, nonproprietary wireless system. GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) is the highspeed data evolution of GSM that supports Internet Protocol (IP), enabling access to Internet and intranet content and applications from GPRS
wireless devices.
Note: See page 130 for information on loading this module in CORE.
WAN Monitor — General
The WAN Monitor CORE module displays helpful information about the
GSM/GPRS radio option built into your 700 Series Computer. The following illustrations are for a GSM/GPRS Siemens MC45 radio.
Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information provided via the General tab. Note that the information is listed alphabetically.
ATT Wireless
Network
Lists the name of the service providing the network support.
Baud
Identifies the frequency bandwidth used by the radio module.
BER
(Bit Error Rate) The average number of bits transmitted in error.
f/w
Identifies the firmware version, if available.
h/w
Identifies the hardware version, if available.
Network Type
The network type which would list “GSM-GPRS.”
Phone Number
Identifies the telephone number assigned to the SIM card.
Radio ESN
The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) assigned to this radio module. “Unavailable” appears if a
number cannot be read from the radio.
Registered on
home network
If the WAN radio module has registered with a service provider network, then one of the following will appear:
S Registered on home network: Radio module is registered on its “home” network.
S Registered on roamed network: Radio module registered on another service provider’s network.
S Radio Not Registered: There is no network within range of this radio module.
RSSI
Displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) frequency or lists “Unavailable” if there
is no signal or the signal cannot be retrieved from the radio module.
Serial Status
Indicates whether serial communications passed (“Serial com OK”) or failed (“Serial com FAIL”)
in its last transaction. A status of “Serial com FAIL” typically indicates that the 700 Series Computer is unable to establish communication with the radio module installed within.
History:
This bar graph displays an active history of this radio module’s quality of
connections.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
169
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Friendly Indicator:
Usually indicates the signal strength for this radio module. Three filled
dots indicate a high quality or strong signal. Three empty dots indicate
that the signal is out of range or there is no signal detected.
WAN Monitor — Details
Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information provided via the Details tab. Most of this is similar to what is shown under
the General tab. Note that the information is listed alphabetically.
Firmware Rev
Identifies the firmware version, if available.
IMEI #
The IMEI (International Mobile station Equipment Identity) serial number of the GSM/GPRS
radio module.
IMSI #
Shows the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) number assigned to the SIM card
installed in this 700 Series Computer.
Manufacturer
Lists the name of the manufacturer that developed this radio module, such as “Siemens.”
Model
Lists the product name for this radio module, such as “MC45.”
Net Provider
Lists the name of the service providing the network support.
RSSI
Displays the RSSI frequency or lists “Unavailable” if there is no signal or the signal cannot be
retrieved from the radio module.
SIM Status
Identifies whether a SIM card is installed in this 700 Series Computer.
170
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
PhoneUtility
Note: This application is for GPRS radios only, due to E911 requirements
issued by the FCC. CDMA radios no longer have voice activation.
With the WAN radio module installed in your 700 Series Computer, you
can send and receive telephone calls. Use the speaker on the back of the
computer as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the
computer for your mouthpiece.
Tap Start > PhoneUtility from the Today screen to access the application
which will process your phone calls. Tap Exit or ok to close this
application and return to the Today screen.
Audio Mode
Select either Handset or Speakerphone from the Audio Mode box, then
do the following to send or answer a phone call:
S Tap the numbers for a phone call, using Clear to erase each digit, then
tap Send to initiate the call.
S Tap Answer to receive an incoming call.
S Tap End to disconnect a transaction.
S Drag the Vol slider up or down to adjust the speaker volume.
S Drag the Mic slider up or down to adjust the microphone sensitivity.
Handset Audio
Mode
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Speakerphone Audio
Mode
171
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Notification
Tap Settings to set your 700 Series Computer to either ring or vibrate or
do both, then tap OK or ok to return to the Audio Mode screen. If you
need to adjust the audio settings, tap Advanced Audio to continue.
Advanced Audio
Tap ok to close the warning and continue.
172
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Drag the appropriate slider bars left or right to adjust the output and input levels. Tap Defaults to return the handset or speakerphone levels to
their factory defaults. Click OK or ok to return to the Notification screen.
Handset Output/Input Levels
Speakerphone Output/Input Levels
Tap ? for more information on these level settings, then click ok or OK to
return to the Output/Input Levels screen.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
173
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Phone Application for 700CXL Computers with GPRS Radios
Note: This application is for 700CXL Computers with GPRS radios.
With the WAN radio module installed in your 700CXL Computer, you
can send and receive telephone calls. Use the speaker on the back of the
computer as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the
computer for your mouthpiece.
174
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Phone Application for 700CXL Computers with CDMA Radios
Note: This application is for 700CXL Computers with CDMA radios.
With the WAN radio module installed in your 700CXL Computer, you
can send and receive telephone calls. Use the speaker on the back of the
computer as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the
computer for your mouthpiece.
Tap Start > Programs > the Phone desktop icon from the Today screen to
access the application which will process your phone calls. Tap the Close
button in the upper right corner of this application to close this
application.
Activation Wizard
When you reboot your 700CXL Computer, if your unit is not activated to
use the PCS wireless, a Activation Wizard starts up. If you wish to do this
activation another time, tap Cancel to close this wizard, then tap Yes.
1 Have your activation code, phone number (MDN), and MSID information ready before you tap Next to continue. You can get this information from your network provider.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
175
Chapter 4 — Network Support
2 Enter your activation code, then tap Next to continue.
Phone Application
Tap the appropriate keys to enter a telephone number, then tap Talk to
dial the number. Tap End to “hang up” the phone.
Tap this to backspace one digit.
Tap this to dial the phone number
shown above the keypad.
Tap this to select a previously
dialed number.
Tap this to view your previous calls.
Tap this to “hang up” your current
call.
Tap this toggle the mute option.
Tap this to access the Contacts application.
Tap this to access the Notes application.
176
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Speed Dial
Tap Speed Dial to select a telephone number with which the 700CXL
Computer is to dial automatically. To add to this list, use the Contacts
application. See Chapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003,” for more information.
Call History
Tap Call History to note the telephone numbers that were previously
dialed from this 700CXL Computer.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
177
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Tools
Use the Tools menu to send a voice mail, access the Activation Wizard,
send an SMS email message, or other configurations. Select Start > Help
for more online information about most of these features.
S Tap Tools > Voice Mail to call and leave a voice message.
S Tap Tools > Activation Wizard to access the wizard with which to activate your 700CXL Computer. Be sure to have an activation code, a
phone number, and MSID information ready. See page 175 for instructions in using this wizard.
S Tap Tools > Send SMS tab to access the Inbox application and send an
SMS (Short Messaging Service) message. Be sure to have an SMS number ready to send the message — this is usually the mobile phone number. See Chapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003,” for information about the
Inbox application.
178
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
S Tap Tools > Options > the Phone tab to customize your phone settings
such as the ring type and ring tone to use for incoming calls, and the
keypad tone to use when entering phone numbers. Tap Other Settings
to go to the Sounds & Notifications control panel applet.
S Tap Tools > Options > the Location tab to toggle between letting your
location be visible for everyone to detect and hiding your location from
everyone except 911.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
179
Chapter 4 — Network Support
S Tap Tools > Options > the Data tab to either reset your connection
settings for PCS Vision or update your PCS Vision profile.
S Tap Tools > Options > the System tab to toggle between automatic or
Sprint roaming and to enable the Call Guard alert when roaming.
180
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
S Tap Tools > Options > the Phone Info tab to view the phone settings.
AT Command Interface
This interface specification is based on the following recommendation:
S ETSI GSM 07.05:
European Digital Cellular Telecommunication System (phase 2)
Use of DTE-DCE interface for Short message and cell broadcast service.
S ETSI GSM 07.07:
European Digital Cellular Telecommunication System (phase 2)
AT command set for GSM Mobile Equipment.
S ITU-T Recommendation V.25 ter
Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control.
Note: You need the Adobe Acrobat Reader application to view a PDF document. Go to http://www.adobe.com/prodindex/acrobat/readstep.html to
install or download the latest Adobe Acrobat Reader.
Command Set for Sierra Wireless SB555
Use the AT command interface from Sierra Wireless to program the
CDMA/1xRTT SB555 radio module. Documentation for this interface is
available via the following URL. Click the “General AT command reference” link for a PDF document, which is 680 KB in size. Note that this
URL is subject to change.
http://www.sierrawireless.com/ProductsOrdering/embedded_docs.html
Command Set for Siemens MC45
Use the MC45 AT command interface from Siemens AG to program the
GPRS/GSM MC45 radio module. The “MC45 Siemens Cellular Engine
AT Command Set” is available either from Intermec Technologies or from
Siemens AG. Contact either your Intermec representative or the Siemens
AG support personnel at the following URL for more information. Note
this URL is subject to change.
http://www.siemens-mobile.com/btob/CDA/presentation/
ap_btob_cda_presentation_frontdoor/0,2950,12,FF.html
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
181
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Testing the AT Commands
Note: This does not apply to the 700CXL Computer.
These commands can be sent to either WAN radio by setting up a dial-up
networking connection to COM4. Do the following to initiate this connection and test these commands to your radio:
1 From the 700 Series Computer, select Start > Settings > the
Connections tab > Connections. Under My ISP, tap Add a new
modem connection.
2 Enter a name for the connection, select “WANA on COM4” from the
Select a modem drop-down list, then tap Next to continue.
182
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
3 Enter a phone number as it should be dialed, then tap Next to continue.
Select Start > Help for more information or tap use dialing rules to
make modifications. Note that this screen may vary based on your dialing
rules.
4 Tap Advanced to continue.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
183
Chapter 4 — Network Support
5 Select “115200” from the Baud rate drop-down list via the General
page.
6 Tap the Port Settings tab, check Enter dialing commands manually,
then tap ok, then Finish to return to the Connections screen.
184
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
7 Press and hold the new connection for a pop-up menu, then tap
Connect to initiate the connection.
8 Wait about ten seconds for the Network Log On screen, then tap OK.
Note: You do not need to enter any information within the Network Log
On screen.
Use either the onscreen keyboard, or press the keys to type any of the AT
commands provided. Press or tap Enter to send each command. The results of each command sent will print onscreen. Note that each “AT” command must start with the “at” characters.
S To see what you typed onscreen, type “ate1” to initiate the AT Echo
command, then press Enter.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
185
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Wireless Personal Area Networking
“Bluetooth” is the name given to a technology standard using short-range
radio links, intended to replace the cables connecting portable and fixed
electronic devices. The standard defines a uniform structure for a wide
range of devices to communicate with each other, with minimal user effort. Its key features are robustness, low complexity, low power, and low
cost. The technology also offers wireless access to LANs, the mobile phone
network, and the internet for a host of home appliances and portable
hand-held interfaces.
Documentation
Information about additional Bluetooth software is in the Wireless Printing SDK and in the Wireless Printing Development Guide (on the Intermec
Developer’s Library CD, via the “\Wireless Printing SDK” directory off the
root).
About the Application
Bluetooth is not started automatically by default after a cold-boot is performed. To run Bluetooth, tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab >
the Bluetooth icon.
The 700 Series Computer retains the Bluetooth state when warm-boots
are performed, for example:
S If Bluetooth is active, and a warm-boot was performed, the 700 Series
Computer boots up with the Bluetooth state activated and Bluetooth
virtual COM ports (such as printing) registered. However, you must
reactivate connections, as the system does not do these automatically.
S If Bluetooth is inactive, and a warm-boot was performed, the 700 Series
Computer boots up with Bluetooth deactivated.
Mode
The default tab activates or deactivates Bluetooth. When Bluetooth is activated, the 700 Series Computer can discover and connect to remote devices.
186
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Wireless Printing
Use this tab to print via Bluetooth devices. Tap Device Discovery to discover (or scan) for remote Bluetooth devices. When the 700 Series Computer is finished scanning, any newly discovered devices appear in the upper
Devices box.
Tap Clear Devices to remove the list from the Devices box.
To print to a Bluetooth device, select any of the devices listed in the
Devices box, then tap Connect. Once connected, the selected device
moves to the lower Connected box.
To view connection information or register a COM port for a device,
from the lower Connected box, select a device, then tap Properties. See
“Properties” on the next page for information.
When done printing to a device, select that device in the Connected box,
then tap Disconnect. This moves the device in question back to the upper
Devices box.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
187
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Properties
Select a COM Port from the Choose COM Port box to register for this
device, then check Enable Wireless Printing to complete the COM port
registration. To change your COM port selection, clear (uncheck) the Enable Wireless Printing box, select a new COM port, then check Enable
Wireless Printing again. COM ports that already are in use are grayed out.
When you enable Wireless Printing, a status message is shown near the
bottom of the screen to confirm your action. To print a test page to your
printer, tap Print Test Page.
Tap ok to return to the Wireless Printing page.
188
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
File Transfer
Use this page to enable your unit to receive files from another Bluetooth
device, or from any device that supports this function.
From this point, this transfer is similar to an IrDA file transfer. To transfer
a file, tap Start > Programs > File Explorer and locate the file to transfer.
Press and hold on the file for a pop-up menu, then select Beam File.
The system searches for a list of Bluetooth devices that will accept a connection from your unit. When the list is complete, tap on a device to
which to send the file. Note: in some cases, the user of the target device has to
“accept” the file before it is transmitted.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
189
Chapter 4 — Network Support
AutoIP/DHCP
Automatic Private IP Addressing (AutoIP) is enabled by default in
Windows Mobile 2003. To remain compatible with other versions of
Pocket PC, this setting needs to be enabled. You can configure the registry
settings in the following to set the required AutoIP/DHCP behavior:
S For Ethernet:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\LAN9001\TcpIp
S Fot 802.11b:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\NETWLAN1\TcpIp
Other registry keys that can modify the behavior of AutoIP are as follows.
You can find the appropriate settings and behavior of each of these keys in
Microsoft Help.
S AutoInterval
S AutoMask
S AutoSubnet
S AutoIP
S AutoSeed
When a TCP/IP client cannot find a DHCP server, it generates an AutoIP
address from the 169.254.xxx.xxx block. The client then tries to check for
a DHCP server every 300 seconds (5 minutes) and if a DHCP server is
found, the client drops the AutoIP address and uses the address from the
DHCP server.
In the MSDN Windows CE documentation available out on the Microsoft Developer Network web site (http://www.msdn.com), see “Automatic
Client Configuration” for more information on AutoIP.
To disable AutoIP, set the AutoCfg registry entry to “0.” If a DHCP server cannot be found, instead of using AutoIP, the system will display the
“Unable to obtain a server assigned IP address” message.
Note: If AutoIP is defined using CAB files, the EnableDHCP registry key
must also be defined and set to “1” before the system will attempt to obtain a DHCP address.
Note: To extend the number of attempts that a DHCP client makes to get
a DHCP address, use the DhcpRetryDialogue and DhcpMaxRetry registry
settings.
Note: Change the AutoInterval registry key value to make the client retry
more often to obtain a DHCP address.
190
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 4 — Network Support
SNMP Configuration on the 700 Series Computer
In short, SNMP is an application-layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. The 700
Series Computer is such an SNMP-enabled device. Use SNMP to control
and configure the 700 Series Computer anywhere on an SNMP-enabled
network.
The 700 Series Computer supports four proprietary Management Information Bases (MIBs) and Intermec Technologies provides SNMP support
for MIB-II through seven read-only MIB-II (RFC1213-MIB) Object
Identifiers (OIDs).
Note: You can only query these seven OIDs through an SNMP management station.
Management Information Base
The Management Information Base is a database that contains information
about the elements to be managed. The information identifies the management element and specifies its type and access mode (Read-Only, ReadWrite). MIBs are written in ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation.1) — a machine independent data definition language. Note: Elements to be managed
are represented by objects. The MIB is a structured collection of such objects.
You will find the following MIB files either in the 700 Color Management
Tools portion of the Intermec Developer’s Library CD or on the web via
http://www.intermec.com:
S INTERMEC.MIB
Defines the root of the Intermec MIB tree.
S ITCADC.MIB
Defines objects for Automated Data Collection (ADC), such as bar
code symbologies.
S ITCSNMP.MIB
Defines objects for Intermec SNMP parameters and security methods,
such as an SNMP security IP address.
S ITCTERMINAL.MIB
Defines objects for 700 Series parameters, such as key clicks.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
191
Chapter 4 — Network Support
Object Identifiers
Each object has a unique identifier called an OID, which consist of a sequence of integer values represented in dot notation. Objects are stored in
a tree structure and OIDs are assigned based on the position of the object
in the tree. For example, the internet OID is equal to 1.3.6.1. Seven MIB
OIDs are shown in the following table:
MIB Object Identifiers
MIB-II Item
OID
Group or Table
Description
ifNumber
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.0
Interfaces Group
Indicates the number of adapters
present in the system. For the 700
Series Computer, if one adapter is
present in the system, then ifNumber = 1 and ifIndex = 1.
ifIndex
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.ifIndex
Interfaces Table (ifTable) A unique value for each interface.
The value ranges between 1 and the
value of ifNumber.
ifDescr
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2.ifIndex
Interfaces Table (ifTable) A textual string containing information about the interface.
ifType
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.3.ifIndex
Interfaces Table (ifTable) An integer containing information
about the type of the interface. It is
equal to 1 for Other.
ipAdEntAddr
1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1.IpAddress IP address Table
(ipAddrTable)
The IP address to which this entry’s
addressing information pertains
(same as 700 IP address), where IP
Address is the valid non-zero IP address of the 700 Series Computer.
ipAdEntIfIndex
1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.2.IpAddress IP address Table
(ipAddrTable)
The index value that uniquely identifies the interface to which this
entry is applicable (same as ifIndex).
ipAdEntNetMask 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.3.IpAddress IP address Table
(ipAddrTable)
The subnet mask associated with
the IP address of this entry (same as
Subnet Mask).
Configuring with SNMP
The community string allows an SNMP manager to manage the 700 Series
Computer with a specified privilege level. The default read-only community string is “public” and “private” is the default read/write community
string. See the specific configuration parameter to find its OID. To configure the 700 Series Computers using SNMP:
1 Configure 700 Series Computers for RF or Ethernet communications.
2 Determine the OID (Object Identifier) for the parameter to be changed. The Intermec base OID is 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.
3 Use your SNMP management station to get and set variables that are
defined in the Intermec MIBs. You can set the traps, identification, or
security configuration parameters for SNMP. See Appendix A, “Configurable Settings,” to learn more about these parameters.
192
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
5
Printer Support
The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer works with the following printers
from Intermec Technologies. Contact an Intermec representative for information about these printers.
S 6820
A full-page, 80-column printer.
S 6808
A 4-inch belt-mount printer.
S PB20
A 2-inch belt-mount printer with a Bluetooth compatible module from
Socket Communications.
S 782T
A 2-inch workboard printer.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
193
Chapter 5 — Printer Support
Printing ASCII
The following methods for printing using Pocket PC at this time is as follows:
S Add port drivers to print ASCII directly to the port.
S Use LinePrinter ActiveX Control from the Software Developer’s Kit
(SDK) — see the SDK User’s Manual for more information.
S Via wireless printing - see the Wireless Printing Development Guide on the
Intermec Developer’s Library CD for more information.
Directly to a Port
Printing directly to the port sends RAW data to the printer. The format of
this data depends upon your application and the printer capabilities.
You must understand the printer commands available for your specific
printer. Generally, applications just send raw ASCII text to the printer.
Since you are sending data to the printer from your application directly to
the port you are in complete control of the printers operations. This allows
you to do line printing (print one line at a time) rather than the page format printing offered by the GDI approach. It is also much faster since data
does not have to be converted from one graphics format to the other (display to printer). Most Intermec® printers use Epson Escape Sequences to
control print format operations.
These commands are available in documentation you receive with your
printers or from technical support. Win32 APIs are required to print directly to the port.
Directly to a Generic Serial Port
To print directly to a generic serial port printer (non-Intermec printers):
S Use CreateFile() to open ports - COM1: can be opened on most devices.
S Use WriteFile() to send data directly to the printer.
S Use CloseHandle() when you are finished printing to close the port.
IrDA Printer Driver
IrDA printing is only available on the certain devices and is supported directly by the Windows CE load via the IrSock API provided by the Microsoft Win32 API without need for additional drivers. Intermec 6804, 6805,
6806, 6808 and 6820 and other IrDA printers are supported.
194
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 5 — Printer Support
NPCP Printer Driver
The NPCP printer communications driver (NPCPPORT.DLL) is a
Stream Device Driver built into the operating system. The driver supports
only NPCP communications to and from the 6820 and 4820 printers over
a selected serial port.
All applications use WIN32 API functions to access the drivers. Basic operations are easily implemented by applications through the CreateFile(),
WriteFile(), ReadFile(), DeviceIOControl(), and CloseHandle() Win32
APIs.
Operations to upgrade printer modules, perform printer diagnostics, and
get printer configuration are performed largely via DeviceIOControl()
functions.
About NPCP
NPCP (Norand® Portable Communications Protocol) is a proprietary
protocol that provides session, network, and datalink services for Intermec
mobile computers in the Intermec LAN environment used with printers
and data communications.
NPCP Driver Installation and Removal
Use LPT9: for the NPCP printer device and COM1 for the last parameter. COM1 is the connection available via the 700 Series Computer.
Applications use the RegisterDevice() function to install the driver.
DeregisterDevice() uninstalls the device driver and frees memory space
when the driver is not required. Use the HANDLE returned by
RegisterDevice() as the parameter to DeregisterDevice().
Use the RegisterDevice() function call as demonstrated below. Specify the
full path name to the driver starting at the root for the RegisterDevice()
function to work properly. The last parameter to RegisterDevice() is a
DWORD that represents the name of the port for the NPCP stream
driver to use. Build this parameter on the stack if it is not to be paged out
during the call. The first parameter “LPT” (Device Name) and the second
parameter “9’ (index), indicate the name of the registered device, such as
LPT9. This is used in the CreateFile() function call.
Install()
HANDLE hDevice;
TCHAR port[6];
port[0] = TCHAR(‘C’);
port[1] = TCHAR(‘O’);
port[2] = TCHAR(‘M’);
port[3] = TCHAR(‘1’);
port[4] = TCHAR(‘:’);
port[5] = TCHAR(0);
hDevice = RegisterDevice ( (TEXT(”LPT”), 9,
TEXT(“\\STORAGE CARD\\WINDOWS\\NPCPPORT.dll”), (DWORD)port);
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
195
Chapter 5 — Printer Support
Opening the NPCP Driver
The application opens the NPCP driver by using the CreateFile()
function. The call can be implemented as follows. The first parameter
“LPT9:” must reflect the device name and index used in the
RegisterDevice() function call and will fail for any of the following reasons:
hFile = CreateFile(_T(”LPT9:”), GENERIC_WRITE |
GENERIC_READ, 0, NULL, OPEN_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL,
NULL);
S The port associated with the device during RegisterDevice() is in use.
S The NPCP device is already open.
S The share mode is not set to zero. The device cannot be shared.
S Access permissions are not set to GENERIC_WRITE |
GENERIC_READ. Both modes must be specified.
Closing the NPCP Driver
Using the CloseHandle() (hFile) function closes the NPCP driver. Where
hFile is the handle returned by the CreateFile() function call.
S TRUE = the device is successfully closed.
S FALSE = an attempt to close NULL HANDLE or an already closed device.
Reading from the NPCP Driver
Reading of the NPCP printers is not supported since all responses from
the printer are the result of commands sent to the printer.
DeviceIoControl() functions are provided where data is to be received
from the printer.
Writing to the NPCP Driver
All Print data can be sent to the printer using the WriteFile() function.
The print data written to the driver must contain the proper printer
commands for formatting. If the function returns FALSE, the NPCP error
may be retrieved using IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR. See the description on
the next page.
196
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 5 — Printer Support
NPCP Driver I/O Controls
An application uses the DeviceIoControl() function to specify an printer
operation to be performed. Certain I/O controls are required to bind and
close communication sessions with the printer, and must be completed
before any other commands to the driver can execute properly.
The function returns TRUE to indicate the device successfully completed
its specified I/O control operation, otherwise it returns FALSE. The
following I/O control codes are defined:
#define IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL
CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x400,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)
#define IOCTL_NPCP_BIND
CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x401,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)
#define IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE
CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x402,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)
#define IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR
CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x403,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)
#define IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH
CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x404,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)
#define IOCTL_NPCP_IOCTL
CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x405,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)
#define IOCTL_NPCP_PRTVER
CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x406,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)
S IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL
This cancels all printing at the printer. It flushes the printer buffers and
reinitializes the printer to its default state. No parameters are required.
S IOCTL_NPCP_BIND
This command is required before any data is sent or received by the
printer. Once the driver is opened, the application must bind the communications session with the printer before any data can be sent or received by the printer. If an error occurs during the bind, the application
may use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the current extended error
code. No parameters are required.
S IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE
This command closes the current session with the printer. This function
always returns TRUE. No parameters are required.
S IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR
This command returns the extended NPCP error code in PL/N format.
The word returned will contain the PL/N compatible error code in the
low byte and completion flags in the high byte. If the frame that returned an error was not received correctly by the printer the
FRAME_NOT_ACKED bit will be set in the high byte. This operation
always returns TRUE. An output buffer of at least 2 bytes is required.
See “NPCP Error Codes” on page 199.
S IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH
This command allows the application to poll the printer for errors while
the report is completing the print process at the printer. If an error occurs during the polling process, the operation will return FALSE and
the application can get the extended error code by using
IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR. No parameters are required.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
197
Chapter 5 — Printer Support
NPCP Printer Communications
All NPCP printer communications should be based on the following flow:
1 Use CreateFile(); to open the printer driver.
2 Use IOCTL_NPCP_BIND to bind a session with the printer;
IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to check for errors on the bind to ensure success; and IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL to cancel any outstanding print
jobs.
3 Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer to free up printer buffer resources. Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer’s status. If
an error is reported by the IOCTL, then use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR
to get the error and determine the correct recovery procedure.
4 Use WriteFile(); to write your data to the printer. Check for errors and
that all data were written. Use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the extended error. If the error is critical in nature, use
IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE, followed by CloseFile(), to end the communications session. Start a new session, beginning with step 1 to ensure
proper printing. For noncritical errors display the error and retry the
operation.
5 After all data is sent to the printer, ensure that the printer continues to
print the report properly by polling the printer’s status. Use
IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer’s status. If an error is reported by the IOCTL, then use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the
error and determine the correct recovery procedure.
Sample Code
See sample code in the “\700C Dev Tools\Installable Drivers\Port
Drivers\Npcp\NPCPPrint\” directory for more details on printing, printer
communications and error code handling.
198
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 5 — Printer Support
NPCP Error Codes
Call the IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR I/O control function to receive PL/N
compatible error codes. Applications must decide how to act upon the data
returned.
// Definition of NPCP communications Errors and Printer Errors
#define PNRDY (BYTE)102 // link not ready error
#define RXTMO (BYTE)104 // link no receive error
#define TXTMO (BYTE)106 // link no transmit error
#define BADADR (BYTE)111 // frame address error
#define GAPERR (BYTE)112 // link gap error (timeout) in receive data
#define LSRPE (BYTE)113 // frame parity error on length field
#define IFTS (BYTE)120 // session layer - invalid frame this state
#define NS_NE_VR (BYTE)121 // session layer sequence error
#define NR_NE_VS (BYTE)122 // session layer sequence error
#define MAC_CRCERR (BYTE)124 // MAC CRC error
#define RLENERR (BYTE)123 // MAC too much data received
#define FRMERR (BYTE)200 // Frame Reject
#define FRMERR_IF (BYTE)201 // Frame Reject - Invalid Frame
#define FRMERR_NR (BYTE)202 // Frame Reject - NR Mismatch
#define FRMERR_NS (BYTE)203 // Frame Reject - NS Mismatch
#define NDMERR (BYTE)204 // Normal Disconnect mode error
#define BINDERR (BYTE)210 // bind error
#define IPLDUR (BYTE)221 // invalid presentation layer response
#define HEADJAM (BYTE)222 // printer head jam
#define PAPEROUT (BYTE)223 // printer paper out
#define LOWVOLTS (BYTE)224 // printer low voltage
#define HIVOLTS (BYTE)225 // printer over voltage
#define LOWBAT (BYTE)226 // printer low battery
#define COVEROFF (BYTE)227 // printer cover off error
#define HEADFAULT (BYTE)228 // printer head short or driver short error
#define PFFAULT (BYTE)229 // paper feed motor fault.
#define FRAME_NOT_ACKED 0x8000 // frame was not received by printer and need
to be resent.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
199
Chapter 5 — Printer Support
O’Neil Printer Driver
The DTR printer communications driver is a Stream Device Driver
named ONEIL.DLL.
All applications use WIN32 API functions to access drivers. Basic
operations are easily implemented by applications through the
CreateFile(), WriteFile(), DeviceIOControl() and CloseHandle() Win32
APIs.
The driver supports communications to 6804DM, 6804T, 6805A, 6806,
6808, 681T, and PB20 printers over a selected serial port.
DTR Driver Installation and Removal
Your application must install the device driver by using the RegisterDevice() function. The driver name is ONEIL.DLL. We recommend that
you use “DTR” for the Device Name parameter, “1” for the Device Driver index parameter, and use any of the following strings for the last parameter:
S NULL (==0) Defaults to COM1 @ 9600
S “COM1” only COM port specified defaults to 9600
S “COM1:9600” sets to COM port and specified bit rate
S “COM1:19200” sets to COM port and specified bit rate
Use the HANDLE returned by RegisterDevice() as the parameter to
DeregisterDevice(). The correct usage of the RegisterDevice() function call
is demonstrated below. You may use DeregisterDevice() to uninstall the
driver.
Install()
HANDLE hDevice;
TCHAR port[6];
port[0] = TCHAR(‘C’);
port[1] = TCHAR(‘O’);
port[2] = TCHAR(‘M’);
port[3] = TCHAR(‘1’);
port[4] = TCHAR(‘:’);
port[5] = TCHAR(0);
hDevice = RegisterDevice ( (TEXT(”DTR”), 1, TEXT(”\\WINDOWS\\ONEIL.DLL”),
(DWORD)port);
200
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 5 — Printer Support
Opening the DTR Driver
The application opens the DTR driver by using the CreateFile() function.
The call can be implemented as follows:
hFile = CreateFile(_T(”DTR1:”), GENERIC_WRITE, 0, NULL,
OPEN_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL);
The first parameter “DTR1:” must reflect the device name and index used
in the RegisterDevice() function call.
The function call will fail for any of the following reasons:
S The port associated with the device during RegisterDevice() is currently
in use.
S The DTR device is already open.
S The share mode is not set to zero. The device cannot be shared.
S Access permissions are not set to GENERIC_WRITE.
Closing the DTR Driver
Using the CloseHandle() (hFile) function closes the DTR driver. Where
hFile is the handle returned by the CreateFile() function call.
S TRUE indicates the device is successfully closed.
S FALSE indicates an attempt to close a NULL HANDLE or an already
closed device.
Writing to the DTR Driver
You can use the WriteFile() function to send all Print data to the printer.
The print data being written must contain the proper formatting printer
commands.
DTR Printer Communications
All DTR printer communications should be based on the following flow:
1 Use CreateFile(); to open the printer driver.
2 Use WriteFile() to write your data to the printer. Check for errors and
that all data were written.
3 Use CloseHandle() to close the driver.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
201
Chapter 5 — Printer Support
202
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
6
Scanner Support
The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer is available with imaging or laser
scanning technologies, including the following:
APS Linear Imager: (standard for 730 Computers)
— includes the EV10 Scan Engine
Reads 1D symbologies and PDF417 bar codes. Linear
imaging using Vista Scanning technology reads low-contrast bar codes, laminated bar codes, and bar codes displayed on CRT or TRT displays. This imaging uses
harmless LEDs for illumination and does not require any
warning labels. Vista Scanning is more reliable than lasers as it is a completely solid state with no moving parts
or oscillating mirrors.
2D Imager: (not supported on 730 Computers)
— includes the IT4000 Scan Engine
This decodes several stacked 1D and 2D symbologies,
including PDF417, Data Matrix, and MaxiCode without
“painting.” It can also read 1D codes from any orientation, for example the scan beam does not need to align
perpendicular to the symbol to read it. Photography is a
secondary application; the lens in the device favors bar
code reading. Photos are 640x480, 256 gray-scale.
1D Laser Scanner: (not supported on 730 Computers)
— includes the SE900, SE900HS, SE900-S6, and
SE900HS-S6 scan engines
Traditional laser scanner that decodes 1D bar codes.
PDF417 Laser Scanner: (not supported on 730 Computers) Higher speed laser scanner that can read PDF417 labels
by “painting” the label.
A 700 Color Imager Demo application demonstrates the more common
features of the 700 Color Computer imager. See the Imager Demo V1.0
User’s Guide on the Intermec Developer’s Library CD for information.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
203
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
Scanner Control and Data Transfer
Note: To use the methods described below, enable Data Collection functionality on the 700 Computer using the bootloader configuration menu.
The Data Server and associated software provide several ways to manipulate scanner control and data transfer between the scanner subsystem and
user applications:
S Automatic Data Collection COM Interfaces:
These COM interfaces allow user applications to receive bar code data,
and configure and control the bar code reader engine.
S ITCAxBarCodeReaderControl functions:
These ActiveX controls allow user applications to collect bar code data
from the scanner, to configure the scanner, and to configure audio and
visual notification when data arrives.
S ITCAxReaderCommand functions:
Use these ActiveX controls to modify and retrieve configuration information using the reader interface commands.
S Scanning EasySet bar code labels:
You can use the EasySetR bar code creation software from Intermec
Technologies Corporation to print configuration labels. Scan the labels
to change the scanner configuration and data transfer settings.
For more information, see the SDK User’s Manual provided with your
Windows CE/PocketPC SDK.
EasySet Software
Use the Intermec EasySet software to print configuration labels you can
scan to change your configuration settings. For more information, see the
EasySet online help. EasySet is available from the Intermec Data Capture
web site.
204
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
Data Collection Configuration
For Units with PSM Builds Older than 3.00
Scanner settings for the 700 Series Computer can be configured via the
Data Collection control panel applet. From the 700 Series Computer, tap
Start > Settings > the System tab > Data Collection. See Appendix A,
“Configurable Settings” for more information about the following parameters. Note that these are in alphabetical order.
S Codabar (page 304)
S Code 11 (page 318)
S Code 128 (page 307)
S Code 128 Options (page 308)
S Code 128 FNC1 Character (page 309)
S Code 39 (page 302)
S Code 93 (page 306)
S Code 93 Length (page 306)
S Data Matrix (page 320)
S Interleaved 2 of 5 (page 315)
S Matrix 2 of 5 (page 316)
S MaxiCode (page 321)
S MSI (page 311)
S PDF417 (page 312)
S Macro PDF (page 312)
S Micro PDF417 (page 314)
S Plessey (page 310)
S QR Code (page 319)
S Standard 2 of 5 (page 303)
S Telepen (page 317)
S UPC/EAN (page 305)
For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer
You can configure scanner settings for the 700 Series Computer via the
Intermec Settings control panel applet. From the 700 Series Computer,
tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon. See the
Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual (P/N: 073529) for information about the settings you can configure with this applet. This online
manual is available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
205
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
Internal Scanners
The Intermec Internal Scanner feature allows Automatic Data Collection
(ADC) by accepting data from the COM1 port and wedging it into the
keyboard interface. You can enable or disable this feature from the Today
screen on the 700 Series Computer.
For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer
Do the following before you configure your internal scanner from the Intermec Settings control panel applet. Information about the settings you
can configure with this applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermec
web site at www.intermec.com.
1 From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab >
the Intermec Settings icon.
2 Double-tap the Scanners, Symbologies folder, then expand (+) the
Internal Scanner option. This sample screen is for the IT4000 scan engine.
206
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
Scanner and Imager Settings
Depending on what is selected as the scanner model, image settings, decode security, scanner settings, and virtual wedge are configured from the
Intermec Settings applet. See the the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual, available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com,
for more information about each enabled option.
Internal Scanner Supported Symbologies
See the following table for a guideline and Appendix B, “Bar Code Symbologies” for more information on each supported symbology:
Symbologies
EV10
IT4000
SE900
SE900HS
SE900-S6
SE900HS-S6
Code39
UPC/EAN
Code 128
Interleaved 2 of 5
Code 93
Codabar
Code 2 of 5
MSI
Plessey
Code 11
Matrix 2 of 5
Telepen
PDF417
Micro PDF417
MaxiCode
Data Matrix
QR Code
RSS 14
Available in f/w
Sxxp304
Available in f/w
Sxxp304
RSS Limited
Available in f/w
Sxxp304
Available in f/w
Sxxp304
RSS Expanded
Available in f/w
Sxxp304
Available in f/w
Sxxp304
Codablock A
Codablock F
UCC Composite
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
207
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
Tethered Scanners
The Intermec Tethered Scanner feature allows Automatic Data Collection
(ADC) by accepting data from the COM1 port and wedging it into the
keyboard interface. You can enable or disable this feature from the Today
screen on the 700 Series Computer.
The following information is divided between units with PSM Builds older than 3.00 (next paragraph) or units with PSM Builds 3.00 or newer
(starting on page 213).
For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00
Enabling and Disabling
On the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Today. Tap the bar code scanner
icon in the System Tray (circled below). Initially, the bar code scanner icon
indicates that this feature is disabled (shown to the left).
S Select Comm Port Wedge to send any data, coming into the 700 Series
Computer through the COM1 port from an external input device, as
keyboard data to an application on the desktop.
For example, if you have Pocket Word running on your 700 Series
Computer desktop, information scanned with a scanner connected to
the COM1 port appears in the Word document. If another data collection application is running and is active on the 700 Series Computer,
the scanned information appears in that application.
Note: When Comm Port Wedge is selected, regardless of the data sent
by the external input device, you cannot control the device or the data
format using any of the Intermec scanner control or data transfer APIs
from the SDK or the internal Data Collection software. The external
input device is governed by what software it has onboard to tell it how
to scan, take pictures, or send the data elsewhere.
208
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
S Select 1551/1553 to enable the Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner
to scan, then send data as keyboard data. The 1551/1553 Tethered
Scanner has software onboard that translates scanned data into characters, so the running/active application does not need to know how to do
that. All the scanner control and data transfer APIs will work with the
1551/1553 Tethered Scanner, so you can control the device.
S Select Disable All to disable this feature and use the COM1 port for
another application, such as ActiveSync. An error message will result if
this option were not selected, but this action was attempted. Similarly, if
ActiveSync is using the COM1 port, and you select Comm Port Wedge
or 1551/1553, an error message will result. See “Error Message” for
more information.
Error Message
If the COM1 port is used by another application, such as ActiveSync, neither the Comm Port Wedge nor the 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner can be
enabled. As a result, the following message may appear. Note that this message is for the Comm Port Wedge. You must disable that application to free
up the COM1 port before you can enable either the wedge or the scanner.
Changing Comm Settings
Tap Change Comm Settings to configure the settings for the COM1
port. Current settings are restored after a warm-boot is performed, but are
lost after a cold-boot is performed. When these settings are not changed,
the OK button is disabled (grayed out). When changes are made, tap OK
after it is enabled to accept these changes.
S Baud Rate:
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
115200
S Data Bits:
7 or 8
S Parity:
None, Odd, Even, Mark, Space
S Stop Bits:
1 or 2
S Flow Control: None or Hardware
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
209
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
Tethered Scanner
Default settings for the Tethered Scanner are shown in this illustration:
Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner
The default communication configuration for the Sabre 1551E or 1553
Tethered Scanner is shown in the following illustration. Scan the EasySet
Reset Factory Defaults label to set the Sabre 1551E or 1553 tethered scanner communications settings to this configuration. The COM1 port configuration settings must also match those of the scanner to scan labels.
Welch Allyn 1470 Imager Settings
You can set the Welch Allyn 1470 Imager to this configuration by scanning the Factory Default Settings label.
210
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
Scanner Cabling
A null modem cable is required for the Welch Allyn 1470 Imager to communicate with the 700 Series Computer when using the 700 Series Serial
Cable (P/N: 226-999-001).
Sabre 1551E / 1553 Cables connect directly to the Model 700 COM Port.
Limitations and Capabilities
The Tethered Scanner has the following limitations:
S No auto detection of a scanner’s physical connection to COM1 port.
User needs to ensure the communication settings of COM1 port
matched the settings of the device.
S The Pocket PC Pocket Office applications misbehave when control
characters such as carriage return are wedged. This is a known Pocket
PC problem, which is being worked with Microsoft and for which a
work around is being developed.
S Communications port is COM1 and cannot be changed.
S A complete bar code label is detected when the time between bytes (the
inter-byte gap) exceeds 100 ms. This allows that data could be concatenated if two labels were received while the Comm Port Wedge or the
1551/1553 Tethered Scanner was not performing a read. That is, it
could be wedging data just read or the read thread could be preempted.
Also, the labels could appear concatenated if the scanner itself were to
buffer the labels before transmitting them.
When enabled, the “Comm Port Wedge” menu option has this limitation:
S There is no bar code API to get bar code data from the bar code scanner. The Comm Port Wedge transmits the data through the keyboard
interface only.
When enabled, the “1551/1553” menu option has these capabilities:
S Grid Data Editing is available.
S The source of the symbology configurations is only available via the
Easy Set command labels. You can only configure the Virtual Wedge
configurations via the Data Collection control panel applet Virtual
Wedge page. See Appendix A, “Configurable Settings,” for information.
S May transmit the data through the keyboard interface (via the Virtual
Wedge).
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
211
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
S The bar code APIs, defined in the IADC interface, are available to get
bar code data from the bar code scanner. The following example shows
how to programmatically collects bar code data:
#include “IADC.h”
#include “ITCAdcMgmt.h”
// Linked with ITCUUID.LIB
// Linked with ITCAdcDevMgmt.lib
IADC* pIADC;
HRESULT hrStatus = S_OK;
// Create a ADC COM interface to collect bar code data from the 1551E/1553
// when the 1551/1553 menu option is enabled.
hrStatus =
ITCDeviceOpen(TEXT(“ExtScanner”), // Name of the ADC device.
IID_IADC,
// COM interface to return
ITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD,
// Device’s Flags
(LPVOID *) &pIADC);
// the returned interface
if( SUCCEEDED(hrStatus) )
BYTE byteBuffer[MAX_LABEL_SIZE];
DWORD dwLength = 0;
HRESULT hr = pIDC->Read(
byteBuffer,
//
MAX_LABEL_SIZE,
//
&dwLength,
//
NULL,
//
INFINITE
//
);
Buffer to put the ADC data.
Size of pDataBuffer in bytes.
Number bytes returned.
Time stamp of the received data. NULL.
Number of milliseconds to wait.
when done using this COM interface, delete it:
ITCDeviceClose( (IUnknown **) pIADC);
212
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer
Configuring the Tethered Scanner
Do the following before you configure your tethered scanner from the Intermec Settings control panel applet. Information about the settings you
can configure with this applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermec
web site at www.intermec.com.
1 Connect your tethered scanner to the tethered scanner port.
2 From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab >
the Intermec Settings icon.
3 Double-tap the Scanners, Symbologies folder, then expand (+) the
Tethered Scanner option.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
213
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
4 Tap the Scanner model option for a drop-down list, then select the applicable scanner, such as “1551E” or “1553” in this sample screen.
5 Make sure a scanner is connected to your 700 Computer properly.
Then, tap to check Scanner Port State, then tap File > Save Settings
from the bottom of the screen. These changes will take several moments
to reset.
214
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
1551E or 1553 Selected for Scanner Model
When “1551E” or “1553” is selected from the Scanner model option (see
step 4 above), and the port state is already enabled (see step 5), the process
will take several moments to reset. When 1551E or 1553 is successfully
connected during this step, the unit will emit some beeps. Here, the terminal is initializing the scanner at 9600 for the baud rate, 7 data bits, even
parity, and 2 stop bits and synchronizing the terminal’s configuration with
the attached scanner.
With “1551E” or “1553” selected, Symbologies, Symbology Options,
Hardware Trigger, and Scanner Port settings are configured from the Intermec Settings applet. See the the Intermec Computer Command Reference
Manual, available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com, for
more information about each enabled option.
ASCII Selected for Scanner Model
To send data coming into the 700 Series Computer through the COM1
port from an external input device, as keyboard data to an application on
the desktop, do the following:
1 Select “ASCII” from the Scanner model option.
2 Tap to check Scanner Port State.
3 Tap File > Save Settings from the bottom of the screen.
With “ASCII” selected, Symbology Options, Hardware Trigger, and Scanner Port settings are configured from the Intermec Settings applet. See the
the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual, available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com, for more information about each
enabled option.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
215
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
Note: When selecting either the 1551E or the 1553 Scanner or enabling
the scanner port for these scanners, the 700 Computer tries to communicate with the attached scanner. If the scanner is not powered, if the cable is
not connected properly, the wrong cable is used, or if the scanner firmware
is older than 2.0, and the “Failed to save one or more settings” message
appears, then this step failed.
This process can take time as the terminal is going through a group of
RS-232 settings to communicate with the scanner. After successful communicated with the scanner (about eight beeps are generated), it initializes
the scanner with the 700 Computer’s current settings. This process might
generate a series of beeps pending on the firmware version installed in the
scanner. These beeps are suppressed in firmware versions 2.08 or greater.
Troubleshooting the 1551E/1553 Tethered Scanner
Do the following to troubleshoot your 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner:
1 Ensure the correct cable is used for the scanner on the tethered scanner
port. Note the 700 Computer cannot supply power to the scanner.
2 Perform a quick test to determine whether the connection is good.
Temporary select the scanner model as “ASCII,” then enable the scanner port state. Go to a command prompt or a notepad and scan a data
label. If a label is wedged into the command prompt or notepad, then
the connection is good.
3 If step 2 passes, reset the scanner configurations to their defaults (scan
the Reset Factory Defaults label on the next page) to prevent miscommunication, then reenable the scanner port state.
4 If step 2 fails, then the firmware installed in the tethered scanner may be
older than version 2.0. Upgrade your scanner firmware.
Reset Factory Defaults
Scan the EasySet software bar code label “Reset Factory Default” to restore
all of your scanner’s configurations to their factory defaults. When this
command label is scanned, reinitialize the tethered scanner (such as disable
the scanner port state, then enable it) on the 700 Computer. Otherwise,
the online configuration and scanning on the 700 Computer are not functional. In general, scan this label only to initially reset the scanner.
Do not scan EasySet command labels to change the following settings:
S Symbologies code mark
S Code 128, EAN29 Identifier
S Preamble and Postamble
S Enable/Disable symbologies
S Symbology ID transmit option
In some cases, scanning EasySet Command labels cause the current setting
on the user interface to be out of sync with the scanner settings. However,
in some cases, scanning these labels does corrupt scanned data.
The “Open COMx error: 0x00000037” message appears if the COM port
cannot open due to another application using the port. Disable that application to free up the COM1 port before you can enable the scanner. “x”
is the COM port number, such as 1, 2, or 3.
216
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
Tethered Scanner Supported Symbologies
The user interface may allow configuration of PDF417, Micro PDF417,
RSS, and Codablock bar code symbologies. However, these symbologies
are dependant on what scanner models and firmware versions are in use.
See the following table for a guideline and Appendix B, “Bar Code Symbologies” for more information on each supported symbology:
You can use a generic ASCII scanner with the 700 Computer. Pending on
the scanner, linear symbologies such as Code39, should decode correctly.
However, 2D symbologies such as PDF417 may not decode correctly.
Symbologies
1551E
1553
Code39
UPC/EAN
Code 128
Interleaved 2 of 5
Code 93
Codabar
Code 2 of 5
MSI
Plessey
Code 11
Matrix 2 of 5
Telepen
PDF417
Available in 1551 0808 PDF
Micro PDF417
Available in 1551 0808 PDF, Sxxp217_ or later
MaxiCode
Data Matrix
QR Code
RSS 14
F/w version 2.15 or later
F/w version 2.15 or later
RSS Limited
F/w version 2.15 or later
F/w version 2.15 or later
RSS Expanded
F/w version 2.15 or later
F/w version 2.15 or later
Codablock A
Available in 1551 0808 PDF
Codablock F
Available in 1551 0808 PDF
UCC Composite
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
217
Chapter 6 — Scanner Support
218
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
7
Programming
The following programming information pertains to the 700 Series Color
Mobile Computer:
S Creating CAB Files (page 220)
S Customization and Lockdown (page 237)
S FTP Server (page 239)
S Kernel I/O Control Functions (page 247)
S Network Selection APIs (page 263)
S Notifications (page 286)
S Reboot Functions (page 288)
S Remapping the Keypad (page 289)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
219
Chapter 7 — Programming
Creating CAB Files
The Windows CE operating system uses a .CAB file to install an application on a Windows CE-based device. A .CAB file is composed of multiple
files that are compressed into one file. Compressing multiple files into one
file provides the following benefits:
S All application files are present.
S A partial installation is prevented.
S The application can be installed from several sources, such as a desktop
computer or a Web site.
Use the CAB Wizard application (CABWIZ.EXE) to generate a .CAB file
for your application.
Creating Device-Specific CAB Files
Do the following to create a device-specific .CAB file for an application, in
the order provided:
1 Create an .INF file with Windows CE-specific modifications (page
220).
2 Optional Create a SETUP.DLL file to provide custom control of the
installation process (page 232).
3 Use the CAB Wizard to create the .CAB file, using the .INF file, the
optional SETUP.DLL file, and the device-specific application files as
parameters (page 235).
Creating an .INF File
An .INF file specifies information about an application for the CAB Wizard. Below are the sections of an .INF file:
[Version]
This specifies the creator of the file, version, and other relevant information.
Required? Yes
S Signature:
“signature_name”
“$Windows NT$”
S Provider:
“INF_creator”
The company name of the application, such as “Microsoft.”
S CESignature
“$Windows CE$”
Example
[Version]
Signature = “$Windows NT$”
Provider = “Intermec”
CESignature = “$Windows CE$”
220
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
[CEStrings]
This specifies string substitutions for the application name and the default
installation directory.
Required? Yes
S AppName: app_name
Name of the application. Other instances of %AppName% in the .INF
file are replaced with this string value, such as RP32.
S InstallDir: default_install_dir
Default installation directory on the device. Other instances of %InstallDir% in the .INF file are replaced with this string value. Example:
\SDMMC_Disk\%AppName%
Example
[CEStrings]
AppName=“Game Pack”
InstallDir=%CE1%\%AppName%
[Strings]
This section is optional and defines one or more string keys. A string key
represents a string of printable characters.
Required? No
S string_key: value
String consisting of letters, digits, or other printable characters. Enclose
value in double quotation marks ““”” if the corresponding string key is
used in an item that requires double quotation marks. No string_keys is
okay.
Example
[Strings]
reg_path = Software\Intermec\My Test App
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
221
Chapter 7 — Programming
[CEDevice]
Describes the platform for the targeted application. All keys in this section
are optional. If a key is nonexistent or has no data, Windows CE does not
perform any checking with the exception being UnsupportedPlatforms. If
the UnsupportedPlatforms key exists but no data, the previous value is not
overridden.
Required? Yes
S ProcessorType :
processor_type
The value that is returned by SYSTEMINFO.dwProcessorType.For
example, the value for the ARM CPU is 2577
S UnsupportedPlatforms: platform_family_name
This lists known unsupported platform family names. If the name
specified in the [CEDevice.xxx] section is different from that in the
[CEDevice] section, both platform_family_name values are unsupported
for the microprocessor specified by xxx. That is, the list of unsupported
platform family names is appended to the previous list of unsupported
names. Application Manager will not display the application for an
unsupported platform. Also, a user will be warned during the setup
process if the .CAB file is copied to an unsupported device.
Example
[CEDevice]
UnsupportedPlatforms = pltfrm1 ; pltfrm1 is unsupported
[CEDevice.SH3]
UnsupportedPlatforms = ; pltfrm1 is still unsupported
S VersionMin:
minor_version
Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMinor. The
.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of
this device is greater than or equal to VersionMin.
S VersionMax:
major_version
Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMajor. The
.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of
this device is less than or equal to VersionMax.
S BuildMin:
build_number
Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber. The
.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of
this device is greater than or equal to BuildMin.
S BuildMax:
build_number
Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber. The
.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of
this device is less than or equal to BuildMax.
222
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
Example
The following code example shows three [CEDevice] sections: one that
gives basic information for any CPU and two that are specific to the SH3
and the MIPS microprocessors.
[CEDevice]
UnsupportedPlatforms = pltfrm1
; A “template” for all platforms
; Does not support pltfrm1
; The following specifies version 1.0 devices only.
VersionMin = 1.0
VersionMax = 1.0
[CEDevice.ARM]
; Inherits all [CEDevice] settings
; This will create a .CAB file specific to ARM devices.
ProcessorType = 2577
; ARM .cab file is valid for ARM microprocessors.
UnsupportedPlatforms =
; pltfrm1 is still unsupported
; The following overrides the version settings so that no version checking is
performed.
VersionMin =
VersionMax =
[CEDevice.MIPS]
; Inherits all [CEDevice] settings
; This will create a .CAB file specific to “MIPS” devices.
ProcessorType = 4000
; MIPS .CAB file is valid for MIPS
microprocessor.
UnsupportedPlatforms =pltfrm2 ; pltfrm1, pltfrm2 unsupported for MIPs .CAB
file.
Note: To create the two CPU-specific .CAB files for the SETUP.INF file
in the previous example, run the CAB Wizard with the “/cpu arm mips”
parameter.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
223
Chapter 7 — Programming
[DefaultInstall]
This describes the default installation of your application. Note that under
this section, you will list items expanded upon later in this description.
Required? Yes
S Copyfiles:
copyfile_list_section
Maps to files defined later in the .INF file, such as Files.App, Files.Font,
and Files.Bitmaps.
S AddReg:
add_registry_section
Example: RegSettings.All
S CEShortcuts:
shortcut_list_section
String that identifies one more section that defines shortcuts to a file, as
defined in the [CEShortcuts] section.
S CESetupDLL:
setup_DLL
Optimal string that specifies a SETUP.DLL file. It is written by the Independent Software Vendor (ISV) and contains customized functions
for operations during installation and removal of the application. The
file must be specified in the [SourceDisksFiles] section.
S CESelfRegister:
self_reg_DLL_filename
String that identifies files that self-register by exporting the DllRegisterServer and DllUnregisterServer Component Object Model (COM)
functions. Specify these files in the [SourceDiskFiles] section. During
installation, if installation on the device fails to call the file’s exported
DllRegisterServer function, the file’s exported DllUnregisterServer
function will not be called during removal.
Example
[DefaultInstall]
AddReg = RegSettings.All
CEShortcuts = Shortcuts.All
[SourceDiskNames]
This section describes the name and path of the disk on which your application resides.
Required? Yes
S disk_ordinal:
disk_label,,path
1=,“App files” , C:\Appsoft\RP32\...
2=,“Font files”,,C:\RpTools\...
3=,“CE Tools” ,,C:\windows ce tools...
S CESignature:
“$Windows CE$”
Example
[SourceDisksNames]
1 = ,“Common files”,,C:\app\common
[SourceDisksNames.SH3]
2 = ,“SH3 files”,,sh3
[SourceDisksNames.MIPS]
2 = ,“MIPS files”,,mips
224
; Required section
; Using an absolute path
; Using a relative path
; Using a relative path
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
[SourceDiskFiles]
This describes the name and path of the files in which your application
resides.
Required? Yes
S filename:
disk_number[,subdir]
RPM.EXE = 1,c:\appsoft\...
WCESTART.INI = 1
RPMCE212.INI = 1
TAHOMA.TTF = 2
Note: [,subdir] is relative to the location of the INF file.
Example
[SourceDisksFiles]
; Required section
begin.wav = 1
end.wav = 1
sample.hlp = 1
[SourceDisksFiles.SH3]
sample.exe = 2
; Uses the SourceDisksNames.SH3 identification of 2.
[SourceDisksFiles.MIPS]
sample.exe = 2
; Uses the SourceDisksNames.MIPS identification of 2.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
225
Chapter 7 — Programming
[DestinationDirs]
This describes the names and paths of the destination directories for the
application on the target device. Note Windows CE does not support directory identifiers.
Required? Yes
S file_list_section:
0,subdir
String that identifies the destination directory. The following list shows
the string substitutions supported by Windows CE. Use these only for
the beginning of the path. \
%CE1% \Program Files
%CE2% \Windows
%CE3% \My Documents
%CE4% \Windows\Startup
%CE5% \My Documents
%CE6% \Program Files\Accessories
%CE7% \Program Files\Communication
%CE8% \Program Files\Games
%CE9% \Program Files\Pocket Outlook
%CE10% \Program Files\Office
%CE11% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs
%CE12% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Accessories
%CE13% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Communications
%CE14% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Games
%CE15% \Windows\Fonts
%CE16% \Windows\Recent
%CE17% \Windows\Start Menu
%InstallDir%
Contains the path to the target directory selected during installation. It
is declared in the [CEStrings] section
%AppName%
Contains the application name defined in the [CEStrings] section.
Example
[DestinationDirs]
Files.Common = 0,%CE1%\My Subdir
Files.Shared = 0,%CE2%
226
; \Program Files\My Subdir
; \Windows
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
[CopyFiles]
This section, under the [DefaultInstall] section, describes the default files
to copy to the target device. Within the [DefaultInstall] section, files were
listed that must be defined elsewhere in the INF file. This section identifies that mapping and may contain flags.
Required? Yes
S copyfile_list_section:
destination_filename,[source_filename]
The source_filename parameter is optional if it is the same as destination_filename.
S copyfile_list_section:
flags
The numeric value that specifies an action to be done while copying files. The following table shows values supported by Windows CE.
Flag
Value
Description
COPYFLG_WARN_IF_SKIP
0x00000001 Warn user if skipping a file is attempted after error.
COPYFLG_NOSKIP
0x00000002 Do not allow a user to skip copying a file.
COPYFLG_NO_OVERWRITE
0x00000010 Do not overwrite files in destination directory.
COPYFLG_REPLACEONLY
0x00000400 Copy the source file to the destination directory only if the
file is already in the destination directory.
CE_COPYFLG_NO_DATE_DIALOG
0x20000000 Do not copy files if the target file is newer.
CE_COPYFLG_NODATECHECK
0x40000000 Ignore date while overwriting the target file.
CE_COPYFLG_SHARED
0x80000000 Create a reference when a shared DLL is counted.
Example
[DefaultInstall.SH3]
CopyFiles = Files.Common, Files.SH3
[DefaultInstall.MIPS]
CopyFiles = Files.Common, Files.MIPS
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
227
Chapter 7 — Programming
[AddReg]
This section, under the [DefaultInstall] section, is optional and describes
the keys and values that the .CAB file adds to the device registry. Within
the [DefaultInstall] section, a reference may have been made to this
section, such as “AddReg=RegSettings.All”. This section defines the
options for that setting.
Required? No
S add_registry_section: registry_root_string
String that specifies the registry root location. The following list shows
the values supported by Windows CE.
S HKCR
Same as HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT
S HKCU
Same as HKEY_CURRENT_USER
S HKLM
Same as HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
S add_registry_section: value_name
Registry value name. If empty, the “default” registry value name is used.
S add_registry_section: flags
Numeric value that specifies information about the registry key. The
following table shows the values that are supported by Window CE.
Flag
Value
Description
FLG_ADDREG_NOCLOBBER
0x00000002 If the registry key exists, do not overwrite it. Can be used
with any of the other flags in this table.
FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_SZ
0x00000000 REG_SZ registry data type.
FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_MULTI_SZ
0x00010000 REG_MULTI_SZ registry data type. Value field that follows
can be a list of strings separated by commas.
FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_BINARY
0x00000001 REG_BINARY registry data type. Value field that follows
must be a list of numeric values separated by commas, one
byte per field, and must not use the 0x hexadecimal prefix.
FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_DWORD
0x00010001 REG_DWORD data type. The noncompatible format in the
Win32 Setup .INF documentation is supported.
Example
AddReg = RegSettings.All
[RegSettings.All]
HKLM,%reg_path%,,0x00000000,alpha
HKLM,%reg_path%,test,0x00010001,3
HKLM,%reg_path%\new,another,0x00010001,6
228
;  = “alpha”
; Test = 3
; New\another = 6
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
[CEShortCuts]
This section, a Windows CE-specific section under the [DefaultInstall]
section, is optional and describes the shortcuts that the installation application creates on the device. Within the [DefaultInstall] section, a reference
may have been made to this section, such as “ShortCuts.All”. This section
defines the options for that setting.
Required? No
S shortcut_list_section:
shortcut_filename
String that identifies the shortcut name. It does not require the .LNK
extension.
S shortcut_list_section:
shortcut_type_flag
Numeric value. Zero or empty represents a shortcut to a file; any nonzero numeric value represents a shortcut to a folder.
S shortcut_list_section:
target_file_path
String value that specifies the destination location. Use the target file
name for a file, such as MyApp.exe, that must be defined in a file copy
list. For a path, use a file_list_section name defined in the [DestinationDirs] section, such as DefaultDestDir, or the %InstallDir% string.
S shortcut_list_section:
standard_destination_path
Optional string value. A standard %CEx% path or %InstallDir%. If no
value is specified, the shortcut_list_section name of the current section or
the DefaultDestDir value from the [DestinationDirs] section is used.
Example
CEShortcuts = Shortcuts.All
[Shortcuts.All]
Sample App,0,sample.exe
App,0,sample.exe,%InstallDir%
; Uses the path in DestinationDirs. Sample
; The path is explicitly specified.
Sample .INF File
[Version]
; Required section
Signature = “$Windows NT$”
Provider = “Intermec Technologies Corporation”
CESignature = “$Windows CE$”
;[CEDevice]
;ProcessorType =
[DefaultInstall]
; Required section
CopyFiles = Files.App, Files.Fonts, Files.BitMaps, Files.Intl,
Files.TelecomNcsCE, Files.Windows, Files.Import, Files.Export, Files.Work,
Files.Database, Files.WinCE AddReg = RegSettings.All ;CEShortcuts =
Shortcuts.All
[SourceDisksNames] ; Required section
1 = ,“App files” ,,c:\appsoft\...
2 = ,”Font files” ,,c:\WinNT\Fonts
3 = ,”CE Tools” ,,c:\windows ce tools\wce400\700ie\mfc\lib\x86
[SourceDisksFiles] ; Required section
rpm.exe
= 1,C:\Appsoft\program\wce400\WCEX86Rel700
wcestart.ini = 1
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
229
Chapter 7 — Programming
rpmce212.ini = 1
intermec.bmp = 1
rpmlogo.bmp = 1
rpmname.bmp = 1
import.bmp = 1
export.bmp = 1
clock.bmp = 1
printer.bmp = 1
filecopy.bmp = 1
readme.txt = 1
lang_eng.bin = 1
rpmdata.dbd = 1,database\wce1
tahoma.ttf = 2
mfcce212.dll = 3
olece212.dll = 3
olece211.dll = 1,c:\windows ce tools\wce400\NMSD61102.11\mfc\lib\x86
rdm45wce.dll = 1,c:\rptools\rdm45wce\4_50\lib\wce400\wcex86rel
picfmt.dll = 1,c:\rptools\picfmt\1_00\wce400\wcex86rel6110
fmtctrl.dll = 1,c:\rptools\fmtctrl\1_00\wce400\wcex86rel6110
ugrid.dll = 1,c:\rptools\ugrid\1_00\wce400\wcex86rel6110
simple.dll = 1,c:\rptools\pspbm0c\1_00\wce400\wcex86rel
psink.dll = 1,c:\rptools\psink\1_00\wce400\WCEX86RelMinDependency
pslpwce.dll =1,c:\rptools\pslpm0c\1_00\wce400\WCEX86RelMinDependency
npcpport.dll = 1,c:\rptools\cedk\212_03\installable drivers\printer\npcp
;dexcom.dll = 1,c:\rptools\psdxm0c\1_00\x86
ncsce.exe = 1,c:\rptools\ncsce\1_04
nrinet.dll = 1,c:\rptools\ncsce\1_04
[DestinationDirs] ; Required section
;Shortcuts.All = 0,%CE3% ; \Windows\Desktop
Files.App
= 0,%InstallDir%
Files.DataBase
= 0,%InstallDir%\DataBase
Files.BitMaps
= 0,%InstallDir%\Bitmaps
Files.Fonts
= 0,%InstallDir%\Fonts
Files.Intl
= 0,%InstallDir%\Intl
Files.TelecomNcsCE = 0,%InstallDir%\Telecom\NcsCE
Files.Windows
= 0,%InstallDir%\Windows
Files.Import
= 0,%InstallDir%\Import
Files.Export
= 0,%InstallDir%\Export
Files.Work
= 0,%InstallDir%\Work
Files.WinCE
= 0,\storage_card\wince
[CEStrings]
; Required section
AppName = Rp32
InstallDir = \storage_card\%AppName%
[Strings]
; Optional section
;[Shortcuts.All]
;Sample App,0,sample.exe
;Sample App,0,sample.exe,%InstallDir%
; Uses the path in DestinationDirs.
; The path is explicitly specified.
[Files.App]
rpm.exe,,,0
rpm.ini,rpmce212.ini,,0
mfcce212.dll,,,0
olece212.dll,,,0
olece211.dll,,,0
rdm45wce.dll,,,0
picfmt.dll,,,0
230
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
fmtctrl.dll,,,0
ugrid.dll,,,0
simple.dll,,,0
psink.dll,,,0
pslpwce.dll,,,0
npcpport.dll,,,0
;dexcom.dll,,,0
[Files.DataBase]
rpmdata.dbd,,,0
[Files.Fonts]
tahoma.ttf,,,0
[Files.BitMaps]
intermec.bmp,,,0
rpmlogo.bmp,,,0
rpmname.bmp,,,0
import.bmp,,,0
export.bmp,,,0
clock.bmp,,,0
printer.bmp,,,0
filecopy.bmp,,,0
[Files.Intl]
lang_eng.bin,,,0
[Files.TelecomNcsCE]
ncsce.exe,,,0
nrinet.dll,,,0
[Files.Windows]
readme.txt,,,0
[Files.Import]
readme.txt,,,0
[Files.Export]
readme.txt,,,0
[Files.Work]
readme.txt,,,0
[Files.WinCE]
wcestart.ini,,,0
[RegSettings.All]
HKLM,”SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Shell\AutoHide”,,0x00010001,1
; Autohide the taskbar HKLM,”SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Shell\OnTop”,,0x00010001,0
; Shell is not on top
HKLM,”SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Clock”,SHOW_CLOCK,0x00010001,0
; Clock is not on taskbar
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
231
Chapter 7 — Programming
Using Installation Functions in SETUP.DLL
SETUP.DLL is an optional file that enables you to perform custom operations during installation and removal of your application. The following
list shows the functions that are exported by SETUP.DLL.
Install_Init
Called before installation begins. Use this function to check the application version when reinstalling an application and to determine if a dependent application is present.
Install_Exit
Called after installation is complete. Use this function to handle errors that occur during application installation.
Uninstall_Init
Called before the removal process begins. Use this function to close the application, if the application is running.
Uninstall_Exit
Called after the removal process is complete. Use this function to save database information to a
file and delete the database and to tell the user where the user data files are stored and how to reinstall the application.
Note; Use [DefaultInstall] > CESelfRegister (page 224) in the .INF file to
point to SETUP.DLL.
After the CAB File Extraction
Cab files that need to cause a warm reset after cab extraction will need to
create the __RESETMEPLEASE__.TXT file in the “\Windows” directory.
The preferred method to create this file is within the DllMain portion of
the SETUP.DLL file. It looks like this:
#include
#include
#include
#include




// in the public SDK dir
#define IOCTL_TERMINAL_RESET CTL_CODE (FILE_DEVICE_UNKNOWN,FILE_ANY_ACCESS,
2050, METHOD_NEITHER)
BOOL APIENTRY DllMain( HANDLE h, DWORD reason, LPVOID lpReserved )
return TRUE;
} // DllMain
//************************************************************************
// $DOCBEGIN$
// BOOL IsProcessRunning( TCHAR * pname );
//
// Description: Get process table snapshot, look for pname running.
//
// Arguments: pname - pointer to name of program to look for.
// for example, app.exe.
//
// Returns: TRUE - process is running.
//
FALSE - process is not running.
// $DOCEND$
//************************************************************************
BOOL IsProcessRunning( TCHAR * pname )
HANDLE hProcList;
232
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
PROCESSENTRY32 peProcess;
DWORD thDeviceProcessID;
TCHAR lpname[MAX_PATH];
if ( !pname || !*pname ) return FALSE;
_tcscpy( lpname, pname );
_tcslwr( lpname );
hProcList = CreateToolhelp32Snapshot( TH32CS_SNAPPROCESS, 0 );
if ( hProcList == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE ) {
return FALSE;
} // end if
memset( &peProcess, 0, sizeof(peProcess) );
peProcess.dwSize = sizeof(peProcess);
if ( !Process32First( hProcList, &peProcess ) ) {
CloseToolhelp32Snapshot( hProcList );
return FALSE;
} // end if
thDeviceProcessID = 0;
do {
_tcslwr( peProcess.szExeFile );
if ( _tcsstr( peProcess.szExeFile, lpname ) ) {
thDeviceProcessID = peProcess.th32ProcessID;
break;
} // end if
} while ( Process32Next( hProcList, &peProcess ) );
if ( ( GetLastError() == ERROR_NO_MORE_FILES ) && ( thDeviceProcessID == 0
) ) {
CloseToolhelp32Snapshot( hProcList );
return FALSE;
} // end if
CloseToolhelp32Snapshot( hProcList );
return TRUE;
} // IsProcessRunning
codeINSTALL_INIT Install_Init(
HWND hwndParent,
BOOL fFirstCall,
BOOL fPreviouslyInstalled,
LPCTSTR pszInstallDir )
return codeINSTALL_INIT_CONTINUE;
codeINSTALL_EXIT Install_Exit (
HWND hwndParent,
LPCTSTR pszInstallDir,
WORD cFailedDirs,
WORD cFailedFiles,
WORD cFailedRegKeys,
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
233
Chapter 7 — Programming
WORD cFailedRegVals,
WORD cFailedShortcuts )
HANDLE h;
TCHAR srcfile[MAX_PATH];
TCHAR dstfile[MAX_PATH];
if (cFailedDirs || cFailedFiles || cFailedRegKeys ||
cFailedRegVals || cFailedShortcuts)
return codeINSTALL_EXIT_UNINSTALL;
if ( IsProcessRunning( L”autocab.exe” ) )
h = CreateFile( L”\\Windows\\__resetmeplease__.txt”,
(GENERIC_READ | GENERIC_WRITE), 0, NULL, CREATE_ALWAYS,
FILE_ATTRIBUTE_HIDDEN, NULL );
if ( h != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE )
CloseHandle( h );
else
// Couldn’t create the file. If it failed because the file already
exists, it is not fatal.
// Otherwise, notify user of the inability to reset the device and they
will have to
// perform it manually after all of the installations are complete.
} // end if
else
DWORD dret;
h = CreateFile( L”SYI1:”,
(GENERIC_WRITE | GENERIC_READ), 0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING,
FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL );
// Force a warm start NOW.
if ( h != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE )
DeviceIoControl( h, IOCTL_TERMINAL_RESET, NULL, 0, NULL, 0, &dret,
NULL);
// Won’t return, but we’ll show clean up anyway
CloseHandle( h );
else
// Couldn’t access SYSIO. Notify user.
} // end if
} // end if
return codeINSTALL_EXIT_DONE;
codeUNINSTALL_INIT
Uninstall_Init(
HWND hwndParent,
LPCTSTR pszInstallDir ) {
234
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
// TODO: Perform the reverse of INSTALL_INIT here
return codeUNINSTALL_INIT_CONTINUE;
codeUNINSTALL_EXIT
Uninstall_Exit(HWND hwndParent) {
// TODO: Perform the reverse of INSTALL_EXIT here
return codeUNINSTALL_EXIT_DONE;
The system software looks for the following directory structure and files on
the installed media card whether it be an SD card or CF card or embedded
flash file system. No other folders need exist.
\2577\autorun.exe
\2577\autorun.dat
\2577\autocab.exe
\2577\autocab.dat
\cabfiles\*.cab
Creating CAB Files with CAB Wizard
After you create the .INF file and the optional SETUP.DLL file, use the
CAB Wizard to create the .CAB file. The command-line syntax for the
CAB Wizard is as follows:
cabwiz.exe “inf_file” [/dest dest_directory] [/err error_file] [/cpu cpu_type
[cpu_type]]
A batch file, located in  directory, with the following commands, works well:
cabwiz.exe c:\appsoft\\
cd \appsoft\
“inf_file”
The SETUP.INF file path.
dest_directory
The destination directory for the .CAB files. If no directory is specified, the .CAB files are created
in the “inf_file” directory.
error_file
The file name for a log file that contains all warnings and errors that are encountered when the
.CAB files are compiled. If no file name is specified, errors are displayed in message boxes. If a file
name is used, the CAB Wizard runs without the user interface (UI); this is useful for automated
builds.
cpu_type
Creates a .CAB file for each specified microprocessor tag, which is a label used in the Win32 SETUP.INF file to differentiate between different microprocessor types. The /cpu parameter, followed by multiple cpu_type values, must be the last qualifier in the command line.
Example
This example creates .CAB files for the ARM and MIPS microprocessors,
assuming the Win32 SETUP.INF file contains the ARM and MIPS tags:
cabwiz.exe “c:\myfile.inf” /err myfile.err /cpu arm mips
Note: CABWIZ.EXE, MAKECAB.EXE, and CABWIZ.DDF (Windows
CE files available on the Windows CE Toolkit) must be installed in the
same directory on the desktop computer. Call CABWIZ.EXE using its full
path for the CAB Wizard application to run correctly.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
235
Chapter 7 — Programming
Troubleshooting the CAB Wizard
To identify and avoid problems that might occur when using the CAB
Wizard, follow these guidelines:
S Use %% for a percent sign (%) character when using this character in
an .INF file string, as specified in Win32 documentation. This will not
work under the [Strings] section.
S Do not use .INF or .CAB files created for Windows CE to install applications on Windows-based desktop platforms.
S Ensure the MAKECAB.EXE and CABWIZ.DDF files, included with
Windows CE, are in the same directory as CABWIZ.EXE.
S Use the full path to call CABWIZ.EXE.
S Do not create a .CAB file with the MAKECAB.EXE file included with
Windows CE. You must use CABWIZ.EXE, which uses
MAKECAB.EXE to generate the .CAB files for Windows CE.
S Do not set the read-only attribute for .CAB files.
236
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
Customization and Lockdown
Pocket PC (Windows Mobile) is a hardware specification created by
Microsoft Corporation. Devices that wish to carry the Pocket PC logo
must meet the minimum hardware requirements set in the Pocket PC specification. Manufacturers are free to add extra hardware functionality.
Pocket PC devices also use a specialized version of the CE operating system. This OS is built from Windows CE 3.0 but contains customizations,
most notably the lack of a desktop and the addition of the Today Screen.
To carry the Pocket PC logo, all devices must be tested at an Independent
Test Laboratory. The ITL testing is done based on Microsoft requirements. The test lab then reports the findings back to Microsoft Corporation and Intermec Technologies. If the 700 Series Computer passed all
tests, Intermec is allowed to ship the device with the Pocket PC logo. Each
time the operating system is modified, Intermec must resubmit to ITL
testing.
This means we cannot change the operating system much and still be a
Pocket PC device. For example, if we remove Word from the Start menu,
the device would fail ITL testing and we would not be able to ship devices
with the Pocket PC logo.
Although many customers want a Pocket PC device, some customers
would prefer that their users not have access to all of the Pocket PC features. Intermec cannot customize the operating system in any way but a custom application can:
S Delete items from the Start menu, and Programs folder. These items are
just shortcuts in the file system so the application is not really being
deleted. Cold booting the device will bring these items back so the application will need to be run on every cold boot.
S Use the RegFlushKey() API to save a copy of the registry to a storage
device. See the 700 Color Management Tools portion of the Intermec
Developer’s Library CD for more information on how to do this. Saving
a copy of the registry restores most system settings in a cold boot situation.
S Use the SHFullScreen() API in conjunction with other APIs to make
the application take up the entire display and prevent the start menu
from being available.
S Remap keys and disable keys on the keypad.
S Create a custom SIP.
S Make changes to the registry to configure the device.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
237
Chapter 7 — Programming
Should you want your 700 Series Computer to display a full screen, keep
in mind that your computer is Pocket-PC certified by Microsoft Corporation. Check out resources on programming for the Pocket PC, using the
following links. These instructions give full instructions on how to display
full screen.
S Instructions on how to create a full screen application for eVC++ applications using an SHFullScreen() API:
http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q266/2/44.ASP
S Instructions on how to create a full screen application for eVB applications also using the SHFullScreen() API:
http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q265/4/51.ASP
238
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
FTP Server
FTP support is provided through the FTP Server application
FTPDCE.EXE (MS Windows CE Versions) which is provided as part the
base system.
FTPDCE is the Internet File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server process. The
server can be invoked from an application or command line. Besides servicing FTP client requests the FTP Server also send a “network announcement” to notify prospective clients of server availability.
Note: You should consult the RFC959 specification for proper use of
some of these commands at the following URL:
S http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc959.txt for the text version, or
S http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc959/ for an html version
Do the following to send commands:
1 Start an FTP client and connect to the device FTP server.
2 Log in with “intermec” as the user name and “cr52401” for the password.
3 From the FTP client, send the command.
4 Wait for a response.
Synopsis
ftpdce [ options ]
Options
–Aaddr
(where addr is in the form of a.b.c.d) Sets the single target address to which to send the network announcement. Default is broadcast.
–Bbyte
Sets the FTP data block size. Smaller sizes may be useful over slower links. Default is 65536.
–Cname
Sets the device name. Used by Intermec management software.
–Fvalue
Disables the default Intermec account. A value of “0” disables the account. Default is “1”.
Note that disabling the default account without providing a working access control list on the server
will result in a device that will not accept any FTP connections.
–Hsec
Sets the interval between network announcements in seconds.A value of “0” turns the network announcement off. Default is 30 seconds.
–Iaddr
(where addr is in the form of a.b.c.d) Sets the preferred 6920 Communications Server (optional).
–Llog
(where log is either “0” or “1”) Sets the state of logging. Default is 0 (disabled).
–Nsec
Specifies the number of seconds to wait before initially starting FTP server services.
–Pport
Sets the UDP port on which the network announcement will be sent. Default port is 52401.
–Qport
Sets the port on which the FTP Server will listen for connections. Default port is 21.
–Rdir
Sets the FTP mount point to this directory. Default is the root folder of the object store.
–Tscrip
Sets the script name for the 6920 Communications Server to process.
–Uurl
Sets the default URL for this device.
–Z“parms”
Sets extended parameters to be included in the network announcement.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
239
Chapter 7 — Programming
Configurable Parameters Via the Registry Editor
The following parameters receive default values during the installation of
the Intermec FTP Server components. A few of the parameters are visible
in the registry by default, but most must be created in order to modify the
default behavior of the FTP server.
BlockSize
Setting this parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit and
receive Ethernet packets using the specified data block size. By default, the
FTP server transmits and receives data using a 64K data block size. Adjusting this value may be useful in certain wireless TCP/IP installations.
Key
HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP
Value Type
REG_DWORD - data block size, in bytes.
Valid Range
0x100-0x10000 (256-65536 decimal).
Default
65536
DeviceName
This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to include the specified device name in the Intermec Device Network Announcement
(IDNA). Adjusting this value may be useful in assigning a symbolic name
to this device for asset tracking.
Key
HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP
Value Type
REG_SZ
Valid Range
None.
Default
None.
DeviceURL
This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the specified URL in the IDNA. This can be used by Intermec management software for asset management.
240
Key
HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP
Value Type
REG_SZ
Valid Range
None.
Default
None.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
IDNATarget
This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the IDNA
to a specific destination instead of a general UDP broadcast. This parameter is useful on networks that do not allow UDP broadcasts to be routed
between subnets. The use of this parameter will restrict the reception of
the IDNA to the target destination only.
Key
HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP
Value Type
REG_SZ
Valid Range
None.
Default
None.
ManifestName
This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the specified manifest name in the IDNA. This parameter is used by the Intermec
6920 Communications Server for communication transactions. See the
6920 Communications Server documentation for proper use of this parameter.
Key
HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP
Value Type
REG_SZ
Valid Range
None.
Default
iftp.ini
PauseAtStartup
This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to sleep for the specified number of seconds before making the FTP service available on the
device.
Key
HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP
Value Type
REG_DWORD - stored in seconds.
Valid Range
None.
Default
Root
This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to set the root of the
FTP mount point to the specified value. Note that this must map to an existing directory or you will not be able to log into the FTP Server.
Key
HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP
Value Type
REG_SZ
Valid Range
None.
Default
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
241
Chapter 7 — Programming
Transferring Files Over TCP/IP Networks
The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server transfers files over TCP/IP networks. The FTPDCE.EXE program is a version that does not display a
window, but can run in the background.
FTPDCE is the Internet File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server process. The
server can be invoked from an application or command line. Besides servicing FTP client requests, the FTP Server also sends a “network announcement” to notify prospective clients of server availability.
Remarks
The FTP Server currently supports the following FTP requests:
CDUP
Changes to the parent directory of the current working directory.
CWD
Changes working directory.
DELE
Deletes a file.
HELP
Gives help information.
LIST
(This FTP request is the same as the ls -lgA command). Gives list files in a directory.
MKD
Makes a directory.
MODE
(Always Uses Binary). Specifies data transfer mode.
NLST
(Not supported) Gives a name list of files in directory (this FTP request is the same as the ls command).
NOOP
Does nothing.
PASS
Specifies a password.
PWD
Prints the current working directory.
QUIT
Terminates session.
RETR
Retrieves a file.
RMD
Removes a directory.
RNFR
Specifies rename-from file name.
RNTO
Specifies rename-to file name.
STOR
Stores a file.
SYST
Shows the operating system type of server system.
TYPE
(Binary transfers only.) Specifies the data transfer type with the Type parameter.
USER
Specifies user name.
XCUP
(Not Normally Used) Changes the parent directory of the current working directory.
XCWD
(Not Normally Used) Changes the current directory.
XMKD
(Not Normally Used) Creates a directory.
XPWD
(Not Normally Used) Prints the current working directory.
XRMD
(Not Normally Used) Removes a directory.
242
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
SITE
The following extended OEM commands are supported by the SITE request. For Microsoft FTP clients, you can send site commands by preceding the command with “quote” such as “quote site status.”
ATTRIB
Gets or sets the attributes of a given file. (SITE ATTRIB)
Usage
QUOTE SITE ATTRIB [+R | -R] [+A | -A ] [+S | -S] [+H | -H] [[path]
filename]
+ Sets an attribute.
– Clears an attribute.
R Read-only file attribute.
A Archive file attribute.
S System file attribute.
H Hidden file attribute.
To retrieve the attributes of a file, only specify the file. The server response will be:
200-AD SHRCEIX filename
If the flag exists in its position shown above, it is set. Also, in addition to the values
defined above, there is also defined:
C Compressed file attribute.
E Encrypted file attribute.
I INROM file attribute.
X XIP file attribute (execute in ROM, not shadowed in RAM).
BOOT
Reboots the server OS. This will cause the system on which the server is executing to
reboot. The FTP Server will shut down cleanly before reboot. All client connections
will be terminated. Cold boot is default except for the PocketPC build in which the
default is warm boot. (SITE BOOT)
Usage:
COPY
QUOTE SITE BOOT [WARM | COLD]
Copies a file from one location to another. (SITE COPY)
Usage:
QUOTE SITE COPY [source] [destination]
Example: QUOTE SITE COPY ‘\Storage Card\one.dat’ ‘\Storage Card\two.dat’
EXIT
Exits the FTP Server. This command will shut down the FTP Server thus terminating all client connections. (SITE EXIT)
Usage:
HELP
Gives site command help information. (SITE HELP)
Usage:
KILL
QUOTE SITE LOG [open [filename]| close]
Lists the running processes (SITE PLIST)
Usage:
RUN
QUOTE SITE KILL [program | pid]
Opens or closes the program log. (SITE LOG)
Usage:
PLIST
QUOTE SITE HELP [command]
Terminates a running program. (SITE KILL)
Usage:
LOG
QUOTE SITE EXIT
QUOTE SITE PLIST
Starts a program running. If the program to run has spaces in path or filename,
wrapping the name with single quotes is required.
Usage:
QUOTE SITE RUN [program]
Example: QUOTE SITE RUN ‘\Storage Card\app.exe’
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
243
Chapter 7 — Programming
STATUS
Returns the current settings of the FTP Server. MAC, serial number, model, IP address, network announcement information as well as OS memory usage are returned.
(SITE STATUS)
Usage:
TIMEOUT
Toggles idle timeout between 120 to 1200 seconds (2 to 20 minutes). If this timer
expires with no activity between the client and the server, the client connection will
be disconnected. If the optional seconds argument is supplied, the server will set the
connection timeout to the number of seconds specified. Default is 120 seconds or 2
minutes. (SITE TIMEOUT)
Usage:
EKEY
QUOTE SITE EVAL [command]
Gives site command general value information. (SITE HELP)
Usage:
PVAL
QUOTE SITE EKEY [command]
Gives site command electronic value information. (SITE HELP)
Usage:
GVAL
QUOTE SITE TIMEOUT [seconds]
Gives site command electronic key information. (SITE HELP)
Usage:
EVAL
QUOTE SITE STATUS
QUOTE SITE GVAL [command]
Gives site command value information. (SITE HELP)
Usage:
QUOTE SITE PVAL [command]
The remaining FTP requests specified in RFC 959 are recognized, but not
implemented.
The banner returned in the parenthetical portion of its greeting shows the
version number of the FTP Server as well as the MAC address, serial number and OS of the machine hosting the server.
The FTP Server supports browsing from the latest Netscape and Microsoft
web browsers. Drag-and-drop capability is available using this environment.
The FTPDCMDS subdirectory contains commands to use from the web
browser.
S Click EXITME.BIN to execute a SITE EXIT command.
S Click REBOOTME.BIN to execute SITE BOOT command.
S Use the GET command on these files to have the FTP Server execute
these commands.
S Security:
A customer configurable access control list may be installed on the
700 Series Computer. This list will allow customers to restrict access
via the FTP Server to users they wish and is in addition to default
Intermec accounts that are disabled using the -F0 option at runtime.
The access control list is named FTPDCE.TXT and is placed in the
same directory on the 700 Series Computer as the FTPDCE.EXE
server. The FTP Server will encrypt this file to keep the information
safe from unauthorized users. This file is encrypted when the FTP
Server is started so a file that is placed onto the 700 Series Computer
after the FTP Server starts will require a restart of the FTP Server to
take effect.
244
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
The format of the FTPDCE.TXT is as follows:
FTPDCE:user1!passwd1user2!passwd2user3
!passwd3...
Note: The user accounts and passwords are case sensitive.
Once the access control list is encrypted on the 700 Series Computer,
the FTP Server hides this file from users. Once an access control list
is installed on the 700 Series Computer, a new one is not accepted by
the FTP Server until the previous one is removed. Encrypted access
control lists are not portable between 700 Series Computers.
Stopping the FTP Server from Your Application
To allow application programmers the ability to programmatically shut
down the FTP Server, the FTP Server periodically tests to see if a named
event is signaled. The name for this event is “ITC_IFTP_STOP” (no
quotes).
For examples on how to use events, consult the Microsoft Developer Network Library at http://www.msdn.com. The MSDN Library is an essential
resource for developers using Microsoft tools, products, and technologies.
It contains a bounty of technical programming information, including
sample code, documentation, technical articles, and reference guides.
Autostart FTP
This automatically starts the FTP Server (FTPDCE.EXE) when the 700
Series Computer is powered on. This is provided with the NDISTRAY
program (the Network Driver Interface Specification tray application),
which displays the popup menu that currently allows you to load and unload the network drivers. Tap the antenna icon in the System Tray of the
Today screen (a sample antenna icon is circled below) for this pop-up menu.
700 Color and 730 Screens
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
700CXL Screen
245
Chapter 7 — Programming
The default is to start the FTP Server at boot time, unless the following
registry entry is defined and set to “0” which disables AutoFTP. “1” enables the AutoFTP. The entry can be set from the NDISTRAY pop-up
menu by selecting either AutoFTP On or AutoFTP Off.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Intermec\Ndistray\StartupIFTP
These new entries are located below the selections to load the network
drivers. If the StartupIFTP registry key is not defined, the FTP Server is
loaded by default, to provide “out-of-the-box” capability for customers
who want to begin loading files to the 700 Series Computer without any
prior configuration.
Note: If a network driver is unloaded using the NDISTRAY popup menu,
and the FTP Server is running, the FTP Server is stopped.
On a resume, if AutoFTP is enabled and the FTP Server is running, it is
stopped and restarted. NDISTRAY uses a helper application named RESETIFTP to implement the restart on resume feature.
To do an AutoFTP Installation Check:
1 Ensure the FTP Server is running “out-of-the-box” the first time.
2 Tap Start > Today to access the Today screen, then tap the antenna
icon in the System Tray to bring up the NDISTRAY pop-up menu.
Select AutoFTP Off to disable AutoFTP. Do a warm boot and confirm
the FTP Server is not running.
3 Tap Start > Today to access the Today screen, then tap the antenna
icon in the System Tray to bring up the NDISTRAY pop-up menu.
Select AutoFTP On to enable AutoFTP, reboot, confirm it is running.
4 Unload the network driver when the FTP Server is running and confirm that it is not running any more.
5 Load the FTP Server, establish a connection, then suspend and resume.
The server should still run, but the FTP connection to the client should
be dropped.
246
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
Kernel I/O Controls
This describes the KernelIoControl() functions available to application
programmers. Most C++ applications will need to prototype the function
as the following to avoid link and compile errors.
extern “C” BOOL KernelIoControl(DWORD dwIoControlCode, LPVOID lpInBuf, DWORD
nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORD nOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned);
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO
This IOCTL returns either the platform type or the OEMPLATFORM
name based on an input value.
Syntax
BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, LPVOID
lpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORD
nOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );
Parameters
lpInBuf
Points to a DWORD containing either the SPI_GETPLATFORMTYPE or SPI_GETOEMINFO value.
lpInBufSize
Must be set to sizeof(DWORD).
lpOutBuf
Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the return data of the
function. If SPI_GETPLATFORMTYPE is specified in lpInBuf,
then the “PocketPC\0” Unicode string is returned. If SPI_GETOEMINFO is specified in lpInBuf, then the “Intermec 700\0”
Unicode string is returned.
nOutBufSize
The size of lpOutBuf in bytes. Must be large enough to hold the
string returned.
lpBytesReturned
The actual number of bytes returned by the function for the data
requested.
Return Values
Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.
GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
247
Chapter 7 — Programming
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM
Usage
#include “oemioctl.h”
Syntax
BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM,LPVOID
lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD
nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );
Parameters
lpInBuf
Points to this structure. See “ID Field Values” below.
struct PARMS {
BYTE id;
BYTE ClassId;
};
nInBufSize
Must be set to the size of the PARMS structure.
lpOutBuf
Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the return data of the
function. If this field is set to NULL and nOutBufSize is set to zero
when the function is called the function will return the number
bytes required by the buffer.
nOutBufSize
The size of lpOutBuf in bytes.
lpBytesReturned
Number of bytes returned by the function for the data requested.
Return Values
Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.
GetLastError() may be used to get the error value. Either
ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER or
ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER may be returned when this function
is used to get the error.
ID Field Values
The id field of the PARMS structure may be one of the following values:
ID Field Values
ITC_NVPARM_ETHERNET_ID
This IOCTL returns the Ethernet 802.11 MAC Address. Six bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the
lpOutBuffer parameter.
ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL_NUM
This IOCTL returns the serial number of the device in BCD format. Six bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to
by the lpOutBuffer parameter.
ITC_NVPARM_MANF_DATE
This IOCTL returns the device date of manufacture in the BCD YYYY/MM/DD format. Four bytes are returned in
the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.
ITC_NVPARM_SERVICE_DATE
This IOCTL returns the device’s date of last service in BCD YYYY/MM/DD format. Four bytes are returned in the
buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.
248
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
ID Field Values (continued)
ITC_NVPARM_DISPLAY_TYPE
This IOCTL returns the device’s display type. One byte is returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer
parameter.
ITC_NVPARM_EDG_IP
This IOCTL returns the device Ethernet debug IP address. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the
lpOutBuffer parameter.
ITC_NVPARM_EDBG_SUBNET
This IOCTL returns the device Ethernet debug subnet mask. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the
lpOutBuffer parameter.
ITC_NVPARM_ECN
This IOCTL returns ECNs applied to the device in a bit array format. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed
to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.
ITC_NVPARM_CONTRAST
This IOCTL returns the device default contrast setting. Two bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the
lpOutBuffer parameter.
ITC_NVPARM_MCODE
This IOCTL returns the manufacturing configuration code for the device. Sixteen bytes are
returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.
ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER
This IOCTL returns the firmware version for various system components. These values for the ClassId field of the
PARMS structure are allowed when ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER is used in the id field:
S VN_CLASS_KBD Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an ASCII value which
represents the keypad microprocessor version in the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a terminating null
character.
S VN_CLASS_ASIC Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an ASCII value which
represents the version of the FPGA firmware in the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a terminating null
character.
S VN_CLASS_BOOTSTRAP Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an ASCII value
which represents the version of the Bootstrap Loader firmware in the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a
terminating null character.
ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_SOFTWARE_CONTENT
This IOCTL reads the manufacturing flag bits from the non-volatile data store that dictates certain software
parameters. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer that indicates if Intermec
Content is enabled in the XIP regions. TRUE indicates that it is enabled. FALSE indicates that it is not enabled.
ITC_NVPARM_ANTENNA_DIVERSITY
This IOCTL reads the state of the antenna diversity flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed
to by lpOutBuffer that indicates if there is a diversity antenna installed. TRUE indicates that it is installed. FALSE
indicates that it is not installed.
ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RI
This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN ring indicator flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer
pointed to by lpOutBuffer that indicates the polarity of the WAN RI signal. TRUE indicates active high. FALSE
indicates active low.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
249
Chapter 7 — Programming
ID Field Values (continued)
ITC_NVPARM_RTC_RESTORE
This IOCTL reads the state of the real-time clock restore flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer
pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the RTC is restored upon a cold boot. FALSE indicates that the
RTC is not restored.
ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_SW
This IOCTL reads the state of the data collection software enabled flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the
buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer that indicates the data collection software is to install at boot time. FALSE indicates
the data collection software should not install.
ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_HW
This IOCTL reads the data collection hardware flags. A BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer
that indicates the type of data collection hardware installed. The maximum possible value returned is
ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_MAX.
S ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_NONE No scanner hardware is installed.
S ITC_DEVID_OEM2D_IMAGER OEM 2D imager is installed.
S ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC2D_IMAGER Intermec 2D imager is installed.
S ITC_DEVID_SE900_LASER SE900 laser is installed.
S ITC_DEVID_SE900HS_LASER SE900HS laser is installed.
S ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC_EVIO EVIO linear imager is installed.
The high bit indicates whether the S6 scanning engine is installed. The bit mask for this is
ITC_DEVID_S6ENGINE_MASK. A non-zero value indicates that the S6 scanning engine is installed.
ITC_NVPARM_WAN_INSTALLED
This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN radio installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer
pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the WAN radio is installed. FALSE indicates that no WAN radio is
installed.
ITC_NVPARM_WAN_FREQUENCY
This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN radio frequency flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer
pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the WAN radio frequency is United States. FALSE indicates that
the WAN radio frequency is European.
ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RADIOTYPE
This IOCTL reads the WAN radio ID installed by manufacturing. A BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by
lpOutBuffer which indicates the type of WAN radio hardware installed. The maximum possible value returned is
ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_MAX. The current definitions are:
S ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_NONE No WAN radio installed.
S ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIERRA_SB555 CDMA Sierra Wireless radio.
S ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_XIRCOM_GEM3503 GSM/GPRS Intel (Xircom) radio.
S ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIEMENS_MC45 GSM/GPRS Siemens radio.
ITC_NVPARM_80211_INSTALLED
This IOCTL reads the state of the 802.11b radio installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer
pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the 802.11b radio is installed. FALSE indicates that no 802.11b
radio is installed.
ITC_NVPARM_80211_RADIOTYPE
This IOCTL reads the 802.11b radio ID installed by manufacturing. A BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by
lpOutBuffer that indicates the type of 802.11b radio hardware installed. The maximum possible value returned is
ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_MAX. The current definitions are:
S ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_NONE No 802.11b radio installed.
S ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_INTEL_2011B Intel 2011B radio installed.
250
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
ID Field Values (continued)
ITC_NVPARM_BLUETOOTH_INSTALLED
This IOCTL reads the state of the Bluetooth radio installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer
pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the Bluetooth radio is installed. FALSE indicates that no Bluetooth
radio is installed.
ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL2_INSTALLED
This IOCTL reads the state of the serial 2 (COM2) device installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the
buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the serial 2 device is installed. FALSE indicates that no serial
2 device is installed.
ITC_NVPARM_VIBRATE_INSTALLED
This IOCTL reads the state of the vibrate device installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer
pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the vibrate device is installed. FALSE indicates that no vibrate
device is installed.
ITC_NVPARM_LAN9000_INSTALLED
This IOCTL reads the state of the Ethernet device installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer
pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the Ethernet device is installed. FALSE indicates that no Ethernet
device is installed.
ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_HW_INSTALLED
This IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection hardware installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned
in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection hardware is installed. FALSE
indicates that no SIM card protection hardware is installed.
ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_SW_INSTALLED
This IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection software installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned
in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection software is installed. FALSE
indicates that no SIM card protection software is installed.
ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_SW_INSTALLED
This IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection software installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned
in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection software is installed. FALSE
indicates that no SIM card protection software is installed.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
251
Chapter 7 — Programming
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM
Describes and enables the registry save location.
Usage
#include “oemioctl.h”
Syntax
BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM,LPVOID
lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORD
nOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );
Parameters
lpInBuf
A single byte that may be one of the id values. See “ID Field Values”
on the next page.
nInBufSize
Must be set to the size of the lpInBuf in bytes.
lpOutBuf
Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the data to be written
to the non-volatile data store.
nOutBufSize
The size of lpOutBuf in bytes.
lpBytesReturned
The number of bytes returned by the function.
Return Values
Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.
GetLastError() may be used to get the error value. Either
ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER or
ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER may be returned when this function
is used to get the error.
252
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
ID Field Values
The id field of lpInBuf may be one of the following values:
ID Field Values
ITC_REGISTRY_SAVE_ENABLE
This function enables or disables the save registry to non-volatile media feature of the RegFlushKey() function.
lpOutBuf must be set to zero (FALSE) if the feature is to be disabled or one (TRUE) if the feature is to be enabled.
ITC_ DOCK_SWITCH
This IOCTL sets a position of the dock switch. The dock switch may be set to either “modem” or “serial” positions.
lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of either DOCK_MODEM or DOCK_SERIAL as
defined in OEMIOCTL.H; the value specifies the position the switch is to be set. The call appears as follows:
// port = DOCK_MODEM or DOCK_SERIAL as defined in oemioctl.h
BOOL SetDockSwitch( BYTE port)
DWORD cmd = ITC_DOCK_SWITCH;
DWORD cbRet;
return KernelIoControl(IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM,&cmd, sizeof(cmd),
&port,sizeof(port),&cbRet)
ITC_ WAKEUP_MASK
This IOCTL sets a bit mask that represents the mask for the five programmable wakeup keys. The I/O key is not a
programmable wakeup key. By default it is always the system resume key and all other keys are set to disable key
wakeup. A zero in a bit position masks the wakeup for that key. A one in a bit position enables wakeup for that key.
lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of a wakeup mask consisting of the OR’ed constants as
defined in OEMIOCTL.H. Only the following keys are programmable as wakeup events.
#define SCANNER_TRIGGER 1
#define SCANNER_LEFT
#define SCANNER_RIGHT
#define GOLD_A1
#define GOLD_A2
0x10
ITC_AMBIENT_KEYBOARD (does not apply to the 730 Computer)
This IOCTL sets the threshold for the keypad ambient sensor. This can be a value from 0 (always off) to 255 (always
on). lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of the desired setting.
ITC_AMBIENT_FRONTLIGHT (does not apply to the 730 Computer)
This IOCTL sets the threshold for the frontlight ambient sensor. This can be a value from 0 (always off) to 255.
lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of the desired setting.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
253
Chapter 7 — Programming
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID
This IOCTL returns the device ID. There are two types of device IDs
supported, which are differentiated based on the size of the output buffer.
The UUID is returned if the buffer size is set to
sizeof(UNIQUE_DEVICEID), otherwise the oldstyle device ID is returned.
Usage
#include “pkfuncs.h”
#include “deviceid.h”
Syntax
BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID,LPVOID
lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD
nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );
Parameters
lpInBuf
Should be set to NULL. STRICT_ID settings are not supported.
lpInBufSize
Should be set to zero.
lpOutBuf
Must point to a UNIQUE_DEVICEID structure as defined by
DEVICEID.H if the UUID is to be returned
nOutBufSize
The size of the UNIQUE_DEVICEID in bytes if the UUID is to
be returned. A DEVICE_ID as defined by PKFUNCS.H is returned if the size in bytes is greater than or equal to sizeof(DEVICE_ID).
lpBytesReturned
The number of bytes returned by the function.
Return Values
Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.
GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.
254
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO
Returns the HAL version information of the Pocket PC image.
Usage
#include “oemioctl.h”
Syntax
BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO,LPVOID
lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD
nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );
Parameters
lpInBuf
Should be set to NULL.
lpInBufSize
Should be set to zero.
lpOutBuf
Must point to a VERSIONINFO structure as defined by
OEMIOCTL.H. The fields should have these values:
S cboemverinfo
sizeof (tagOemVerInfo);
S verinfover
S sig;
“ITC\0”
S id;
‘N’
S tgtcustomer
“”
S tgtplat
SeaRay
S tgtplatversion Current build version number
S tgtcputype[8]; “Intel\0”
S tgtcpu
“PXA255\0”;
S tgtcoreversion “”
S date
Build time
S time
Build date
nOutBufSize
The size of VERSIONINFO in bytes.
lpBytesReturned
Returns sizeof(PVERSIONINFO).
Return Values
Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.
GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
255
Chapter 7 — Programming
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO
Returns the HAL version information of the Pocket PC image.
Usage
#include “oemioctl.h”
Syntax
BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO,LPVOID
lpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD
nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );
Parameters
lpInBuf
Should be set to NULL.
nInBufSize
Should be set to zero.
lpOutBuf
Must point to a VERSIONINFO structure as defined by
OEMIOCTL.H. The fields should have these values:
S cboemverinfo
Sizeof (tagOemVerInfo);
S verinfover
S sig;
“ITC\0”
S id;
‘B’
S tgtcustomer
“”
S tgtplat
SeaRay
S tgtplatversion Current build version number of the
bootstrap loader
S tgtcputype[8]; “Intel\0”;
S tgtcpu
“PXA255\0”
S tgtcoreversion “”
S date
Build time
S time
Build date
nOutBufSize
The size of VERSIONINFO in bytes.
lpBytesReturned
The number of bytes returned to lpOutBuf.
Return Values
Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.
GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.
256
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT
Causes the system to perform a warm-boot. The object store is retained.
Usage
#include “oemioctl.h”
Syntax
BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT,LPVOID
lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD
nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );
Parameters
lpInBuf
Should be set to NULL.
lpInBufSize
Should be set to zero.
lpOutBuf
Should be NULL.
nOutBufSize
Should be zero.
Return Values
None.
IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT
Causes the system to perform a cold-boot. The object store is cleared.
Usage
#include “oemioctl.h”
Syntax
BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT,LPVOID
lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD
nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );
Parameters
lpInBuf
Should be set to NULL.
lpInBufSize
Should be set to zero.
lpOutBuf
Should be NULL.
nOutBufSize
Should be zero.
Return Values
None.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
257
Chapter 7 — Programming
IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO
This IOCTL code allows software to check the type of the most recent
reset.
Usage
#include “oemioctl.h”
Syntax
BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO,LPVOID
lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD
nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );
Parameters
lpInBuf
Should be set to NULL.
lpInBufSize
Should be set to zero.
lpOutBuf
Must point to a HAL_RESET_INFO structure. See sample below.
nOutBufSize
The size of HAL_RESET_INFO in bytes.
lpBytesReturned
The number of bytes returned by the function.
Return Values
Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.
GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.
Sample
typedef struct {
DWORD ResetReason;
DWORD ObjectStoreState;
} HAL_RESET_INFO, * PHAL_RESET_INFO;
// most recent reset type
// state of object store
// Reset reason types
#define HAL_RESET_TYPE_UNKNOWN
#define HAL_RESET_REASON_HARDWARE
#define HAL_RESET_REASON_SOFTWARE
#define HAL_RESET_REASON_WATCHDOG
#define HAL_RESET_BATT_FAULT
#define HAL_RESET_VDD_FAULT
16
// Object store state flags
#define HAL_OBJECT_STORE_STATE_UNKNOWN
#define HAL_OBJECT_STORE_STATE_CLEAR
258
// cold
// suspend
// power fail
// warm boot
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE
This IOCTL code allows software to check which device CE booted from.
Usage
#include “oemioctl.h”
Syntax
BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE,LPVOID
lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD
nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );
Parameters
lpInBuf
Should be set to NULL.
lpInBufSize
Should be set to zero.
lpOutBuf
Must point to a buffer large enough to hold a DWORD (4 bytes)
that contains the boot device. The following boot devices are supported:
#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_UNKNOWN
#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_ROM_XIP
#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_ROM
#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_PCMCIA_ATA
#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_PCMCIA_LINEAR 4
#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_IDE_ATA
#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_IDE_ATAPI
nOutBufSize
The size of lpOutBuf in bytes (4).
lpBytesReturned
The number of bytes returned by the function.
Return Values
Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.
GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
259
Chapter 7 — Programming
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT
Causes the system to perform a warm-boot. The object store is retained.
Usage
#include “oemioctl.h”
Syntax
BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT,LPVOID
lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD
nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );
Parameters
lpInBuf
Should be set to NULL.
lpInBufSize
Should be set to zero.
lpOutBuf
Should be NULL.
nOutBufSize
Should be zero.
Return Values
None.
260
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION
Returns processor information.
Usage
#include “pkfuncs.h”
Syntax
BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION,LPVOID
lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD
nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );
Parameters
lpInBuf
Should be set to NULL.
nInBufSize
Should be set to zero.
lpOutBuf
Should be a pointer to the PROCESSOR_INFO structure. The
PROCESSOR_INFO structure stores information that describes
the CPU more descriptively.
typedef __PROCESSOR_INFO {
WORD
wVersion;
WCHAR szProcessorCore[40];
WORD
wCoreRevision;
WCHAR szProcessorName[40];
WORD
wProcessorRevision;
WCAHR szCatalogNumber[100];
WCHAR szVendor[100];
DWORD dwInstructionSet;
DWORD dwClockSpeed;
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//
Set to value 1
“ARM\0”
“PXA255\0”
“Intel Corporation\0”
400
nOutBufSize
Should be set to sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO) in bytes.
lpBytesReturned
Returns sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO);
Return Values
Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.
GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
261
Chapter 7 — Programming
IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID
Returns Xscale processor ID.
Usage
#include “oemioctl.h”
Syntax
BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID,LPVOID lpInBuf,
DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD
lpBytesReturned );
Parameters
lpInBuf
Should point to a CPUIdInfo structure defined in OEMIOCTL.H.
lpInBufSize
Should be sizeof(CPUIdInfo).
lpOutBuf
Should be NULL.
nOutBufSize
Should be set to 0.
lpBytesReturned
Returns sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO);
Return Values
Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.
GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.
262
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
Network Selection APIs
The Network Selection APIs change the network adapter configuration
programmatically. Both drivers support the same IOCTL function numbers for loading and unloading the drivers.
Loading and unloading of the 802.11b driver is performed by the FWL1:
device in the system by performing DeviceIOControl() calls to the driver.
Loading and unloading of the driver for the built-in Ethernet adapter is
performed by the SYI1: device in the system by performing
DeviceIOControl() calls to the driver.
S For loading an NDIS driver associated with an adapter, the IOCTL is
IOCTL_LOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT.
S For unloading NDIS drivers associated with an adapter the IOCTL is
IOCTL_UNLOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT.
Example
#include 
#include “sysio.h”
void DoLoad(int nDevice) {
LPTSTR devs[] = { _T(“SYI1:”), _T(“FWL1:”) };
HANDLE hLoaderDev;
DWORD bytesReturned;
hLoaderDev = CreateFile(devs[nDevice], GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0,
NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, 0, NULL);
if (hLoaderDev != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) {
if (!DeviceIoControl( hLoaderDev, IOCTL_LOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, NULL, -1, NULL, 0,
&bytesReturned, NULL)){
MessageBox(NULL, TEXT(“SYSIO IoControl Failed”), TEXT(“Network
loader”),MB_ICONHAND);
if (hLoaderDev!=INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);
hLoaderDev = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; // bad handle
}else {
CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);
void DoUnload(int nDevice) {
LPTSTR devs[] = { _T(“SYI1:”), _T(“FWL1:”) };
HANDLE hLoaderDev;
DWORD bytesReturned;
hLoaderDev = CreateFile(devs[nDevice], GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0,
NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, 0, NULL);
if (hLoaderDev != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) {
if (!DeviceIoControl( hLoaderDev, IOCTL_UNLOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, NULL, -1, NULL, 0,
&bytesReturned, NULL)){
MessageBox(NULL, TEXT(“SYSIO IoControl Failed”),TEXT(“Network
loader”),MB_ICONHAND);
if (hLoaderDev!=INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);
hLoaderDev = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; // bad handle
}else {
CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
263
Chapter 7 — Programming
The API provided by Intermec Technologies exposes a limited set of routines that allows a programmer to access and affect the 802.11b network
interface card from within their application. The routines provided also
reads/writes values to the CE registry that pertain to the 802.11b radio
driver. By using the provided functions, a programmer can alter the
802.11b parameters of Network Name (SSID), WEP keys, infrastructure
modes, radio channel, and power management modes. A programmer can
also retrieve network connect status and signal strength indication from
the RF network card.
The API is contained within the 80211API.DLL file that should be present in any load with the 802.11b networking installed.
NETWLAN.DLL
PRISMNDS.DLL
This file is the 802.11b driver. It is present in all 700 CE loads that use the 802.11b network
interface card.
80211API.DLL
This file is an Intermec authored file that provides the programmer with a set of API calls to
configure or monitor status of the 802.11b network.
MOD80211.DLL
The CORE module for the 802.11b NIC. It provides the 802.11b status information displayed when the CORE application is running.
80211CONF.EXE
This is the “Control Panel” for configuring the 802.11b network parameters. Note that it is an
EXE file and is actually called by CPL802.CPL (see below). It is also called by the CORE application when the “Configuration” button is pressed.
CPL802.CPL
A control panel application that does nothing but call 80211CONF.EXE.
80211SCAN.EXE
Internally manages the Scan List activity.
802PM.DLL
This handles profile management for radio configurable values.
URODDSVC.EXE This handles radio configuration and security authentication based on a selected profile.
The Profile Manager supports up to four radio configuration profiles.
These profiles are the same as those set by the Wireless Network control
panel applet that runs on the Windows CE unit. You can configure
different 802.11b profiles and switch between them using the 802.11 API.
See the ConfigureProfile() function on page 280 for more information.
264
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
Basic Connect/Disconnect Functions
Below are functions available for the 700 Series Color Computer when
enabled with the 802.11b radio module.
RadioConnect()
Connects to the available radio. Use this function if you plan on using a
lot of API calls that talk directly to the radio. Note that the 802.11b radio
must be enabled via NDISTRAY before you can connect to it.
Syntax
UINT RadioConnect( );
Parameters
None.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwise
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED
Remarks
Call this function before you call any other function found within
this API. It hunts out and connects to the 802.11b radio available on
the system. Check extended error codes if it returns anything else for
information.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_RadioConnect)();
#else
UINT RadioConnect();
#endif
RadioDisconnect()
Call this function when done using the 802.11 API to clean up a
connection from a previous RadioConnect() call. If you do not call this
function, you may leave memory allocated.
Syntax
UINT RadioDisconnect( );
Parameters
None.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwise
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_RadioDisconnect)();
#else
UINT RadioDisconnect();
#endif
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
265
Chapter 7 — Programming
RadioDisassociate()
Call this function to have the 802.11b radio disassociate from the current
service set. The radio then enters an “off” mode until it is woken again by
setting the Service Set Identifier (SSID). Also, the NDIS driver generates
an NDIS media disconnect event.
Syntax
UINT RadioDisassociate( );
Parameters
None.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwise
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_RadioDisassociate)();
#else
UINT RadioDisassociate();
#endif
Query Information Functions
GetAssociationStatus()
Call this function to obtain the radio’s current association status with a
service set.
Syntax
UINT GetAssociationStatus( ULONG & );
Parameters
NDIS_RADIO_ASSOCIATED
Indicates the radio is associated with an access point
NDIS_RADIO_SCANNING
Indicates the radio is looking for an access point with which
to associate
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
Data is only valid if the function returns ERROR_SUCCESS. Also, if ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated by one of the parameters listed above.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetAssociationStatus)(ULONG &);
#else
UINT GetAssociationStatus(ULONG &);
#endif
266
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
GetAuthenticationMode()
Call this function to obtain the radio’s current authentication mode.
Syntax
UINT GetAuthenticationMode( ULONG & );
Parameters
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_OPEN
802.11b Open Authentication. Indicates that
the radio is using an open system.
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_SHARED
802.11b Shared Authentication. Indicates
that the radio is using a shared key.
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_AUTO
Auto switch between Open/Shared. Indicates
automatic detection is used when available.
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_ERROR
Defined as error value. Indicates the authentication mode was not determined at this
time or is unknown.
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA
WPA Authentication
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_PSK
WPA Preshared Key Authentication
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_NONE
WPA None
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
Data is only valid if ERROR_SUCCESS is returned. Also, if ERROR_SUCCESS is returned,
your USHORT reference is populated with one of the parameters listed above.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetAuthenticationMode)(ULONG &);
#else
UINT GetAuthenticationMode(ULONG &);
#endif
GetBSSID()
Call this function to get the current MAC address (BSSID) of the service
set. In ESS mode, this is the MAC address of the access point the radio is
associated with. In IBSS mode, this is a randomly generated MAC address,
and serves as the ID for the IBSS.
Syntax
UINT GetBSSID( TCHAR * );
Parameters
Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the current BSSID after a successful call.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your TCHAR array is populated with the BSSID of the current service set: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetBSSID)(TCHAR *);
#else
UINT GetBSSID(TCHAR *);
#endif
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
267
Chapter 7 — Programming
GetDiversity()
Call this function to get the current diversity setting of your 802.11b radio. This uses an optional NDIS5.1 OID to query the radio, of which a
large number of 802.11b devices do not support. This may be inaccurate.
Syntax
UINT GetDiversity(USHORT *);
Parameters
ANT_PRIMARY
The primary antenna is selected.
ANT_SECONDARY
The secondary antenna is selected.
ANT_DIVERSITY
The radio is in diversity mode, and uses both antennas
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your USHORT reference is populated with one of the parameters listed above.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetDiversity)(USHORT *);
#else
UINT GetDiversity(USHORT *);
#endif
GetLinkSpeed()
Call this function to get the current link speed of the 802.11b radio.
Syntax
UINT GetLinkSpeed( int & );
Parameters
This function accepts an int reference, and your int is populated with the current link speed, in
Mbps, rounded to the nearest whole integer, for example: 1, 2, 5, 11, etc.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
Data returned is valid if ERROR_SUCCESS is returned.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetLinkSpeed)(int &);
#else
UINT GetLinkSpeed(int &);
#endif
268
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
GetMac()
Call this function to get the MAC address of the 802.11b radio.
Syntax
UINT GetMac( TCHAR * );
Parameters
Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the MAC address after a successful call.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your TCHAR array is populated with the formatted MAC
address of the adapter, as follows: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetMac)(TCHAR *);
#else
UINT GetMac(TCHAR *);
#endif
Note: Be sure to call RadioConnect() before calling this function for this
function to work properly.
GetNetworkMode()
Call this function to get the current Network Mode (SSID) for the
802.11b radio.
Syntax
UINT GetNetworkMode( ULONG & );
Parameters
NDIS_NET_MODE_IBSS
802.11 Ad-Hoc Mode.
NDIS_NET_MODE_ESS
802.11 Infrastructure Mode.
NDIS_NET_MODE_UNKNOWN
Anything Else/Unknown Error
NDIS_NET_AUTO_UNKNOWN
Automatic Selection. Use of this option is not supported or
recommended.
NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_5G
5 Gigahertz 54 Mbps
NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_2_4G
802.11g 2.4 Gigahertz
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of the parameters listed above.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetNetworkMode)(ULONG &);
#else
UINT GetNetworkMode(ULONG &);
#endif
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
269
Chapter 7 — Programming
GetNetworkType()
Call this function to get the current network type of the radio. Do not
confuse this with GetNetworkMode().
Syntax
UINT GetNetworkType( ULONG & );
Parameters
NDIS_NET_TYPE_FH
Indicates this is a frequency hopping radio.
NDIS_NET_TYPE_DS
Indicates that this is a direct sequence radio.
NDIS_NET_TYPE_UNDEFINED
Indicates this radio type is unknown or undefined.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of the parameters listed above.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetNetworkType)(ULONG &);
#else
UINT GetNetworkType(ULONG &);
#endif
GetSSID()
Call this function to get the desired SSID of the 802.11b radio.
Syntax
UINT GetSSID( TCHAR * );
Parameters
Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the current SSID when successful.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your TCHAR array is populated with the desired SSID.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetSSID)(TCHAR *);
#else
UINT GetSSID(TCHAR *);
#endif
Note: Call RadioConnect() before this function for this function to work
properly.
270
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
GetPowerMode()
Call this function to get the current power savings mode of the radio.
Syntax
UINT GetPowerMode( ULONG & );
Parameters
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAM
Continuous Access Mode (ie: always on).
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_PSP
Power Saving Mode.
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKNOWN
Unknown power mode.
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_AUTO
Auto. (Available for 730 Mobile Computers)
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_FAST_PSP
Fast PSP, good savings, fast
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of the parameters listed above.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetPowerMode)(ULONG &);
#else
UINT GetPowerMode(ULONG &);
#endif
Note: Do not use Automatic Switching mode at this time.
GetRSSI()
Call this function to get the current RSSI (Radio Signal Strength Indicator), in Dbm.
Syntax
UINT GetRSSI( ULONG & );
Parameters
References a ULONG that is populated with the current RSSI after a successful call.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference contains the RSSI. Valid RSSI range
is from –100 Dbm to –30 Dbm.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetRSSI)(ULONG &);
#else
UINT GetRSSI(ULONG &);
#endif
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
271
Chapter 7 — Programming
GetTXPower()
Call this function to get the current transmit power of the radio.
Syntax
UINT GetTXPower( ULONG & );
Parameters
NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_63
63 mW
NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_30
30 mW
NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_15
15 mW
NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_5
5 mW
NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_1
1 mW
NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_UNKNOWN
Unknown Value or Error.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with the TX power in
milliwatts (mW). Valid ranges are from 5 mW to 100 mW.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetTXPower)(ULONG &);
#else
UINT GetTXPower(ULONG &);
#endif
272
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
GetWepStatus()
Call this function to get the current state of the radio’s WEP and encryption levels.
Syntax
UINT GetWepStatus( ULONG & );
Parameters
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_ENABLED
WEP is enabled; TKIP and AES are not enabled,
and a transmit key may or may not be available.
(same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ENABLED)
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_DISABLED
Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP are
disabled, and a transmit key is available. (Same as
NDIS_RADIO_WEP_DISABLED)
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_NOT_SUPPORTED Indicates encryption (WEP, TKIP, AES) is not
supported. (Same as
NDIS_RADIO_WEP_NOT_SUPPORTED)
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_KEY_ABSENT
Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP are
disabled, and a transmit key is not available.
(Same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ABSENT)
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_ENABLED
Indicates that TKIP and WEP are enabled; AES
is not enabled, and a transmit key is available.
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_KEY_ABSENT
Indicates that there are no transmit keys available
for use by TKIP or WEP, TKIP and WEP are
enabled; and AES is not enabled.
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_ENABLED
Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP are enabled,
and a transmit key is available.
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_KEY_ABSENT
Indicates that there are no transmit keys available
for use by AES, TKIP, or WEP, and AES, TKIP,
and WEP are enabled.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of the
parameters listed above.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetWepStatus)(ULONG &);
#else
UINT GetWepStatus(ULONG &);
#endif
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
273
Chapter 7 — Programming
GetRadioIpAddress()
Call this function to obtain a formatted string indicating whether DHCP
is enabled, and what is the current adapters IP address.
Syntax
UINT GetRadioIpAddress( TCHAR * );
Parameters
Pointer to a character array that contains the formatted string of the IP address and static/DHCP
information.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your TCHAR array contains a string formatted as follows:
IP: DHCP Enabled\nxxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\n or
IP: DHCP Disabled\nxxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\n
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetRadioIpAddress)(TCHAR *);
#else
UINT GetRadioIpAddress(TCHAR *);
#endif
GetCCXStatus()
Call this function to get information about the current CCX status of the
adapter.
Syntax
UINT GetCCXStatus( ULONG & );
Parameters
NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_OFF
Disable EAP mode.
NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_ON
Enable EAP mode.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of parameters
listed above.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetCCXStatus)(ULONG &);
#else
UINT GetCCXStatus(ULONG &);
#endif
274
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
Set Information Functions
AddWep()
Call this function to add a WEP key to the radio. Call this function multiple times when adding more than one WEP key. Save the “default” key for
last. For example, when adding four keys, and the second key is the default
transmit key, add keys 1, 3 and 4 before you add key 2.
Note: Add the default transmit key last.
Syntax
UINT AddWep( ULONG, BOOL, TCHAR * );
Parameters
ULONG
Specifies the key index to be set. Valid values are 0–3.
BOOL
When set to TRUE, specifies that this key is the default transmit key.
TCHAR
Pointer to a character array that specifies the key data in either HEX (length of
10 or 26) or ASCII (length of 5 or 13). This string must be null-terminated.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
When adding WEP keys to the radio, turn off encryption before you add the keys, then turn encryption back on afterwards. Also, be sure to add the TRANSMIT KEY last.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_AddWep)(ULONG, BOOL, TCHAR *);
#else
UINT AddWep(ULONG, BOOL, TCHAR *);
#endif
EnableWep()
Enables or disables WEP encryption on the radio (TRUE/FALSE).
Syntax
UINT EnableWep( BOOL );
Parameters
Set BOOL to TRUE to enable WEP encryption, or FALSE to disable WEP encryption.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
Call this function with TRUE as the parameter to enable WEP encryption. Call this function with
the FALSE parameter to disable WEP encryption. This call is an alias for EncryptionStatus(). See
the following:
EnableWEP(TRUE) = EncryptionStatus(NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_ENABLED)
EnableWEP(FALSE) = EncryptionStatus(NDIS_ENCRYPTION_DISABLED)
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_EnableWep)(BOOL);
#else
UINT EnableWep(BOOL);
#endif
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
275
Chapter 7 — Programming
EncryptionStatus()
Call this function to set the desired encryption status.
Syntax
UINT EncryptionStatus( UINT mode );
Parameters
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_ENABLED
WEP is enabled; TKIP and AES are not
enabled, and a transmit key may or may not be
available. (same as
NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ENABLED)
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_DISABLED
Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP are
disabled, and a transmit key is available. (Same
as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_DISABLED)
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_NOT_SUPPORTED
Indicates that encryption (WEP, TKIP, and
AES) is not supported. (Same as
NDIS_RADIO_WEP_NOT_SUPPORTED)
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_KEY_ABSENT
Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP are
disabled, and a transmit key is not available.
(Same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ABSENT)
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_ENABLED
Indicates that TKIP and WEP are enabled; AES
is not enabled, and a transmit key is available.
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_KEY_ABSENT
Indicates that there are no transmit keys
available for use by TKIP or WEP, TKIP and
WEP are enabled; and AES is not enabled.
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_ENABLED
Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP are
enabled, and a transmit key is available.
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_KEY_ABSENT
Indicates that there are no transmit keys
available for use by AES, TKIP, or WEP, and
AES, TKIP, and WEP are enabled.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_EncryptionStatus)(UINT mode);
#else
UINT EncryptionStatus(UINT mode);
#endif
276
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
SetAuthenticationMode()
Call this function to set the desired authentication mode.
Syntax
UINT SetAuthenticationMode( ULONG );
Parameters
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_OPEN
802.11b Open Authentication. Indicates that
the radio is using an open system.
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_SHARED
802.11b Shared Authentication. Indicates that
the radio is using a shared key.
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_AUTO
Auto switch between Open/Shared. Indicates
automatic detection is used when available.
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_ERROR
Defined as error value. Indicates the authentication mode was not determined at this time
or is unknown.
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA
WPA Authentication
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_PSK
WPA Preshared Key Authentication
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_NONE WPA None
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_SetAuthenticationMode)(ULONG);
#else
UINT SetAuthenticationMode(ULONG);
#endif
SetChannel()
This function is currently not implemented. Ad-hoc networks automatically select a channel or use the already existing channel.
Syntax
UINT SetChannel( USHORT );
Parameters
USHORT value that should populate with the desired channel (1–14).
Return Values
None.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_SetChannel)(USHORT);
#else
UINT SetChannel(USHORT);
#endif
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
277
Chapter 7 — Programming
SetNetworkMode()
Call this function to set the desired Network Mode.
Syntax
UINT SetNetworkMode( ULONG );
Parameters
NDIS_NET_MODE_IBSS
802.11 Ad-Hoc Mode.
NDIS_NET_MODE_ESS
802.11 Infrastructure Mode.
NDIS_NET_MODE_UNKNOWN
Anything Else/Unknown Error
NDIS_NET_AUTO_UNKNOWN
Automatic Selection. Use of this option is not supported or
recommended.
NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_5G
5 Gigahertz 54 Mbps
NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_2_4G
802.11g 2.4 Gigahertz
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_SetNetworkMode)(ULONG);
#else
UINT SetNetworkMode(ULONG);
#endif
SetPowerMode()
Call this function to set the desired power mode.
Syntax
UINT SetPowerMode( ULONG mode );
Parameters
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAM
Continuous Access Mode (ie: always on).
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_PSP
Power Saving Mode.
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKNOWN
Unknown power mode.
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_AUTO
Auto. (Available for 730 Computers)
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_FAST_PSP
Fast PSP, good savings, fast
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_SetPowerMode)(ULONG mode);
#else
UINT SetPowerMode(ULONG mode);
#endif
278
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
SetSSID()
Call this function with a pointer to a null-terminated TCHAR array containing the desired SSID to set the desired SSID of the adapter.
Syntax
UINT SetSSID( TCHAR * );
Parameters
Pointer to a character array that contains the desired SSID. This should be null-terminated.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
If an “ANY” network is desired, pass in _T(“ANY”).
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_SetSSID)(TCHAR *);
#else
UINT SetSSID(TCHAR *);
#endif
SetCCXStatus()
Call this function to set the desired CCX / Network EAP status.
Syntax
UINT SetCCXStatus( ULONG );
Parameters
NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_OFF
Disable Network EAP / CCX
NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_ON
Enable Network EAP / CCX
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_SetCCXStatus)(ULONG);
#else
UINT SetCCXStatus(ULONG);
#endif
SetMixedCellMode()
Call this function to set the desired mixed cell mode.
Syntax
UINT SetMixedCellMode( ULONG );
Parameters
NDIS_MIXED_CELL_OFF
Disable Mixed Cell
NDIS_MIXED_CELL_ON
Enable Mixed Cell
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_SetMixedCellMode)(ULONG);
#else
UINT SetMixedCellMode(ULONG);
#endif
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
279
Chapter 7 — Programming
RemoveWep()
Call this function with a key index of 0–3 to remove the WEP key at that
index.
Syntax
UINT RemoveWep( ULONG );
Parameters
ULONG value that specifies the key index to set. Valid values are 0–3.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
On disassociation with all BSSIDs of the current service set, WEP key is removed by the adapter.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_RemoveWEP)(ULONG);
#else
UINT RemoveWEP(ULONG);
#endif
Helper Functions
ConfigureProfile()
If using the Intermec 802.11b Profile Management system, you can program the API to configure the radio to a specific profile by passing the
profile name.
Syntax
UINT ConfigureProfile( TCHAR * );
Parameters
Pointer to a character array that contains the profile name. This should be null-terminated.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or
ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.
Remarks
Call this function with a pointer to a null-terminated TCHAR array that contains the name of the
profile you wish to configure. This function reads profile data from the profile manager, sets that
profile as the default active profile, and configures the radio appropriately.
If needed, the supplicant and any other related services are automatically started and stopped.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_ConfigureProfile)(TCHAR *);
#else
UINT ConfigureProfile(TCHAR *);
#endif
280
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
EnableZeroConfig()
This enables or disables the Wireless Zero Configuration Wizard from
Microsoft. After calling this function, a warm-boot is required for the
change to take effect.
Note: Enabling this function effectively disables all the SET commands in
this API.
Syntax
UINT EnableZeroConfig( USHORT );
Parameters
TRUE
Enable Wireless Zero Config
FALSE
Disable Wireless Zero Config
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_ZERO_CONFIG_CHANGE_FAILED when the
query failed.
Remarks
Call this function to set the desired Zero Config status.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_EnableZeroConfig)(USHORT);
#else
UINT EnableZeroConfig(USHORT);
#endif
isZeroConfigEnabled()
Call this function to determine whether Zero Config is currently enabled.
Syntax
UINT isZeroConfigEnabled( );
Parameters
None.
Return Values
TRUE if ZeroConfig is enabled, and FALSE if it is disabled.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_isZeroConfigEnabled)();
#else
UINT isZeroConfigEnabled();
#endif
isOrinoco()
Call this function to determine whether the current radio is an
ORiNOCO, Lucent, or WaveLAN radio.
Syntax
UINT isOrinoco( );
Parameters
None.
Return Values
TRUE if this is an ORiNOCO radio, and FALSE if it is not.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_isOrinoco)();
#else
UINT isOrinoco();
#endif
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
281
Chapter 7 — Programming
isSupplicantRunning()
Call this function to determine whether the security supplicant is running.
Syntax
UINT isSupplicantRunning( );
Parameters
None.
Return Values
TRUE if the security supplicant is running, FALSE if it is not running.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_isSupplicantRunning)();
#else
UINT isSupplicantRunning();
#endif
StartScanList()
If a scan list is configured on the system, this causes the API to begin the
process of scanning for an available network. This call can take quite a
while to process (depending upon the length of the scan list and how long it
takes to find a valid network), you may wish to call it from a separate
thread.
Syntax
UINT StartScanList( );
Parameters
None.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.
Remarks
Call this function to start the scan list functionality of the system.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_StartScanList)();
#else
UINT StartScanList();
#endif
StartSupplicant()
Call this function to start the supplicant service if it is installed on the system.
Syntax
UINT StartSupplicant( );
Parameters
None.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_StartSupplicant)();
#else
UINT StartSupplicant();
#endif
282
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
StopSupplicant()
Call this function to stop the supplicant service.
Syntax
UINT StopSupplicant( );
Parameters
None.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_StopSupplicant)();
#else
UINT StopSupplicant();
#endif
isDHCPEnabled()
Call this function to determine whether DHCP is enabled on the current
adapter.
Syntax
UINT isDHCPEnabled( );
Parameters
None.
Return Values
TRUE if DHCP is enabled, FALSE if it is not.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_isDHCPEnabled)();
#else
UINT isDHCPEnabled();
#endif
RenewDHCP()
Call this function to force a DHCP renewal on the current network adapter.
Syntax
UINT RenewDHCP( );
Parameters
None.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.
Remarks
You should not have to call this function on Microsoft PocketPC 2003 or Microsoft Windows CE
4.2 .NET and later devices.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_RenewDHCP)();
#else
UINT RenewDHCP();
#endif
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
283
Chapter 7 — Programming
GetCurrentDriverName()
Call this function to populate the TCHAR array with the driver name.
Syntax
UINT GetCurrentDriverName( TCHAR * );
Parameters
Pointer to a TCHAR array which contains the name of the driver when successful.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.
Remarks
This function is called with a pointer to a TCHAR array that is large enough to hold the name of
the driver PLUS the null terminator.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_GetCurrentDriverName)(TCHAR *);
#else
UINT GetCurrentDriverName(TCHAR *);
#endif
ResetRadioToSystemSave()
Call this function to force the radio to reset to the last desired active profile.
Syntax
UINT ResetRadioToSystemSave( );
Parameters
None.
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_ResetRadioToSystemSave)();
#else
UINT ResetRadioToSystemSave();
#endif
EnableSuppLogging()
Call this function to set the desired supplicant logging mode.
Syntax
UINT EnableSuppLogging( ULONG );
Parameters
NDIS_SUPP_LOGGING_ON
Supplicant Logging Enabled
NDIS_SUPP_LOGGING_OFF
Supplicant Logging Disabled
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.
Remarks
None.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_EnableSuppLogging)(ULONG);
#else
UINT EnableSuppLogging(ULONG);
#endif
284
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
SwitchPacketDriver()
Call this function to switch between available packet drivers on the system.
Syntax
UINT SwitchPacketDriver( USHORT );
Parameters
INTERMEC_PACKET_DRIVER
Intermec Packet Driver (ZNICZIO)
NDISUIO_PACKET_DRIVER
Microsoft Packet Driver (NDISUIO)
Return Values
ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.
Remarks
After switching to a new packet driver, perform a warm boot for changes to take effect.
Definitions
#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING
typedef UINT (*PFN_SwitchPacketDriver)(USHORT);
#else
UINT SwitchPacketDriver(USHORT);
#endif
Deprecated Functions
The following functions are deprecated. While these are not removed from
the API, these are no longer supported. Their parameters are no longer
applicable and the return value for all of these functions is:
ERR_FUNCTION_DEPRECATED
Function
Syntax
GetRTSThreshold(Deprecated)
UINT GetRTSThreshold( USHORT & );
GetMedia(Deprecated)
UINT GetMedia( ULONG & );
GetMedium(Deprecated)
UINT GetMedium( ULONG & );
GetNicStats(Deprecated)
UINT GetNicStats( NDIS_802_11_STATISTICS & );
SetRTSThreshold(Deprecated)
UINT SetRTSThreshold( USHORT & );
SetTXRate(Deprecated)
UINT SetTXRate( UCHAR );
EncryptWepKeyForRegistry(Deprecated) UINT EncryptWepKeyForRegistry( TCHAR * szDest,
TCHAR * szSource );
SetDiversity(Deprecicated)
UINT SetDiversity( USHORT );
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
285
Chapter 7 — Programming
Notifications
Use the following information to programmatically control the vibrator, to
write an application to turn on the vibrator when a message is received via
the WLAN radio link, and turn it off when the user hits a key.
Vibrator support is implemented in the NLED driver as a false LED. The
vibrator is LED 5 and is identified with an CycleAdjust of –1. The vibrate
option is only available in the notifications panel when the vibrator is present in the system.
Regarding an applications interface to NLED.DLL, LEDs must be available for use by applications. This is possible via two functions exported by
the COREDLL.DLL file. To use the LED functions, declare these as extern ”C” as follows:
extern ”C” BOOL WINAPI NLEDGetDeviceInfo(UINT nInfoId,
void *pOutput);
extern ”C” BOOL WINAPI NLEDSetDevice( UINT nDeviceId, void
*pInput);
The LEDs are enumerated for access through the data structures associated
with these APIs:
286
S Notification LED
S Radio On LED
1 (does not apply to the 730 Computer)
S Alpha Lock LED
S Scanner LED
S Low Battery
S Vibrator
5 (does not apply to the 730 Computer)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
NLEDGetDeviceInfo
Usage
#include “nled.h”
Syntax
BOOL NLEDGetDeviceInfo ( UINT nInfoId, void *pOutput );
Parameters
nInfoId
pOutput
Integer specifying the information to return. These values are defined:
NLED_COUNT_INFO
Indicates the pOutput buffer specifies the number of LEDs on
the device.
NLED_SUPPORTS_INFO_ID
Indicates the pOutput buffer specifies information about the
capabilities supported by the LED.
NLED_SETTINGS_INFO_ID
Indicates the pOutput buffer contains information about the
LED current settings.
Pointer to the buffer to which the information is returned. The buffer points to various structure
types defined in “nled.h”, depending on the value of nId, as detailed in the following table:
Value of nID
Structure in pOutput
LED_COUNT_INFO
NLED_COUNT_INFO
NLED_SUPPORTS_INFO
NLED_SUPPORTS_INFO
NLED_SETTINGS_INFO
NLED_SETTINGS_INFO
NLEDSetDevice
Usage
#include “nled.h”
Syntax
BOOL NLEDSetDevice ( UINT nDeviceId, void *pInput );
Parameters
nDeviceId
Integer specifying the device identification. The following is defined:
NLED_SETTINGS_INFO_ID
pInput
Contains information about the desired LED settings.
Pointer to the buffer that contains the NLED_SETTINGS_INFO structure.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
287
Chapter 7 — Programming
Reboot Functions
There are several methods, via Kernel I/O Control functions, that an application program can use to force the 700 Series Computer to reboot.
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT performs a warm-boot. See page 260.
IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT
Invoking the KernelIOControl function with
IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT forces a cold reboot. This resets the 700
Series Computer and reloads Windows CE as if a power-up had been
performed. The contents of the Windows CE RAM-based object store are
discarded. See page 257.
IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT
This function is supported on the 700 Series Computers. It performs a
warm boot of the system, preserving the object store. See page 257.
288
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
Remapping the Keypad
Note; Use caution when remapping the keypad. Improper remapping may
render the keypad unusable. Data within the 700 Series Computer could
also be lost, should any problems occur.
Applications have the ability to remap keys on the 700 Color Numeric
Keypad and 700 Color Alphanumeric Keypad. This will allow applications
to enable keys that would otherwise not be available, such as the [F1]
function key. Also, to disable keys that should not be available, such as the
alpha key because no alpha entry is required. Care should be exercised
when attempting to remap the keypad because improper remapping may
cause the keypad to become unusable. This can be corrected by cold booting the device which will cause the default keymap to be loaded again.
Note that remapping the keys in this way affects the key mapping for the
entire system, not just for the application that does the remapping.
There are three “planes” supported for the 700 Color Numeric Keypad
and Alphanumeric Keypad. Keys that are to be used in more than one shift
plane must be described in each plane.
Unshifted Plane
The unshifted plane contains values from the keypad when not pressed
with other keys, such as the following:
Press the Keys
Numeric Keypad
Alphanumeric Keypad
To Enter This
Gold Plane
The gold plane contains values from the keypad when a key is simultaneously pressed with the [Gold] b key on the numeric keypad or the
[Gold/White] c key on the alphanumeric keypad, such as the following:
Press the Keys
Numeric Keypad
Alphanumeric Keypad
To Enter This
[Gold] b 1
[Gold/White] c e
Send
[Gold] b 5
[Gold/White] c C
A3
[Gold] b 9
[Gold/White] c P
PgDn
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
289
Chapter 7 — Programming
Alpha (Blue) Plane
The alpha plane contains values from the keypad when the keypad has
been placed in alpha mode by pressing the blue alpha key, such as the following:
Press the Keys
Numeric Keypad
Alphanumeric Keypad To Enter This
[Alpha] F 1
[Alpha] d g
Caps
[Alpha] F 5
[Alpha] d J
[Alpha] F 9
[Alpha] d W
Key Values
Key values for each plane are stored in the registry. All units ship with a
default key mapping already loaded in the registry. Applications that wish
to change the default mapping need to read the appropriate key from the
registry into an array of Words, modify the values required and then write
the updated values back into the registry. The registry access can be done
with standard Microsoft API calls, such as RegOpenKeyEx(),
RegQueryValueEx(), and RegSetValueEx().
Numeric Keypad
For the 700 Color Numeric Keypad, the following registry keys contain
the plane mappings:
S The unshifted plane mapping can be found in the registry at:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\Vkey
S The gold plane mapping can be found in the registry at:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\VkeyGold
S The alpha plane mapping can be found in the registry at:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\VkeyAlpha
Alphanumeric Keypad
For the 700 Color Alphanumeric Keypad, the following registry keys contain the plane mappings:
S The unshifted plane mapping can be found in the registry at:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\ALPHA\Vkey
S The gold plane mapping can be found in the registry at:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\ALPHA\VkeyGold
S The alpha plane mapping can be found in the registry at:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\ALPHA\VkeyAlpha
290
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
How Key Values Are Stored in Registry
To know which fields to update in the registry, you must know what Scan
Codes are assigned to each physical key (see the “Keypad Scan Codes and
Meanings” table on the next page). The Scan Code is used at the lowest
level of the system to let the keypad driver know which physical key has
been pressed. The keypad driver takes that scan code and looks it up in a
table (a copy of the one stored in the registry) to determine which values
to pass on to the operating system.
Each registry key is just an array that describes to the keypad driver what
value needs to be passed for each physical key. The key values are indexed
by the scan code, this is a zero-based index. For example in the unshifted
plane, the [4] key has a scan code of 0x06. This means that the seventh
word under the “Vkey” registry key will have the value for the [4] key.
Taking a sample of the “Vkey” registry key shows the following values:
00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,. . .
The value is 34,00. The values are in reverse byte order because that is the
way the processor handles data. When writing an application, nothing
needs to be done to swap the bytes, as this will happen automatically when
the data is read into a byte value. This is something you just need to be
aware of this when looking at the registry. Knowing this, we can see that
the value that the keypad driver will pass to the system is a hex 34. Looking that up on an UNICODE character chart, we see that it maps to a “4”.
If you wanted the key, labeled “4”, to output the letter “A” instead, you
would need to change the seventh word to “41” (the hexadecimal representation of “A” from the UNICODE chart), then put the key back into
the registry.
Note: Do not remap scan codes 0x01, 0x41, 0x42, 0x43, 0x44. Remapping these scan codes could render your 700 Series Computer unusable
until a cold-boot is performed.
If you wish to disable a certain key, remap its scan code to 0x00.
Change Notification
Just changing the registry keys will not immediately change the key
mappings. To notify the keypad driver that the registry has been updated,
signal the “ITC_KEYBOARD_CHANGE” named event using the
CreateEvent() API.
Advanced Keypad Remapping
It is also possible to map multiple key presses to one button and to map
named system events to a button. The multiple key press option could be
useful to cut down on the number of keys needed to press in a given situation or to remap which key behaves like the action key. Mapping events to
a button could be useful to change which buttons will fire the scanner,
control volume, and allow for suspending and resuming the device. If you
need help performing one of these advanced topics please contact Intermec
Technical Support.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
291
Chapter 7 — Programming
Scan Codes
At the lowest driver level, the 700 Color Numeric Keypad and the 700
Color Alphanumeric Keypad identifies keys as scan codes. These scan
codes are sent via the keypad microcontroller, and cannot be changed
without modifying the keypad firmware.
Numeric Keypad
The following scan codes pertain to the 700 Color Numeric keypad:
Numeric Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings
Press this Key
Meaning
ScanCode
Reserved
0x00
I/O button
0x01
Scanner Handle Trigger
0x02
Scanner Left
0x03
Scanner Right
0x04
4/GHI/A2
0x06
None
0x07
Left arrow/Back Tab
0x08
None
0x09
BkSp// (forward slash)
0x0A
[Gold] key
0x0B
None
0x0C
Esc/– (minus sign)
0x0D
Down arrow/Volume decrease
0x0E
1/Caps/Send
0x0F
7/PQRS/PgUp
0x10
[Alpha] key
0x11
None
0x12
Up arrow/Volume increase
0x13
Right arrow/Tab
0x14
2/ABC/End
0x15
8/TUV/* (asterisk)
0x16
0/Win
0x17
5/JKL/A3
0x18
None
0x19
Action/+ (plus symbol)
0x1A
3/DEF/backlight
0x1B
9/WXYZ/PgDn
0x1C
292
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
Numeric Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings (continued)
Press this Key
Meaning
ScanCode
Enter/@ (at symbol)
0x1D
6/MNO/A4
0x1E
None
0x1F–0x40
Charge Detect
0x41
LCD frontlight
0x42
Ambient light
0x42
Threshold crossed
0x42
Headset detected
0x43
Keypad Backlight
0x44
Ambient Light
0x44
Threshold Crossed
0x44
Alphanumeric Keypad
The following scan codes pertain to the 700 Color Alphanumeric keypad:
Alphanumeric Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings
Press this Key
Meaning
ScanCode
Reserved
0x00
I/O button
0x01
Scanner Handle Trigger
0x02
Scanner Left
0x03
Scanner Right
0x04
A/A1 key
0x05
B/A2 key
0x06
Escape/Send
0x07
Left arrow/Back Tab
0x08
Up arrow/Volume increase
0x09
Down arrow/Volume decrease
0x0A
Right arrow/Tab
0x0B
Action/End
0x0C
E/Win
0x0D
F/= (equal sign)
0x0E
G/* (asterisk)
0x0F
C/A3
0x10
H// (forward slash)
0x11
D/A4
0x12
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
293
Chapter 7 — Programming
Alphanumeric Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings (continued)
Press this Key
Meaning
ScanCode
J/PgUp
0x13
K/@ (as symbol)
0x14
L/– (minus sign)
0x15
M/1
0x16
N/2
0x17
I/backlight
0x18
P/PgDn
0x19
Q/, (comma)
0x1A
R/+ (plus sign)
0x1B
S/4
0x1C
T/5
0x1D
O/3
0x1E
Caps/Lock
0x1F
BkSp
0x20
V/. (period)
0x21
W/7
0x22
X/8
0x23
U/6
0x24
Gold/White
0x25
NumLock
0x26
Space
0x27
Z/0
0x28
Enter
0x29
Y/9
0x2A
None
0x2B–0x40
Charge Detect
0x41
LCD frontlight
0x42
Ambient light
0x42
Threshold crossed
0x42
Headset detected
0x43
Keypad Backlight
0x44
Ambient Light
0x44
Threshold Crossed
0x44
294
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Chapter 7 — Programming
Sample View of Registry Keys
The following is a sample view of the current default key mapping for the
700 Color Numeric Keypad. See the registry on your device for the latest
key mappings.
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD]
”ResumeMask”=dword:7
”Vkey”=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,\
25,00,00,00,08,00,03,02,00,00,1B,00,28,00,31,00,\
37,00,01,02,00,00,26,00,27,00,32,00,38,00,30,00,\
35,00,00,00,01,03,33,00,39,00,0D,00,36,00,00,00,\
00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\
00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\
00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\
00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\
00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05
”VkeyGold”=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,\
09,01,00,00,BF,00,03,02,00,00,BD,00,75,00,72,00,\
21,00,01,02,00,00,76,00,09,00,73,00,38,01,5B,00,\
35,00,00,00,BB,01,09,05,22,00,32,01,36,00,00,00,\
00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\
00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\
00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\
00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\
00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05
”VkeyAlpha”=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,47,00,00,00,\
25,00,00,00,08,00,03,02,00,00,1B,00,28,00,02,02,\
50,00,01,02,00,00,26,00,27,00,41,00,54,00,20,00,\
4A,00,00,00,01,03,44,00,57,00,0D,00,4D,00,00,00,\
00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\
00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\
00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\
00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\
00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
295
Chapter 7 — Programming
296
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
A
Configurable Settings
This appendix contains information about the Data Collection, Intermec
Settings, SNMP, Unit Information, Utilities, and Wireless Network control panel applets that may be on the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer.
SNMP, Intermec Settings, and Data Collection settings that can appear
under Settings are dependent on what hardware configuration is done for
each 700 Series Computer at the time of shipment. These settings will currently only appear if a scanner or an imager option is present.
Likewise, other control panel applets that are specifically related to the
802.11b radio module will appear when a 802.11b radio module is
installed in a 700 Series Computer. Control panel applets that are specific
for Wireless Printing, CDMA/1xRTT, and GSM/GPRS radio modules
will only appear when each respective hardware configuration is done on
the 700 Series Computer. See Chapter 4, “Network Support,” for more information about the radio modules or the wireless printing.
Information about using reader commands and configuration bar codes to
configure some of your settings is also in this appendix.
Note: Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec
Settings control panel applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual (P/N: 073529). The online manual is available
from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
297
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Configuration Parameters
A configuration parameter changes the way the 700 Series Color Mobile
Computer operates, such as configuring a parameter to have the 700 Series
Computer emit a very loud beep in a noisy environment. Use any of the
following methods to execute configuration parameters:
S Change Data Collection and SNMP parameters via control panel applets later in this appendix.
S Send parameters from an SNMP management station. See “SNMP Configuration on the 700 Series Computer” starting on page 191.
S Scan EasySet bar codes. You can use the EasySet bar code creation software from Intermec Technologies Corporation to print configuration
labels. Scan the labels to change the scanner configuration and data
transfer settings.
Changing a Parameter Setting
Menus of available parameters for each group are listed. Use the scroll bars
to go through the list. Expand each menu (+) to view its parameter settings. Tap a parameter to select, or expand a parameter (+) to view its subparameters.
Note that each parameter or subparameter is shown with its default setting
or current setting in (< >) brackets. Tap a parameter or subparameter to
select that parameter, then do any of the following to change its setting:
Tap Apply to apply any changes. Note that these illustrations are from a
Symbologies parameter.
S Typing a new value in an entry field.
S Choosing a new value from the drop-down list.
S Selecting a different option. The selected option contains a bullet.
S Tap Defaults, then Apply to restore factory-default settings. Tap Yes
when you are prompted to verify this action.
298
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
S Tap Refresh to discard changes and start again. Tap Yes when you are
prompted to verify this action.
About Configuration Parameters
You can find this information about each configuration parameter:
S Name and Purpose:
Describes the parameter and its function.
S Action:
Describes what to do with a parameter once that parameter is selected.
S SNMP OID:
Lists the SNMP OID for the parameter.
S Syntax or Options:
Syntax lists the two-character code for the parameter, if the parameter is
configurable by scanning a bar code or by sending parameters through a
network. Both Syntax and Options list acceptable values for the parameter.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
299
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Data Collection Control Panel Applet
Note: This applet is not available in units with PSM Build 3.00 or newer.
To determine your PSM Build version, tap Start > Programs >
File Explorer > the PSMinfo text file.
If your unit has PSM Build 3.00 or newer, then you may have the Intermec
Settings control panel applet in place of the Data Collection applet.
Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec
Settings applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command Reference
Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at
www.intermec.com.
See “Scanner Control and Data Transfer” in the Intermec Windows CE/
Pocket PC Software Developer’s Kit (SDK) User’s Manual shipped with the
Software Developer’s Kit (SDK) for information about data collection
functions. Note that icons are shown to the left.
To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > Data Collection to access its control panel applet.
Use the left and right arrows to scroll through the tabs along the bottom of
the control panel applet, then tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs represent the following groups of settings or parameters:
S Symbologies (starting on page 301)
S Symbology Options (starting on page 322)
S Beeper/LED (starting on page 330)
S Imager (starting on page 336)
S Virtual Wedge (starting on page 341)
300
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Symbologies
You can change bar code symbology parameter settings in your 700 Series
Computer via the Data Collection control panel applet. The following
parameters are for bar code symbologies. Additional information about the
more common bar code symbologies are in Appendix B, “Bar Codes.” Note
that these parameters are listed in the order of their appearance within this tab.
Most of these symbologies apply to both the imager and the laser scanner
tools. However, when using an imager, the Macro PDF (page 312), Micro
PDF417 (page 314), Matrix 2 of 5 (page 316), Telepen (page 317), and
Code 11 (page 318) symbologies are not supported. Likewise, when using
a laser scanner, the QR Code (page 319), Data Matrix (page 320), and
MaxiCode (page 321) symbologies are not supported.
Note: The 730 Computer uses the EV10 APS linear imager which supports 1D symbologies.
The following table shows which bar code symbologies are supported by
an imager, a laser scanner, or the EV10 APS Linear Imager
Bar Code Symbology
Imager
EV10 APS
Laser Scanner Linear Imager
Code 39
Interleaved 2 of 5
Standard 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
Code 128
Code 93
Codabar
MSI
Plessey
UPC
EAN/EAN 128
Micro PDF417
Telepen
Code 11
PDF417
Data Matrix
QR Code
MaxiCode
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
301
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Code 39
Code 39 is a discrete, self-checking, variable length symbology. The character set is uppercase A–Z, 0–9, dollar sign ($), period (.), slash (/), percent (%), space ( ), plus (+), and minus (-).
Action
Tap (+) to expand the Code 39 parameter, select the setting to be
changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from
the drop-down list.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.3.1
Options
Decoding
Not active
Active (default)
Format
Standard 43 characters (default)
Full ASCII
Start/Stop
Not transmitted (default)
Transmitted
Start/Stop characters
(Not supported when using an imager)
$ (dollar sign) only
* (asterisk) only (default)
$ and * (dollar sign and asterisk)
Check digit
Not used (default)
Mod 43 transmitted
Mod 43 not transmitted
French CIP transmitted
French CIP not transmitted
Italian CPI transmitted
Italian CPI not transmitted
Bar code length
Any length (default)
Minimum length
Minimum length
001–254
Minimum length 1–254 (default is 6)
Note: If Bar code length = “1” then Minimum length is entered.
302
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Standard 2 of 5
Standard 2 of 5 is a discrete and self-checking symbology that uses the bars
to encode information and the spaces to separate the individual bars.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the Standard 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to be
changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from
the drop-down list.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.4.1
Options
Decoding
Not active (default)
Active
Format
Identicon, 6 start/stop bars (default)
Computer Identics, 4 start/stop bars
Check digit
Not used (default)
Mod 10 transmitted
Mod 10 not transmitted
Bar code length
Any length
Minimum length (default)
Fixed lengths
Minimum length
001–254
Minimum length 1–254 (default is 6)
Fixed length 1
000–254
Fixed bar code length 0–254 (default is 0)
Fixed length 2
000–254
Fixed bar code length 0–254 (default is 0)
Fixed length 3
000–254
Fixed bar code length 0–254 (default is 0)
Note: If Bar code length = “1” then Minimum length is entered. If Bar
code length = “2” then Fixed length 1, Fixed length 2, or Fixed length 3
is entered.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
303
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Codabar
Codabar is a self-checking, discrete symbology.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the Codabar parameter, select a setting to be changed,
then select an option from the drop-down list to change this setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.5.1
Options
Decoding
Not active (default)
Active
Start/Stop
Not transmitted (default)
abcd transmitted
ABCD transmitted
abcd/tn*e transmitted
DC1–DC4 transmitted
CLSI library system
(Not supported when using an imager)
Not active (default)
Active
Check digit
Not used (default)
Transmitted
Not transmitted
Bar code length
Any length
Minimum length (default)
Fixed lengths
Minimum length
003–254
Minimum length 3–254 (default is 6)
Fixed length 1
000–254
Fixed bar code length 0–254 (default is 0)
Fixed length 2
000–254
Fixed bar code length 0–254 (default is 0)
Fixed length 3
000–254
Fixed bar code length 0–254 (default is 0)
Note: If Bar code length = “1” then Minimum length is entered. If Bar
code length = “2” then Fixed length 1, Fixed length 2, or Fixed length 3
is entered.
304
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
UPC/EAN
UPC/EAN are fixed-length, numeric, continuous symbologies that use
four element widths.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the UPC/EAN parameter, select the setting to be
changed, then select an option to change this setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.6.1
Options
UPC A
Not Active
Active (default)
UPC E
Not Active
Active (default)
EAN 8
Not Active
Active (default)
EAN 13
Not Active
Active (default)
Add-on digits
Not required (default)
Required
Add-on 2 digits
Not active (default)
Active
Add-on 5 digits
(Not supported when using an imager)
Not active (default)
Active
UPC A check digit
Not transmitted
Transmitted (default)
UPC E check digit
Not transmitted
Transmitted (default)
EAN 8 check digit
Not transmitted
Transmitted (default)
EAN 13 check digit
Not transmitted
Transmitted (default)
UPC A number system
Not transmitted
Transmitted (default)
UPC E number system
Not transmitted
Transmitted (default)
UPC A re-encoding
UPC A transmitted as UPC A
UPC A transmitted as EAN 13 (default)
UPC E re-encoding
UPC E transmitted as UPC E (default)
UPC E transmitted as UPC A
EAN 8 re-encoding
EAN 8 transmitted as EAN 8 (default)
EAN 8 transmitted as EAN 13
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
305
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Code 93
Code 93 is a variable length, continuous symbology that uses four element
widths.
Action
Tap the Code 93 parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting. Tap (+) to access the Code 93 Lengths parameter.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.7.1
Options
Not active (default)
Active
Code 93 Length
Sets the Code 93 bar code length.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the Code 93 parameter, then tap (+) to expand the
Code 93 Lengths parameter. Tap the setting to be changed, then tap an
option to change this setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.19.1
Options
Bar code length
Any length
Minimum length (default)
Minimum length
001–254
Minimum length 1–254 (default is 6)
Note: If Bar code length = “1” then Minimum length is entered.
306
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Code 128
Code 128 is a variable-length, continuous, high-density, alphanumeric
symbology that uses multiple element widths and supports the extended
ASCII character set.
Action
Tap the Code 128 parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.9.1
Options
Not active (default)
Active
This illustration is from a 700 Series Computer using a laser scanner.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
307
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Code 128 Options
Set the following for the Code 128 parameter. Note that the EAN 128 ]C1
and CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical options are not available when you use
an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the Code 128 Options parameter, select a setting, then
select an option to change this setting.
SNMP OID
None.
Options
EAN 128 ]C1 Identifier
(Not supported when using an
imager)
Remove (default)
Include
CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical
(Not supported when using an
imager)
Not active (default)
Active
Bar code length
Any length (default)
Minimum length
Minimum length
001–254
Minimum length 1–254 (default is 6)
This illustration is from a 700 Series Computer using a laser scanner.
308
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Code 128 FNC1 Character
The Code 128 FNC1 character (EAN 128 norms) can be any ASCII character and is used as a separator when multiple identifiers and their fields
are concatenated. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with
your 700 Series Computer.
Non-printable ASCII characters can be entered using the following syntax
where HH is the hexadecimal value of the character.
\xHH
For example, the GS character, whose hexadecimal value is 1D, would be
entered as \x1D. In addition,the following characters have their own
identifiers:
S BEL
\a
S BS
\b
S FF
\f
S LF
\n
S CR
\r
S HT
\t
S VT
\v
Action
Tap (+) to expand the Code 128 parameter, then type the ASCII characters to be set for the Code 128 FNC1 character parameter.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.21.1
Options
Any ASCII character (default is the GS function character — ID hex)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
309
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Plessey
Plessey is a pulse-width modulated symbology like most other bar codes. It
includes a start character, data characters, an eight-bit cyclic check digit,
and a termination bar. The code is continuous and not self-checking. You
need to configure two parameters for Plessey code: Start Code and Check
Digit. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700
Series Computer.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the Plessey parameter, select the setting to be changed,
then select an option to change this setting or select an option from the
drop-down list.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.10.1
Options
Decoding
Not active (default)
Active
Check digit
Not transmitted (default)
Transmitted
Bar code length
Any length
Minimum length (default)
Minimum length
001–254
Minimum length 1–254 (default is 6)
Note: If Bar code length = “1” then Minimum length is entered.
310
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
MSI
MSI is a symbology similar to Plessey code (page 310) that includes a start
pattern, data characters, one or two check digits, and a stop pattern. Note
that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the MSI parameter, select the setting to be changed,
then select an option to change this setting or select an option from the
drop-down list.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.15.1
Options
Decoding
Not active (default)
Active
Check digit
Mod 10 transmitted (default)
Mod 10 not transmitted
Double Mod 10 transmitted
Double Mod 10 not transmitted
Bar code length
Any length
Minimum length (default)
Minimum length
001–254
Minimum length 1–254 (default is 6)
Note: If Bar code length = “1” then Minimum length is entered.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
311
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
PDF417
PDF417 is a stacked two-dimensional symbology that provides the ability
to scan across rows of code. Each row consists of start/stop characters, row
identifiers, and symbol characters, which consist of four bars and four
spaces each and contain the actual data. This symbology uses error correction symbol characters appended at the end to recover loss of data.
Because the virtual wedge translates incoming data into keypad input, the
size of the keypad buffer limits the effective length of the label to 128
characters. Longer labels may be truncated. For PDF417 labels of more
than 128 characters, you can develop an application that bypasses the keypad buffer.
Action
Tap the PDF417 parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting. Tap (+) to access either the Macro PDF options parameter or
the Micro PDF417 parameter.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.17.1
Options
Not active
Active (default)
This illustration is from a 700 Series Computer using a laser scanner.
Macro PDF options
Macro PDF is used when a long message requires more than one PDF417
label. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700
Series Computer.
S Select Buffered to store a multi-label PDF417 message in the Sabre
buffer, thus transmitting the entire message when all labels are read.
312
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
S Select Unbuffered for multi-label PDF417 messages that are too long
for the Sabre buffer (memory overflow). Each part of the PDF417 label
is transmitted separately, and the host application must then assemble
the message using the macro PDF control header transmitted with each
label. Control Header is only present in macro PDF codes and is always
transmitted with unbuffered option.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the PDF417 parameter, tap (+) to expand the Macro
PDF parameter, select a setting to be changed, then select an option to
change this setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.22.1
Options
Macro PDF
Unbuffered
Buffered (default)
Control header
Not transmitted (default)
Transmitted
File name
Not transmitted (default)
Transmitted
Segment count
Not transmitted (default)
Transmitted
Time stamp
Not transmitted (default)
Transmitted
Sender
Not transmitted (default)
Transmitted
Addressee
Not transmitted (default)
Transmitted
File size
Not transmitted (default)
Transmitted
Checksum
Not transmitted (default)
Transmitted
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
313
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Micro PDF417
Micro PDF417 is a multi-row symbology derived from and closely based
on PDF417 (page 312). A limited set of symbology sizes is available, together with a fixed level of error correction for each symbology size. Note
that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the PDF417 parameter, tap (+) to expand the Micro
PDF417 parameter, select a setting to be changed, then select an option to
change this setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.27.1
Options
314
Decoding
Not active (default)
Active
Code 128 Emulation
Not active (default)
Active
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Interleaved 2 of 5
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) is a high-density, self-checking, continuous,
numeric symbology used mainly in inventory distribution and the automobile industry.
Note: An Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code label must be at least three characters
long for the 700 Series Computer to scan and decode correctly.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the Interleaved 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to be
changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from
the drop-down list.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.23.1
Options
Decoding
Not active (default)
Active
Check digit
Not used (default)
Mod 10 transmitted
Mod 10 not transmitted
French CIP transmitted
French CIP not transmitted
Bar code length
Any length
Minimum length (default)
Fixed lengths
Minimum length
003–254
Minimum length 3–254 (default is 6)
Fixed length 1
003–254
Fixed bar code length 3–254 (default is 3)
Fixed length 2
003–254
Fixed bar code length 3–254 (default is 3)
Fixed length 3
003–254
Fixed bar code length 3–254 (default is 3)
Note: If Bar code length = “1” then Minimum length is entered. If Bar
code length =“2” then Fixed length 1, Fixed length 2, or Fixed length 3 is
entered.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
315
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5 is a numerical symbology. Note that this is not available when
you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the Matrix 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to be
changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from
the drop-down list.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.24.1
Options
Decoding
Not active (default)
Active
Bar code length
Any length
Minimum length (default)
Minimum length
001–254
Minimum length 1–254 (default is 6)
Note: If Bar code length = “1” then Minimum length is entered.
316
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Telepen
Telepen is an alphanumeric, case-sensitive, full ASCII symbology. Note
that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the Telepen parameter, select the setting to be changed,
then tap an option to change this setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.25.1
Options
Decoding
Not active (default)
Active
Format
ASCII (default)
Numeric
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
317
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Code 11
Code 11 is a high density, discrete numeric symbology that is extensively
used in labeling telecommunications components and equipment. Note
that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the Code 11 parameter, select the setting to be
changed, then tap an option to change this setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.26.1
Options
318
Decoding
Not active (default)
Active
Check digit verification
1 digit (default)
2 digits
Check digit transmit
Disable
Enable (default)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
QR Code
QR Code (Quick Response Code) is a two-dimensional matrix symbology
containing dark and light square data modules. It has position detection
patterns on three of its four corners and features direct encodation of the
Japanese Kana-Kanji character set. It can encode up to 2509 numeric or
1520 alphanumeric characters and offers three levels of error detection.
Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer or if you are using a 730 Computer.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the QR Code parameter, select the setting to be
changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from
the drop-down list.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.35.1
Options
Decoding
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Not active
Active (default)
319
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Data Matrix
A two-dimensional matrix symbology, which is made of square modules
arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. The symbology utilizes Error
Checking and Correcting (ECC) algorithm with selectable levels for data
error recovery and Cyclic Redundancy Check algorithm to validate the
data. The character set includes either 128 characters conforming to ISO
646 (ANSI X3.4 - 1986) or 256 extended character set. Maximum capacity of a symbol is 2335 alphanumeric characters, 1556 8-bit byte characters or 3116 numeric digits. Note that this is not available when you use a
laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer or if you are using a 730 Computer.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the Data Matrix parameter, select the setting to be
changed, then tap an option to change this setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.34.1
Options
Decoding
320
Not active
Active (default)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
MaxiCode
MaxiCode is a fixed-size 2-D matrix symbology which is made up of offset
rows of hexagonal elements arranged around a unique circular finder pattern. ASCII data is encoded in six-bit symbol characters. The symbol contains 33 rows which are alternately 30 and 29 elements wide. There are
five different code sets. A single MaxiCode symbol can encode up to 93
characters of data. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner
with your 700 Series Computer or if you are using a 730 Computer.
Action
Tap (+) to expand the MaxiCode parameter, select the setting to be
changed, then tap an option to change this setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.33.1
Options
Decoding
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Not active
Active (default)
321
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Symbology Options
To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > the Data Collection icon to access its control panel
applet.
Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Symbology Options tab, then
tap this tab to access its parameters. The following are parameters for bar
code symbology options. Note that these are listed in the order of their
appearance within the Symbology Options tab.
Symbology ID
Identifies the bar code symbology in which data is encoded by prepending
a user-specified symbology identifier to the data. You can prepend one of
these types of character strings to identify the symbology:
S User-defined ASCII Character (Option 1):
A user-defined symbology identifier is a single ASCII character. You can
assign a custom identifier character to each bar code symbology. Note
that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series
Computer.
S AIM ISO/IEC Standard (Option 2 — Required to define symbology IDs):
The AIM Standard has a three-character structure which indicates the
symbology and optional features. See the AIM ISO/IEC Standard for
information.
Action
Select Symbology ID, then select an option to change this parameter setting. Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, then select any of
the user ID parameters listed. See the top of the next page for a sample screen
of the Code 39 user ID.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.22.1
Options
322
Disable (default)
User defined (disabled when using an imager)
ISO/IEC Standard
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Code 39 User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify Code 39 bar code data. Note that this is not
available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 39 user
ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.3.1
Options: x
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).
Code 128 User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify Code 128 bar code data. Note that this is not
available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 128 user
ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.5.1
Options: x
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).
Codabar User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify Codabar bar code data. Note that this is not
available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Codabar user
ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.2.1
Options: x
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
323
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Code 93 User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify Code 93 bar code data. Note that this is not
available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 93 user
ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.4.1
Options: x
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).
Interleaved 2 of 5 User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this
is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Interleaved 2
of 5 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.10.1
Options: x
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is I (not lowercase L).
PDF417 User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify PDF417 bar code data. Note that this is not
available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the PDF417 user
ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.12.1
Options: x
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is an asterisk (*).
MSI User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify MSI bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the MSI user ID
parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.11.1
Options: x
324
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Plessey User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify Plessey bar code data. Note that this is not
available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Plessey user
ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.13.1
Options: x
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D.
Standard 2 of 5 User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify Standard 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this is
not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Standard 2 of
5 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter
setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.23.1
Options: x
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D.
UPC A User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify UPC-A (Universal Product Code) bar code
data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700
Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the UPC A user
ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.6.1
Options: x
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is A.
UPC E User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify UPC-E bar code data. Note that this is not
available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the UPC E user
ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.7.1
Options: x
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is E.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
325
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
EAN 8 User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify EAN-8 bar code data. Note that this is not
available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the EAN 8 user
ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.8.1
Options: x
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is \xFF.
EAN 13 User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify EAN-13 (European Article Numbering) bar
code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your
700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the EAN 13 user
ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.9.1
Options: x
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is F.
Matrix 2 of 5 User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify Matrix 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this is
not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Matrix 2 of 5
user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter
setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.24.1
Options: x
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D.
Telepen User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify Telepen bar code data. Note that this is not
available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Telepen user
ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.25.1
Options: x
326
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is an asterisk (*).
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Code 11 User ID
If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own
ASCII character to identify Code 11 bar code data. Note that this is not
available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 11 user
ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.16.1
Options: x
where x is a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
327
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Prefix
Prepends a string of up to 20 ASCII characters to all scanned data.
Action
Tap the Prefix parameter, then enter a prefix value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.29.1
Options
Acceptable values are up to 20 ASCII characters. Embedded null
() characters are not allowed. Default is no characters (disabled).
328
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Suffix
Appends a string of up to 20 ASCII characters to all scanned data.
Action
Tap the Suffix parameter, then enter a suffix value to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.30.1
Options
Acceptable values are up to 20 ASCII characters. Embedded null
() characters are not allowed. Default is no characters (disabled).
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
329
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Beeper/LED
To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > the Data Collection icon to access its control panel
applet.
Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper/LED tab, then tap this
tab to access its parameters.
Most of these functions are not available when using an imager. The following
table shows which functions are supported either by an imager or by a
laser scanner.
Beeper Function
Imager
Beeper
Laser Scanner
Beeper Volume
Beeper Frequency
Good Read Beeps
Good Read Beep Duration
The following are parameters for features on the 700 Series Computer.
Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance.
330
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Beeper
Sets the volume for the good read beep. Note that this is not available when
you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap the Beeper parameter, then select an option to change this parameter
setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.6.1
Options
Beeper (default)
Vibrate (not supported on 730 Computers)
700 Color with Imager Screen
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
730 Screen
331
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Beeper Volume
Sets the volume for the good read beep. Note that this is not available when
you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap the Beeper volume parameter, then select an option to change this
parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.6.1
Options
Low
High (default)
Medium
Off
Vibrate
Disabling the Volume
To disable the beeper, tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > Sounds &
Notifications > the Volume tab, drag the System volume slider bar to the
left “Silent” position, then tap ok to exit this applet. See Chapter 1,
“Introduction“ for more information.
332
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Beeper Frequency
Sets the frequency for the good read beep. Note that this is not available
when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap the Beeper frequency parameter, then enter a frequency value to
change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.7.1
Options
1000–4095 (default is 2090)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
333
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Good Read Beeps
Sets the number of good read beeps. Note that this is not available when you
use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap the Good read beeps parameter, then select an option to change this
parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.8.1
Options
334
No beeps
One beep (default)
Two beeps
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Good Read Beep Duration
Sets the duration of the good read beep. Note that this is not available when
you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap the Good read beep duration parameter, then enter a duration value
to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.9.1
Options
0–2550
Beep duration in milliseconds. (default is 80)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
335
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Imager
Note: These instructions do not apply to the 730 Computer.
To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > Data Collection to access its control panel applet.
Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Imager tab, then tap this tab
to access its parameters.
The following are parameters for the imager. Note that these are listed in
the order of their appearance within the Imager tab.
Aimer LED Duration
The Aimer LED Duration controls the time the Aimer LED is turned on
when the scan button is pressed. After this time, images are captured for
decoding. The purpose is to position the Aimer LED on the bar code symbol before attempting to decode the bar code. Note that this is not available
when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap the Aimer LED Duration parameter, then enter a value to change this
setting. Note that values must be in 50 ms increments, such as 500, 650,
or 32500. Values not entered in 50 ms increments are rounded down. For
example, 2489 ms is rounded down to 2450 ms, 149 ms is rounded down
to 100 ms, etc..
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.21.1
Options
0–65500 ms (Default is 0)
336
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Sticky Aimer Duration
The Sticky Aimer Duration controls the time the Aimer LED stays on after the a bar code read completes or after the trigger button is released.
Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap the Sticky Aimer Duration parameter, then enter a value to change
this setting. Note that values must be in 50 ms increments, such as 500,
650, or 32500. Values not entered in 50 ms increments are rounded
down. For example, 2489 ms is rounded down to 2450 ms, 149 ms is
rounded down to 100 ms, etc..
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.24.1
Options
0–65535 ms (Default is 1000)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
337
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Image Dimension
The image dimensions control the vertical size of the image for decoding.
This can restrict the image to one bar code when otherwise, there might be
more than one bar code in the image to be decoded. Note that this is not
available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap the Image dimension parameter, select the position to be changed,
then tap an option or enter a value to change this position.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.22.1
Options
338
Left position
Not supported
Right position
Not supported
Top position
0–478
Position in pixels (Default is 0)
Bottom position
0–479
Position in pixels (Default is 479)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Lighting Mode
The Lighting Mode sets the lighting mode of the imager. When set to
“LED Priority,” the imager depends more on ambient lighting to illuminate the bar code for reading. When set to “Aperture Priority,” the imager
uses its built-in LED to illuminate the bar code for reading. Note that this
is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap the Lighting Mode parameter, then select an option to change this
parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.23.1
Options
LED Priority (default)
Aperture Priority
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
339
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
1D OmniDir Decode Enable
The 1D OmniDir Decode Enable affects the scanning abilities of the
IT4000 Imager. With 1D omni directional enabled, the imager is able to
decode images and bar code labels regardless of the orientation of the label.
With 1D omni directional disabled, the imager only decodes labels in the
direction of the aimer LED. Note that this is not available when you use a
laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap the 1D OmniDir Decode Enable parameter,then select an option to
change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.25.1
Options
340
Disabled
Enabled (default)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Virtual Wedge
To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > Data Collection to access its control panel applet.
Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Virtual Wedge tab, then tap
this tab to access its parameters.
The following are parameters for the virtual wedge scanner. Note that these
are listed in the order of their appearance within the Virtual Wedge tab.
Virtual Wedge
Enables or disables the virtual wedge for the internal scanner. The virtual
wedge retrieves scanned Automatic Data Collection (ADC) data and sends
it to the keypad driver so that the 700 Series Computer can receive and
interpret the data as keypad input.
Because the virtual wedge translates incoming data into keypad input, the
size of the keypad buffer limits the effective length of the label to 128
characters. Longer labels may be truncated. For labels of more than 128
characters, you need to develop an application that bypasses the keypad
buffer.
Action
Tap the Virtual Wedge parameter, then tap an option to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.2.1
Options
Disable
Enable (default)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
341
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Preamble
Sets the preamble that precedes any data you scan with the 700 Series
Computer. Common preambles include a data location number or an operator number.
Action
Tap the Preamble parameter, then enter a preamble value to change this
parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.3.1
Syntax
ADdata
where data is any acceptable values up to 31 ASCII characters. Embedded
null () characters are not allowed. Below are the non-printing
characters you can use for Virtual Wedge Preambles. Default is blank.
342
\a
Alert (bell)
\b
Backspace
\f
Form Feed
\n
New line/line feed
\r
Carriage return
\t
Horizontal tab
\v
Vertical tab
\xnnnn
nnnn is up to four HEX digits. Use leading zeros to fill out to four digits to
ensure proper conversion. For example, to prepend the character M to
scanned data, set the Preamble to either 1) M, or 2) x004D, where 4D is the
HEX equivalent for an uppercase M.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Note: When you enter the AD command without data, the preamble is
disabled. If you want to use quotation marks or the following combinations of characters as part of the appended data, separate those characters
from the AD command with quotes. If you do not use quotes as described
here, the 700 Series Computer will interpret the characters as another configuration command:
AD
AE
AF
KC
BV
EX
DF
Example
To use the two-character string BV as a preamble, scan this command (as a
Code 39 label) or send this command through the network: $+AD“BV”
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
343
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Postamble
Sets the postamble that is appended to any data you scan with the 700 Series Computer. Common postambles include cursor controls, such as tabs
or carriage return line feeds.
Action
Tap the Postamble parameter, then enter a postamble value to change this
parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.4.1
Syntax
AEdata
where data is any acceptable values up to 31 ASCII characters. Embedded
null () characters are not allowed. Below are the non-printing
characters you can use for Virtual Wedge Postambles:
344
\a
Alert (bell)
\b
Backspace
\f
Form Feed
\n
New line/line feed
\r
Carriage return
\t
Horizontal tab (default)
\v
Vertical tab
\xnnnn
nnnn is up to four HEX digits. Use leading zeros to fill out to four digits to
ensure proper conversion. For example, to prepend the character M to
scanned data, set the Preamble to either 1) M, or 2) x004D, where 4D is the
HEX equivalent for an uppercase M.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Note: When you enter the AE command without data, the postamble is
disabled. If you want to use quotation marks or the following combinations of characters as part of the appended data, separate those characters
from the AE command with quotes. If you do not use quotes as described
here, the 700 Series Computer will interpret the characters as another configuration command.
AD
AE
AF
KC
BV
EX
DF
Example
To use the two-character string BV as a postamble, scan this command (as
a Code 39 label) or send this command through the network: $+AE“BV”
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
345
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Grid
Sets the virtual wedge grid, which filters the data coming from this 700
Series Computer. The data server supports data filtering, which allows you
to selectively send scanned data. The virtual wedge grid is similar to the
“format” argument of the C Runtime Library scan function.
Action
Tap the Grid parameter, then enter a grid value to change this parameter
setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.5.1
Syntax
AF filter-expression= > editing-expression
where:
S 
The AIM symbology ID (optional).
S filter-expression
Any character string that includes valid filter expression values. Go to
the SDK User’s Manual provided with your Windows CE/PocketPC SDK
for a list of valid filter expression values.
S editing-expression
Any character string that includes valid editing expression values. Go to
the SDK User’s Manual provided with your Windows CE/PocketPC SDK
for a list of valid editing expression values.
346
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Code Page
Sets the virtual wedge code page. The code page controls the translation
from the character set of the raw collected data to Unicode, which is the
character set expected by Windows CE applications. The default code page
is 1252, which is the Windows Latin 1 (ANSI) character set.
Action
Tap the Code Page parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.6.1
Options
The only acceptable value for the code page parameter is “1252,” which is
the default.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
347
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Intermec Settings Control Panel Applet
You may have the Intermec Settings control panel applet. Information
about the settings you can configure with this applet is described in the
Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual. The online manual is
available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com.
See “Scanner Control and Data Transfer” in the Intermec Windows CE/
Pocket PC Software Developer’s Kit (SDK) User’s Manual shipped with the
Software Developer’s Kit (SDK) for information about data collection
functions.
To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > Intermec Settings to access its control panel applet.
348
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
SNMP Control Panel Applet
Note: This applet is not available in units with PSM Build 3.00 or newer.
To determine your PSM build version, tap Start > Programs >
File Explorer > the PSMinfo text file.
If your unit has PSM Build 3.00 or newer, then you may have the Intermec
Settings control panel applet in place of the SNMP applet. Information
about the settings you can configure with the Intermec Settings applet is
described in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual. The
online manual is available from the Intermec web site at
www.intermec.com.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) parameters include identification information, security encryption, security community strings,
and traps.
To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > SNMP to access its control panel applet.
Tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs represent three groups of settings
or parameters:
S Security (starting on the next page)
S Traps (starting on page 355)
S Identification (starting on page 357)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
349
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Security
To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > SNMP > the Security tab to access its parameters.
The following are parameters that affect encryption and community
strings. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the
Security tab.
Read Only Community
Sets the read-only community string for this 700 Series Computer, which
is required for processing of SNMP get and get next requests.
Action
Tap the Read Only Community parameter, then enter a community
string to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.2.0
Options
The read-only community string can be up to 128 ASCII characters. Default is Public.
350
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Read/Write Community
Sets the read/write community string, which is required for processing of
SNMP set requests by this 700 Series Computer. An SNMP packet with
this name as the community string will also process SNMP get and next
requests.
Action
Tap the Read/Write Community parameter, then enter a community
string to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.3.0
Options
The read/write community string can be up to 128 ASCII characters. Default is Private.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
351
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Read Encryption
Sets the packet-level mode of security for SNMP read-only requests. If you
enable read encryption, all received SNMP get and get next packets have
to be encrypted or the packet will not be authorized. If encryption is enabled, you can only use software provided by Intermec Technologies.
Note: To enable security encryption, you also need to set the Security Encryption Key (page 354).
Action
Tap the Read Encryption parameter, then select an option to change this
parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.4.0
Options
352
On
SNMP get and get next packets must be encrypted
Off
SNMP packets do not have to be encrypted (default)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Write Encryption
Sets the packet-level mode of security for SNMP read/write requests. If
you enable write encryption, all SNMP packets that are received with the
read/write community string have to be encrypted or the packet will not
be authorized. You need to use software from Intermec Technologies that
supports encryption.
Note: To enable security encryption, you also need to set the Security Encryption Key (page 354).
Action
Tap the Write Encryption parameter, then select an option to change this
parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.5.0
Options
On
SNMP packets must be encrypted
Off
SNMP packets do not have to be encrypted (default)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
353
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Encryption Key
Identifies the key that this 700 Series Computer uses to encrypt or decipher SNMP packets. Encryption is used only by software provided by Intermec Technologies. If encryption is enabled, SNMP management platforms will not be able to communicate with the 700 Series Computer. The
encryption key is returned encrypted.
Action
Tap the Encryption Key parameter, then enter a security encryption key
value to change this parameter setting.
Note: You also need to set either Read Encryption (page 352) or Write
Encryption (page 353) or both.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.6.0
Options
The encryption key can be from 4 to 20 ASCII characters. Default is
NULL.
354
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Traps
To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > SNMP > the Traps tab to access its parameters.
The following are authentication and threshold parameters for traps. Note
that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Traps tab.
Authentication
Determines whether to send authentication traps. When trap authentication is enabled, an authentication trap is sent if an SNMP packet is received by the master agent with an invalid community string.
Action
Tap the Authentication parameter, then select an option to change this
parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.2.2.0
Options
On (default)
Off
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
355
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Threshold
Determines the maximum number of traps per second that the master
agent generates. If the threshold is reached, the trap will not be sent.
Action
Tap the Threshold parameter, then enter a threshold value to change this
parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.2.3.0
Options
Any positive integer value. Default is 10.
356
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Identification
To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > SNMP > the Identification tab to access its
parameters.
The following are parameters for contact, location, and name information
for support purposes. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Identification tab.
Contact
Sets the contact information for the person responsible for this 700 Series
Computer.
Action
Tap the Contact parameter, then enter the name of your contact representative to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4.0
Options
The identification contact may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default is
no characters or blank.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
357
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Name
Sets the assigned name for this 700 Series Computer.
Action
Tap the Name parameter, then enter the name of your 700 Series Computer to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5.0
Options
The identification name may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default is no
characters or blank.
358
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Location
Sets the identification location for this 700 Series Computer, such as
“Shipping.”
Action
Tap the Location parameter, then enter the location of where your 700
Series Computer to change this parameter setting.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6.0
Options
The identification location may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default is
no characters or blank.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
359
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Unit Information Control Panel Applet
Note: This applet is not available in units with PSM Build 3.00 or newer.
To determine your PSM build version, tap Start > Programs >
File Explorer > the PSMinfo text file.
If your unit has PSM Build 3.00 or newer, then you may have the Intermec
Settings control panel applet in place of the Unit Information applet.
Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec
Settings applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command Reference
Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at
www.intermec.com.
Unit Information is a read-only control panel applet that provides information about your 700 Series Computer, such as software version builds,
available CAB files, and the internal battery status.
To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > Unit Information to access its control panel applet.
700 Color Screen
730 Screen
Tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs represent three groups of settings
or parameters:
S Versions (starting on the next page)
S Battery Status (starting on page 362)
S CAB Files (starting on page 363)
360
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Versions
You can view the latest software build version on your 700 Series
Computer by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet.
To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > Unit Information > the Versions tab to view the latest
software build version. Tap ok to exit this information.
700 Color Screen
730 Screen
Below are some of the software applications you may find on this screen:
S 700 Platform Build:
Shows the latest development or released version of the software build
for the 700 Series Computer.
S S9C:
Provides the name and version of the scanner file built into this 700 Series Computer, along with the current CPU version.
S DataCollection Build:
Shows the latest development or released version of the software build
for the Data Collection control panel applet.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
361
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Battery Status
You can view the battery status for your 700 Series Computer by accessing
the Unit Information control panel applet.
To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > Unit Information > the Battery Status tab to view the
current status. Tap ok to exit this information.
362
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
CAB Files
You can view the latest developer or released version of each CAB file from
Intermec Technologies Corporation that are installed in your 700 Series
Computer via the Unit Information control panel applet. Custom CAB
files are not displayed in this applet. See the Software Tools User’s Manual for
more information about these files.
To access the information from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start >
Settings > the System tab > Unit Information > the CAB Files tab to view
the current CAB file versions. Tap ok to exit this information.
When a CAB file is built, a registry entry is created with a build number
for that file. This CAB Files control panel applet looks for a registry key
for each CAB file installed. When the registry entry is found, the CAB file
name and version number information are displayed. If a CAB file has not
been installed, then its information is not displayed.
Below is a list of CAB files from Intermec Technologies that are available
for your 700 Series Computer with their latest developer or released version of the software build. Should you need to add any of these to your
700 Series Computer, contact an Intermec representative.
S BtMainStack:
Installation of the Main Bluetooth Stack is handled automatically as part
of the operating system boot-up procedure. See Chapter 4, “Network
Support,” for more information about Bluetooth wireless printing.
S Comm Port Wedge:
The software build for the Comm Port Wedge. Note that the Comm Port
Wedge CAB file is available on the Intermec Developer’s Library CD.
S NPCPTest:
This installs a Norand® Portable Communications Protocol (NPCP)
Printing test application which will print to an Intermec® 4815, 4820,
or 6820 Printer. See Chapter 5, “Printer Support,” for more information.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
363
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
S S9C Upgrade:
Installs the files needed to upgrade the S9C scanner firmware. See the
700 Color Management Tools portion of the Intermec Developer’s Library
CD for more information about upgrading the firmware.
S SDK:
Installs the Intermec Software Developer’s Kit (SDK). See the SDK
User’s Manual for more information.
S WinCfg:
Configures the NRINET.INI file, launches the NRINet client, and
loads and unloads the LAN and WLAN device drivers.
S Wireless Printing Sample:
Installs a sample application that developers can use for reference when
they are developing their own Wireless Printing applications. The
source code for this application is included as part of the Wireless Printing SDK on the Intermec Developer’s Library CD. See the SDK User’s
Manual for more information.
S ActiveX Control Tools:
This lists some of the CAB files that may be available with which to
install ActiveX Control Tools. See the SDK Online Help for more information.
S AXCommunication:
Communication controls that transmit or receive messages from input connections.
S AXFileTransfer:
File transfer controls that transmit and receive files using the Trivial
File Transfer Protocol (TFTP).
S AXReaderCommand:
Reader command functions that modify and retrieve configuration
information from your 700 Series Computer.
S AXVWedge:
The virtual wedge control that retrieves scanned ADC data and sends
it to the keyboard driver to interpret data as keyboard input.
364
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Utilities Control Panel Applet
The Utilities control panel applet examines and modifies settings and operational modes of specific hardware and software on the 700 Color Computer, including the dock switch, registry storage, wakeup mask, and application launch keys.
To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings
> the System tab > Utilities to access its control panel applet.
Use the left and right arrows to scroll through the tabs along the bottom of
the control panel applet, then tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs represent the following groups of settings or parameters:
S Dock Switch (next page)
S Registry Save (page 367)
S Wakeup Mask (page 368)
S App Launch (page 369)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
365
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Dock Switch
From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab >
Utilities > the Dock Switch tab to access the Dock Switch control panel
applet.
Use this applet to control the position of the dock switch. This can be set
either to a COM A (phone jack for a modem) position or to a COM B
(serial) position.
If switched to COM B and suspended the terminal will have the following
behavior:
S If the 700 Series Computer is on charge, the dock switch will remain
switched to COM B.
S If the 700 Series Computer is off charge, the dock switch will switch to
COM A and remain in this position until the 700 Series Computer resumes charge.
366
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Registry Save
From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab >
Utilities > the Registry Save tab to access the Registry Save control panel
applet.
For Windows Mobile 2003, the only medium available for saving the registry is the Flash File System (PSM). Registry data is stored in the
“\Flash_File_Store\Registry” path. Check Enable Registry Storage to enable this function.
To ensure that the 700 Series Computer restores the real-time clock after a
cold-boot, check the Enable RTC Restore option. Note that this does not
apply to the 730 Computer.
700 Color or 700CXL Screen
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
730 Screen
367
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Wakeup Mask
From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab >
Utilities > the Wakeup Mask tab to access the Wakeup Mask control panel applet.
This applet programs three scanner buttons and the A1 and A2 application
keys to be “wakeup” or resume keys. That is, to prompt the 700 Series
Computer to “wake up” or resume activity after going to “sleep” as a result
of being inactive after a length of time. This information will remain between warm and cold boots.
Check the appropriate box, then tap ok to apply your settings.
Based on your setting, do the following to “wake up” the 700 Series Computer.
If you select:
Then do this on
Numeric Keyboard
Then do this on
Alphanumeric Keyboard
Middle Scanner Button
Squeeze the button on the Scan Handle
Squeeze the button on the Scan Handle
Left Scanner Button
Squeeze the left scanner button
Squeeze the left scanner button
Right Scanner Button
Squeeze the right scanner button
Squeeze the right scanner button
GOLD + A1 (Application 1)
Press [Gold] b a
Press [Gold/White] c A
GOLD + A2 (Application 2)
Press [Gold] b 4
Press [Gold/White] c B
368
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
App Launch
From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab >
Utilities , then scroll to the right to tap the App Launch tab to access the
Application Launch control panel applet.
This applet programs or maps two scanner buttons and four application
keys to start up to six applications. Note that the left scanner button also acts
as the record button.
For 700 Series Computers with either a laser scanner or an imager,
applications are as follows and default mappings are shown in the following illustration:
S Left Scanner Trigger
S Right Scanner Trigger
S Record (see Note)
S Calendar (see Note)
S Contacts (see Note)
S Tasks (see Note)
For 700 Series Computers without either a laser scanner or an imager,
the default maps the Record, Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks applications
the top four and the A3 and A4 buttons are ”unassigned” or available for
two more applications.
Note: Record, Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks are Pocket PC applications.
See Chapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003,” for more information about these
applications.
S To assign an application to a button, select an application from the applicable drop-down list box.
S To assign a new application, select the “Add new application” option,
which brings up an Open File dialog and browse SD or CF storage
cards for new applications.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
369
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
S To disable or unmap a currently mapped application from a corresponding button, select “unassigned” from the applicable drop-down list.
S To restore these buttons to their defaults, tap Defaults in the lower
right corner.
Note; You cannot map an application to more than one button. Should
you assign the same application to two buttons, a verification prompt will
appear after the second button to confirm whether you want to remap the
application. If you tap Yes, the applet changes the first button to “unassigned” and map the application to the second button.
Note: All changes are activated immediately upon selection.
370
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Wireless Network Control Panel Applet
Note: See Chapter 4, “Network Support,” for information about the
802.11b radio module.
About the Wireless Network
Your wireless adapter (network interface card) connects to wireless networks of two types: access point networks and peer-to-peer networks.
S Access point networks get you onto your corporate network and the internet. Your 700 Series Computer establishes a wireless connection to
an access point, which links you to the rest of the network. When you
connect to a network via an access point, you are using the 802.1x infrastructure mode.
S Peer-to-peer networks are private networks shared between two or more
people, even with no access point.
Each wireless network is assigned a name (or Service Set Identifier - SSID)
to allow multiple networks to coexist in the same area without infringement.
With multiple networks within range of each other, security is a necessity,
to avoid outside eavesdropping. To make a network safe, the following are
required:
S Authentication by both the network and the user
S Authentication is cryptographically protected
S Wireless connection is encrypted
There are two basic mechanisms for providing secure encryption over a
wireless network: preconfigured secrets called WEP keys and authentication using the 802.1x protocol.
Terminology
Below are terms you may encounter as you configure your wireless network:
S CKIP (Cisco Key Integrity Protocol)
This is a light version of the TKIP protocol developed by Cisco.
S EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)
802.1x uses this protocol to perform authentication. This is not necessarily an authentication mechanism, but is a common framework for
transporting actual authentication protocols. Intermec Technologies
provides a number of EAP protocols for you to choose the best for your
network.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
371
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
S TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)
This protocol is part of the IEEE 802.11i encryption standard for wireless LANs., which provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity
check and a re-keying mechanism, thus fixing the flaws of WEP.
This protocol provides stronger encryption than WEP, by dynamically
updating the encryption keys every 10,000 packets. It eliminates attacks
on WEP, which is based on a cryptographic algorithm called RC4, leaving WLANs open to various security attacks.
TKIP is an interim addition to WEP that addresses some security concerns. It provides per-packet key mixing, a MIC (Message Integrity
Check), and a rekeying mechanism designed to fix WEP flaws.
S WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption
With preconfigured WEP, both the client 700 Series Computer and
access point are assigned the same key, which can encrypt all data between the two devices. WEP keys also authenticate the 700 Series Computer to the access point — unless the 700 Series Computer can prove it
knows the WEP key, it is not allowed onto the network.
WEP keys are only needed if they are expected by your clients. There
are two types available: 64-bit (5-character strings, 12345) (default) and
128-bit (13-character strings, 1234567890123). Enter these as either
ASCII (12345) or Hex (0x3132333435).
S WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)
This is an enhanced version of WEP that does not rely on a static,
shared key. It encompasses a number of security enhancements over
WEP, including improved data encryption via TKIP and 802.1x authentication with EAP.
372
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Configuring Your Wireless Network
To start 802.11b communications on the 700 Series Computer, tap Start
> Settings > the System tab > Wireless Network to access the Profile
Wizard for the 802.11b radio module.
A profile contains all the information necessary to authenticate you to the
network, such as login name, password or certificate, and protocols by
which you are authenticated.
You can have up to four profiles for different networks. For example, you
may have different login names or passwords on different networks, or you
may use a password on one network, and a certificate on another.
Use the Profiles page to select and configure between the networking environments assigned to this 802.11b radio.
S Profile:
Tap the drop-down list to choose between four different profiles assigned to this unit, then tap Edit Select Profile, make the changes needed for this profile (starting on the next page), then tap OK to return to
the Profiles page.
S Enable Microsoft’s Wireless Zero Config
Check this box to enable Microsoft’s Wireless Zero Config application.
This effectively disables the Intermec software solution for 802.11b, including configuration via the CORE application and the Wireless Network control panel applet.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
373
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Basic
Use the Basic page to set the network type, name, and manage battery
power for this profile. Tap ok or OK to return to the Profiles page.
S Profile Label:
Enter a unique name for your profile.
S Network type:
Tap the drop-down list to select either “Infrastructure” if your network
uses access points to provide connectivity to the corporate network or
internet; or “Ad-Hoc” to set up a private network with one or more participants.
S Channel:
If you selected “Ad-Hoc” for the network type, select the channel on
which you are communicating with others in your network. There are
up to 11 channels available.
S SSID (Network Name):
This assumes the profile name unless another name is entered in this field.
If you want to connect to the next available network or are not familiar
with the network name, enter “ANY” in this field. Consult your LAN
administrator for network names.
S Enable Power Management:
Check this box to conserve battery power (default), or clear this box to
disable this feature.
374
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Security
The following are available from the 8021x Security drop-down list. Note
that the last four methods are available if you have purchased the security package. Contact your Intermec representative for information.
S None (next page)
S PEAP (page 379)
S TLS (page 383)
S TTLS (page 387)
S LEAP (page 390)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
375
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
None
Use “None” to disable 802.1x Security and enable either WEP or WPAPSK encryption.
To Disable 802.1x Security
1 Set 8021x Security as “None.”
2 Set Association to “Open.”
3 Set Encryption to “None.”
376
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
To Enable WEP Encryption
1 Set 8021x Security as “None.”
2 Set Association to either “Open” if WEP keys are not required; or
“Shared” when WEP keys are required for association.
3 Set Encryption to “WEP.” See page 372 for information about WEP
encryption.
4 If you had set Association to “Shared,” then select a data transmission
key from the Data TX Key drop-down list near the bottom of this
screen, then enter the encryption key for that data transmission in the
appropriate Key # field.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
377
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
To Enable WPA Encryption Using a Preshared Key
1 Set 8021x Security as “None.”
2 Set Association to “WPA.” See page 372 for information about WPA
encryption.
3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to “TKIP.” See page 372 for
more information about TKIP.
4 Enter the temporal key as ASCII (12345) in the Pre-Shared Key field.
378
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
PEAP (Protected EAP)
This protocol is suitable for performing secure authentication against Windows domains and directory services. It is comparable to EAP-TTLS (see
page 387), both in its method of operation and its security, though not as
flexible. This does not support the range of inside-the-tunnel authentication methods supported by EAP-TTLS. Microsoft and Cisco both support
this protocol.
Use “PEAP” to configure the use of PEAP as an authentication protocol
and to select “Open,” “WPA,” or “Network EAP” as an association mode.
To Enable PEAP with an Open Association
1 Set 8021x Security as “PEAP.”
2 Set Association to “Open.”
3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to “WEP.” See page 372 for
information about WEP encryption.
4 Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol. Select
Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to
access the protocol; or leave Use following password as selected to automatically use the protocol without entering a password.
5 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner PEAP authentication and set
options for server certificate validation and trust. See page 382 for more
information.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
379
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
To Enable PEAP with WPA Encryption
1 Set 8021x Security as “PEAP.”
2 Set Association to “WPA.” See page 372 for information about WPA
encryption.
3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to “TKIP.” See page 372 for
more information about TKIP.
4 Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol. Select
Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to
access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected to automatically use the protocol without entering a password.
5 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner PEAP authentication and set
options for server certificate validation and trust. See page 382 for more
information.
380
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
To Enable PEAP with Network EAP
1 Set 8021x Security as “PEAP.”
2 Set Association to “Network EAP.” See page 371 for information about
EAP.
3 Set Encryption to either “WEP” or “CKIP.” See page 371 for information about CKIP and page 372 for information about WEP encryption.
4 Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol. Select
Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to
access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected to automatically use the protocol without entering a password.
5 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner PEAP authentication and set
options for server certificate validation and trust. See page 382 for more
information.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
381
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Additional Settings
1 Select an authentication method from the Inner PEAP Authentication
drop-down list.
EAP/MS-CHAP-V2
Authenticates against a Windows Domain Controller and
other non-Windows user databases. This is Microsoft’s
implementation of PEAP.
EAP/Token Card
Use with token cards. The password value entered is never
cached. This is Cisco’s implementation of PEAP.
EAP/MD5-Challenge Message Digest 5. A secure hashing authentication algorithm.
2 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authentication server based on its certificate when using TTLS, PEAP, and TLS.
3 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers. Note that if these fields are
left blank, the server certificate trust validation is not performed or required.
4 Click ok to return to the Security page.
382
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
TLS (EAP-TLS)
EAP-TLS is a protocol that is based on the TLS (Transport Layer Security)
protocol widely used to secure web sites. This requires both the user and
authentication server have certificates for mutual authentication. While
cryptically strong, this requires corporations that deploy this to maintain a
certificate infrastructure for all their users.
Use “TLS” to configure the use of EAP-TLS as an authentication protocol,
and select either “Open” or “WPA” as an association mode.
To Enable TLS with an Open Association
1 Set 8021x Security as “TLS.”
2 Set Association to “Open.”
3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to “WEP.” See page 372 for
information about WEP encryption.
4 Enter your unique Subject Name and User Name to use this protocol.
5 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates. See page
385 for more information.
6 Tap Additional Settings to set options for server certificate validation
and trust. See page 386 for more information.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
383
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
To Enable TLS with WPA Encryption
1 Set 8021x Security as “TLS.”
2 Set Association to “WPA.” See page 372 for information about WPA
encryption.
3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to “TKIP.”See page 372 for
more information about TKIP.
4 Enter your unique Subject Name and User Name as credentials for this
profile.
5 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates. See page
385 for more information.
6 Tap Additional Settings to set options for server certificate validation
and trust. See page 386 for more information.
384
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
To Get Certificates
Certificates are pieces of cryptographic data that guarantee a public key is
associated with a private key. They contain a public key and the entity
name that owns the key. Each certificate is issued by a certificate authority.
Use this page to import a certificate onto the 700 Series Computer.
Root Certificates
1 Tap the <<< button next to the Import Root Certificate field to select
the root certificate (DER-encoded .CER file) to import.
2 Click Import Root Cert to install the selected certificate.
User Certificate
1 Tap the <<< button next to the Certificate Path field to select the user
certificate (DER-encoded .CER file without the private key) to import.
2 Tap the <<< button next to the Key Path field to select the private key
(.PVK file) which corresponds to the user certificate chosen in step 1.
3 Tap Import User Cert to install the selected certificate.
Web Enrollment
Tap Web Enrollment to obtain a user certificate over the network from an
IAS Server. Tap ok to return to the Security page.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
385
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Additional Settings
1 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authentication server based on its certificate when using TTLS, PEAP, and TLS.
2 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers. Note that if these fields are
left blank, the server certificate trust validation is not performed or required.
3 Click ok to return to the Security page.
386
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
TTLS (EAP-Tunneled TLS)
This protocol provides authentication like EAP-TLS (see page 383) but
does not require certificates for every user. Instead, authentication servers
are issued certificates. User authentication is done using a password or other credentials that are transported in a securely encrypted “tunnel” established using server certificates.
EAP-TTLS works by creating a secure, encrypted tunnel through which
you present your credentials to the authentication server. Thus, inside
EAP-TTLS there is another inner authentication protocol that you must
configure via Additional Settings.
Use “TTLS” to configure the use of EAP-TTLS as an authentication protocol, and select either “Open” or “WPA” as an association mode.
To Enable TTLS with an Open Association
1 Set 8021x Security as “TTLS.”
2 Set Association to “Open.”
3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to “WEP.” See page 372 for
information about WEP encryption.
4 Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol. Select
Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to
access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected to automatically use the protocol without entering a password.
5 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner TTLS authentication and an
inner EAP, and set options for server certificate validation and trust. See
page 389 for more information.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
387
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
To Enable TTLS with WPA Encryption
1 Set 8021x Security as “TTLS.”
2 Set Association to “WPA.” See page 372 for information about WPA
encryption.
3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to “TKIP.” See page 372 for
more information about TKIP.
4 Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol. Select
Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to
access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected to automatically use the protocol without entering a password.
5 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner TTLS authentication and an
inner EAP, and set options for server certificate validation and trust. See
page 389 for more information.
388
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Additional Settings
1 Select an authentication protocol from the Inner TTLS Authentication
drop-down list:
PAP
Password Authentication Protocol. A simple authentication
protocol that sends security information in the clear.
CHAP
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol. Use of Radius
to authenticate a terminal without sending security data in the
clear. Authenticates against non-Windows user databases. You
cannot use this if authenticating against a Windows NT Domain
or Active Directory.
MS-CHAP;
MS-CHAP-V2
Authenticates against a Windows Domain Controller and other
non-Windows user databases.
PAP/Token Card
Use with token cards. The password value entered is never
cached.
EAP
Extensible Authentication Protocol. See page 371 for information about EAP.
2 If you select “EAP” for the inner authentication protocol, then an inner
EAP protocol from the Inner EAP drop-down list.
3 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers. Note that if these fields are
left blank, the server certificate trust validation is not performed or required.
4 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authentication server based on its certificate when using TTLS, PEAP, and TLS.
5 Enter the Anonymous EAP-TTLS Name as assigned for public usage.
Use of this outer identity protects your login name or identity.
6 Click ok to return to the Security page.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
389
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
LEAP (Cisco Lightweight EAP)
LEAP is the Cisco Lightweight version of EAP. See page 371 for information about EAP.
Use “LEAP” to configure the use of LEAP as an authentication protocol,
select “Open,” “WPA,” or “Network EAP” as an association mode, or assign Network EAP. Note that this defaults to the Network EAP.
To Enable LEAP with an Open Association
1 Set 8021x Security as “LEAP.”
2 Set Association to “Open.”
3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to “WEP.” See page 372 for
information about WEP encryption.
4 Enter your unique User Name to use this protocol.
5 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each
time to access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected
to automatically use the protocol without entering a password.
390
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
To Enable LEAP with WPA Encryption
1 Set 8021x Security as “LEAP.”
2 Set Association to “WPA.” See page 372 for information about WPA
encryption.
3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to “TKIP.” See page 372 for
more information about TKIP.
4 Enter your unique User Name to use this protocol.
5 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each
time to access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected
to automatically use the protocol without entering a password.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
391
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
To Enable LEAP with Network EAP
1 Set 8021x Security as “LEAP.”
2 Set Association to “Network EAP,” an EAP protocol for the network.
See page 371 for information about EAP.
3 Set Encryption to either “WEP” or “CKIP.” See page 371 for information about CKIP and page 372 for information about WEP encryption.
4 Enter your unique User Name to use this protocol.
5 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each
time to access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected
to automatically use the protocol without entering a password.
392
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Advanced
Use this page to configure additional settings for this profile. Tap ok or
OK to return to the Profiles page.
S Enable mixed cell:
Mixed cell is a profile-dependent setting. If enabled, you can connect to
mixed cell without using WEP, then you can query the cell to determine whether you can use encryption.
S Enable Logging:
Check this to log what activity incurs for this profile.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
393
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Other Configurable Parameters
The following parameters can be configured by sending reader commands
through the network or from an application. See “Using Reader Commands” on page 396 for more information.
Audio Volume
Changes the volume of all audio signals.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.3.0
Options (Syntax Data for Reader Commands)
Off
Very quiet
Quiet
Normal (default)
Loud
Very loud
Automatic Shutoff
Sets the length of time the 700 Series Computer remains on when there is
no activity. When you turn on the 700 Computer, it either resumes exactly where it was when you turned it off or boots and restarts your application.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.11.3.0
Options (Syntax Data for Reader Commands)
394
1 minute
2 minutes
3 minutes (default)
4 minutes
5 minutes
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Backlight Timeout
Sets the length of time that the display backlight remains on. If you set a
longer timeout value, you use the battery power at a faster rate.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.13.1.0
Options (Syntax Data for Reader Commands)
10
30
60
120
180
240
300
10 seconds
30 seconds
1 minute (default)
2 minutes
3 minutes
4 minutes
5 minutes
Date/Time
Sets the current date and time.
SNMP OID
Date:
Time:
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.501.2.1.0
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.501.2.2.0
Options (Syntax Data for Reader Commands)
Date
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Time
0000–9999 (1999)
1–12 (6)
1–31 (1)
0–23 (0)
0–59 (00)
0–59 (00)
Key Clicks
Enables or disables the keypad clicks. The 700 Series Computer emits a
click each time you press a key or decode a row of a two-dimensional
symbology.
SNMP OID
1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.12.1.0
Options (Syntax Data for Reader Commands)
Disable clicks
Enable soft key clicks
Enable loud key clicks (default)
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
395
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Using Reader Commands
After the 700 Series Computer is connected to your network, you can send
the 700 Series Computer a reader command from an application to perform a task, such as changing the time and date. Some reader commands
temporarily override the configuration settings and some change the configuration settings.
Change Configuration
The Change Configuration command must precede any configuration
command. If you enter a valid string, the 700 Series Computer configuration is modified and the computer emits a high beep. To send the Change
Configuration command through the network, use the $+ [command]
syntax where command is the two-letter command syntax for the configuration command followed by the value to be set for that command.
You can also make changes to several different commands by using the
$+ [command]...[command n] syntax. There are seven configuration
command settings that can be changed in this way. See each command for
information on respective acceptable “data” values.
Command
Syntax
Audio Volume
BVdata
Automatic Shutoff
EZdata
Backlight Timeout
DFdata
Key Clicks
KCdata
Virtual Wedge Grid
AFdata
Virtual Wedge Postamble
AEdata
Virtual Wedge Preamble
ADdata
Note: See pages 342 and 344 for more information about the Virtual
Wedge Postamble and Virtual Wedge Preamble commands.
Example 1
To change the Beep Volume to Off, you can send this string to the 700
Series Computer through the network: $+BV0
where:
$+
Indicates Change Configuration.
BV
Specifies the Audio Volume parameter.
Specifies a value of Off.
Example 2
To change the Beep Volume to Very Quiet and the Virtual Wedge Grid
to 123: $+BV1AF123
where:
$+
Indicates Change Configuration
BV1
Specifies Audio Volume, set to Very Quiet (1)
AF123
Specifies Virtual Wedge Grid, set to a value of 123.
396
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Set Time and Date
This command sets the date and time on the 700 Series Computer. The
default date and time is June 1, 1999 at 12:00 AM.
From the network, send the following:
/+ yyyymmddhhmmss
where acceptable values for the date are:
yyyy
mm
dd
hh
mm
ss
0000–9999
01–12
01–31
00–23
00–59
00–59
Year
Month of the year
Day of the month
Hour
Minutes
Seconds
You can also set the time and date by using Configuration Management in
Unit Manager, or by using the Clock control panel applet in the Settings
menu. To access this control panel applet, tap Start > Settings > the
System tab > the Clock icon to access its control panel applet.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
397
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Configuration Bar Codes
You can change some settings on your 700 Series Computer by scanning
the following Code 39 bar code labels.
S You can use the Data Collection control panel to set the three Virtual
Wedge parameters (starting on page 341).
Note: When you use a bar code creation utility to make a scannable bar
code label, the utility probably adds opening and closing asterisks automatically. Asterisks are included here for translation purposes.
Audio Volume
Note: The Audio Volume parameter information is on page 394.
Turn Audio Off
*$+BV0*
*$+BV0*
Set Audio Volume to very quiet
*$+BV1*
*$+VB1*
Set Audio Volume to quiet
*$+BV2*
*$+BV2*
Set Audio Volume to normal (default)
*$+BV3*
*$+BV3*
Set Audio Volume to loud
*$+BV4*
*$+BV4*
Set Audio Volume to very loud
*$+BV5*
*$+BV5*
398
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Automatic Shutoff
Note: The Automatic Shutoff parameter information is on page 394.
Set Automatic Shutoff to 1 minute
*$+EZ1*
*$+EZ1*
Set Automatic Shutoff to 2 minutes
*$+EZ2*
*$+EZ2*
Set Automatic Shutoff to 3 minutes (default)
*$+EZ3*
*$+EZ3*
Set Automatic Shutoff to 4 minutes
*$+EZ4*
*$+EZ4*
Set Automatic Shutoff to 5 minutes
*$+EZ5*
*$+EZ5*
Backlight Timeout
Note: The Backlight Timeout parameter information is on page 395.
Backlight Timeout 10 seconds
*$+DF10*
*$+DF10*
Backlight Timeout 30 seconds
*$+DF30*
*$+DF30*
Backlight Timeout 1 minute (default)
*$+DF60*
*$+DF60*
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
399
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Backlight Timeout 2 minutes
*$+DF120*
*$+DF120*
Backlight Timeout 3 minutes
*$+DF180*
*$+DF180*
Backlight Timeout 4 minutes
*$+DF240*
*$+DF240*
Backlight Timeout 5 minutes
*$+DF300*
*$+DF300*
Key Clicks
Note: The Key Clicks parameter information is on page 395.
Disable key clicks
*$+KC0*
*$+KC0*
Enable soft key clicks
*$+KC1*
*$+KC1*
Enable loud key clicks (default)
*$+KC2*
*$+KC2*
400
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
Virtual Wedge Grid, Preamble, Postamble
The following parameters are user-configurable strings. Refer to a full
ASCII chart for more information.
Grid
For Virtual Wedge Grid, the first part of the bar code would be the following, which can include a string of up to 240 characters. Parameter information starts on page 346.
*$+AF
*$+AF
Preamble
For Virtual Wedge Preamble, the first part of the bar code would be below, followed by a string of up to 31 characters (no ) and an asterisk. Default is no characters. Parameter information is on page 342.
*$+AD
*$+AD
Postamble
For Virtual Wedge Postamble, the first part of the bar code would be below, followed by a string of up to 31 characters (no ) and an asterisk. Default is no characters. Parameter information is on page 344.
*$+AE
*$+AE
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
401
Appendix A — Configurable Settings
402
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
B
Bar Code Symbologies
This appendix contains a brief explanation of some of the bar code
symbologies that the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer decodes and explains some of the general characteristics and uses of these bar code types.
The 700 Series Computer recognizes eleven of the most widely used bar
code symbologies. With bar code symbologies, like languages, there are
many different types. A bar code symbology provides the required flexibility for a particular inventory tracking system.
A symbology may be for particular industries, such as food and beverage,
automotive, railroad, or aircraft. Some of these industries have established
their own bar code symbology because other symbologies did not meet
their needs.
Without going into great detail on the bar code structure, note that no two
products use the same bar code. Each product gets a unique bar code.
Industries that use a particular type of bar code symbology have formed
regulating committees or are members of national institutes that issue and
keep track of bar codes. This ensures that each organization that contributes to a particular industry conforms to its standard. Without some form
of governing body, bar coding would not work.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
403
Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies
Codabar
Codabar was for retail price-labeling systems. Today it is widely accepted
by libraries, medical industries, and photo finishing services.
Codabar is a discrete, self-checking code with each character represented
by a stand-alone group of four bars and three intervening spaces.
Four different start or stop characters get defined and designated “a”, “b”,
“c”, and “d”. These start and stop characters are constructed using one
wide bar and two wide spaces. A complete Codabar symbol begins with
one of the start or stop characters followed by some number of data characters and ending in one of the start or stop characters.
Any of the start or stop characters may be used on either end of the symbol. It is possible to use the 16 unique start or stop combinations to identify label type or other information.
Since Codabar is variable-length, discrete, and self-checking, it is a versatile symbology. The width of space between characters is not critical and
may vary significantly within the same symbol. The character set consists
of “0” through “9”, “-”, “$”, “:”, “/”, “.”, and “+”.
The specific dimensions for bars and spaces in Codabar optimize performance of certain early printing and reading equipment. Codabar has 18
different dimensions for bar and space widths. So many different dimensions often result in labels printed out of specification and cause Codabar
printing equipment to be more expensive.
Code 11
Code 11 satisfies the requirements for a very high density, discrete numeric bar code. The name Code 11 derives from 11 different data characters
that can be represented, in addition to a start or stop character.
The character set includes the 10 digits and the dash symbol. Each character is represented by a stand-alone group of three bars and two intervening
spaces. Although Code 11 is discrete, it is not self-checking. A single printing defect can transpose one character into another valid character. One or
two check digits obtain data security.
The specifications for Code 11 suggest that this code should have a narrow
element width of 7.5 mils. This results in an information density of 15
characters per inch.
Code 39
Code 39 (C39) is the most widely used symbology among the industrial
bar codes. Most major companies, trade associations, and the federal government find this code to fit their needs. The main feature of this symbology is the ability to encode messages using the full alphanumeric character
set, seven special characters, and ASCII characters.
Programming for this symbology can be for any length that the application
requires. The application program for the 751G Computer handles
symbology at least one character but no more than 32 characters in length.
404
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies
When programming the computer for Code 39, it is important to set the
symbology limit as close as possible (minimum and maximum bar code
lengths being scanned). Doing so keeps the computer bar code processing
time to a minimum and conserves battery power.
Bar code readers can respond to Uniform Symbology Specification symbols in non-standard ways for particular applications. These methods are
not for general applications, because of the extra programming required.
Code 39 Full ASCII is one example of non-standard code.
Note: See page 398 to scan several Code 39 bar code labels available to
change settings on your 751G Computer.
Encoded Code 39 (Concatenation)
If the first data character of a symbol is a space, the reader may be programmed to append the information contained in the remainder of the
symbol to a storage buffer. This operation continues for all successive symbols that contain a leading space, with messages being added to the end of
previously stored ones. When a message is read which does not contain a
leading space, the contents are appended to the buffer, the entire buffer is
transmitted, and the buffer is cleared.
Encoded Code 39 (Full ASCII)
If the bar code reader is programmed for the task, the entire ASCII character set (128 characters) could be coded using two character sequences: a
symbol (“$”,“.”,“%”,“/”) followed by a letter of the alphabet.
Code 93
The introduction of Code 93 provided a higher density alphanumeric
symbology designed to supplement Code 39. The set of data characters in
Code 93 is identical with that offered with Code 39. Each character consists of nine modules arranged into three bars and three spaces.
Code 93 uses 48 of the 56 possible combinations. One of these characters,
represented by a square, is reserved for a start or stop character, four are
used for control characters, and the remaining 43 data characters coincide
with the Code 39 character set. An additional single module termination
bar after the stop character concludes the final space.
Code 93 is a variable length, continuous code that is not self-checking. Bar
and spaces widths may be one, two, three, or four modules wide. Its structure uses edge-to-similar-edge decoding. This makes the bar code immune
to uniform ink spread, which allows liberal bar width tolerances.
Code 93 uses two check characters. Its supporters believes this makes it the
highest density alphanumeric bar code. The dual check digit scheme provides for high data integrity. All substitution errors in a single character are
detected for any message length.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
405
Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies
Code 128
Code 128 (C128) is one of the newest symbologies used by the retail and
manufacturing industries. It responds to the need for a compact alphanumeric bar code symbol that could encode complex product identification.
The fundamental requirement called for a symbology capable of being
printed by existing data processing printers (primarily dot-matrix printers)
that produce daily, work-in-progress, job, and product traceability documents. The ability to print identification messages between 10 and 32
characters long, on existing forms and labels deemed an important requirement.
Code 128 uniquely addresses this need as the most compact, complete,
alphanumeric symbology available.
Additionally, the Code 128 design with geometric features, improves scanner read performance, does self-checking, and provides data message management function codes.
Code 128 encodes the complete set of 128 ASCII characters without adding extra symbol elements. Code 128 contains a variable-length symbology and the ability to link one message to another for composite message
transmission. Code 128, being a double-density field, provides two numeric values in a single character.
Code 128 follows the general bar code format of start zone, data, check
digit, stop code, and quiet zone. An absolute minimum bar or space dimension of nine mils (0.010 inch minimum nominal ± 0.001 inch tolerance) must be maintained.
Characters in Code 128 consist of three bars and three spaces so that the
total character set includes three different start characters and a stop character.
UCC/EAN-128 Shipping Container Labeling is a versatile tool that can
ease movement of products and information. The Shipping Container Labeling bar code can take any form and usually has meaning only within the
company or facility where applied.
Because this random data can get mistaken later for an industry standard
code format, the UCC and EAN chose a symbology uniquely identified
from these other bar codes. This standard is for maximum flexibility, to
handle the diversity of distribution in global markets by cost efficiency.
The UCC/EAN-128 Container Labeling specification calls for a FUNC1
to immediately follow the bar code’s start character. FUNC1 also follows
any variable-length application field. The specification also calls for the
computer to send “]C1” for the first FUNC1. The specification requires
that the computer send a “” (hex 1D) for subsequent FUNC1 codes
in the bar code.
Because “” is not compatible with computer emulation data streams,
the Uniform Code Council has been asked to change the specification.
This change is made to send the same three character sequence “]C1” to
identify the embedded FUNC1 codes.
406
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies
This implementation should provide for clean application coding by identifying the same sequences for the same scanned codes. If the communication of Norand bar code types is enabled, the Shipping Container Label
codes precede with a “J”. These strings will appear on the computer display. The application may have to allow for strings longer than 48 characters (maximum length indicated in the specification). Actual length variance depends on the number of variable-length data fields. Allowing for 60
characters should be sufficient. Within the Code 128 specification, the
computer can link bar codes together. If this is to happen, allow for more
characters (computer limit is 100 characters).
The Application Identifier Standard, that is part of the UCC/EAN Shipping Label concept, complements, rather than replaces, other UCC/EAN
standards. Most UCC/EAN standards primarily identify products.
Several industries expressed the need to standardize more than product
identification. The UCC/EAN Code 128 Application Identifier Standard
supplies this tool. The standard adds versatility for inter-enterprise exchanges of perishability dating, lot and batch identification, units of use
measure, location codes, and several other information attributes.
For more detailed information on Code 128 UCC/EAN Shipping Label
bar code and Application Identifier Standard, refer to the UCC/EAN-128
Application Identifier Standard specification.
Data Matrix
Data Matrix is a high density 2D matrix code that can store a large
amount of information. It has excellent error correction abilities and is
mostly used for marking and tracking parts.
Data Matrix can store from 1 to about 2000 characters. The symbol is
square and can range from 0.001 inch per side up to 14 inches per side. As
an example of density, 500 numeric-only characters can encode in a 1-inch
square using a 24-pin dot matrix printer.
Data Matrix is used to encode product and serial number information on
electrical rating plates; to mark of surgical instruments in Japan; to identify
lenses, circuit boards, and other items during manufacturing.
EAN (European Article Numbering)
EAN symbology is similar to UPC symbology, except that it contains 13
characters and uses the first two to identify countries.
The EAN symbology is used in the retail environment throughout most of
Europe. Though similar to UPC symbology, these are not interchangeable.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
407
Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies
I 2 of 5 (Interleaved)
I 2 of 5 (Interleaved 2 of 5 Code) is an all-numeric symbology, widely
used for warehouse and heavy industrial applications. Its use has been particularly prevalent in the automobile industry. The I 2 of 5 symbology can
be placed on smaller labels than what the standard UPC symbology requires.
I 2 of 5 also provides a little more flexibility on the type of material it can
print on. Interleaved 2 of 5 Code has its name because of the way the bar
code is configured.
I 2 of 5 bars and spaces both carry information. The bars represent the
odd number position digits, while spaces represent the even number position digits. The two characters are interleaved as one. Messages encoded
with this symbology have to use an even number of characters since two
numeric characters always get interleaved together.
Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5 is a derivitive of Code 11 and is a linear bar code that is only
read by linear imagers. It is limited to the ten digits and start/stop character. Discrete but not self-checking. Matrix 2 of 5 is used with a single
Mmodulo 10 check digit. Compared with Code 11 (using two check digits) and the other industrial symbologies, Matrix 2 of 5 is somewhat more
subject to substitution errors and offers no particular advantage.
MaxiCode
MaxiCode is a fixed-size code which holds up to 93 data characters. The
symbol is composed of a central bulls-eye locator and offset rows of hexagonal elements; the overall dimensions of the symbol are approximately
1.11 x 1.054 inches. Each element measures 0.035 x 0.041 inches.
Created by United Parcel Service, the MaxiCode symbol was designed for
quick automated scanning of packages on high-speed conveyor lines (special cameras can read a MaxiCode on a carton travelling at up to 500 feet
per minute).
PDF417
The PDF417 symbology is a stacked 2D symbology that allows you to
scan across rows of code. Each row consists of start/stop characters, row
identifiers, and symbol characters, which consist of four bars and four
spaces each and contain the actual data. This symbology uses error correction symbol characters appended at the end to recover loss of data.
PDF417 can store up to about 1800 printable ASCII characters or 1100
binary characters per symbol. The symbol is rectangular; the shape of the
symbol can be adjusted to some extent by setting the width and allowing
the height to grow with the data. It is also possible to break large amounts
408
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies
of data into several PDF417 symbols which are logically linked. There is
no theoretical limit on the amount of data that can store in a group of
PDF417 symbols.
The capacity of PDF417 can be helpful in applications where the data
must travel with the labeled item, where a host database is not always available for quick look-up. PDF417 is used for hazardous materials labeling;
storing technical specifications, and calibration data on electronic instruments; encoding fingerprints and photographs on the backs of drivers’ licenses.
The maximum data density is determined by the smallest elements which
can be reliably printed and scanned. Using the smallest recommended element size of 0.0075 inch wide and 0.010 inch high, the maximum data
density in the binary mode is 686 bytes per square inch (106.2 bytes per
square centimeter). In the printable ASCII mode the density is 1144 characters per square inch (177.2 characters per square centimeter).
Micro PDF417
Micro PDF417 is derived from PDF417. The code has a limited set of
symbol sizes and a fixed level of error correction for each symbol size.
Module dimensions are user-specified so that the symbol may be printed
with a variety of printers. The symbology allows up to 150 bytes, 250 alphanumeric characters, or 366 numeric digits to be stored. This is done by
specifying one of three compaction modes: data, text or numeric. Text
Compaction mode permits all printable ASCII characters to be encoded
(values 32 to 126 inclusive) as well as selected control characters. Byte
Compaction mode permits all 256 possible 8-bit byte values to be encoded. This includes all ASCII characters value 0 to 127 inclusive and provides for international character set support
Micro PDF417 is designed for applications where the symbol must be
smaller than PDF417 will allow.
Plessey
Plessey finds its origin in the pulse width modulated (PWM) code developed in England. It is widely used for shelf markings in grocery stores.
Pulse width modulated codes represent each bit of information by a bar
and space pair. A zero bit consists of a narrow bar followed by a wide
space, while a one bit consists of a wide bar followed by a narrow space. It
is mainly a numeric symbology (0-9) with six extra characters available for
assigning any symbol or letter desired.
Plessey codes employ a variety of check characters and a polynomial-based
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC). For start and stop characters, Plessey
employs a 1101 and previously used a 0101.
This symbology is very limited about what information can be encoded. It
is not considered for new applications.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
409
Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies
MSI Code (Variant of Plessey)
The MSI Plessey bar code is a variant of the Plessey bar code. It is a pulsewidth modulated non-self checking code, and is used primarily in store
shelf labeling. Each character consists of eight elements, four bars and four
spaces. The character set includes the digits 0 through 9. A Modulo 10
checksum is appended to the end of the code. For start and stop checks,
MSI employs a single bit pair of 1 as a start symbol and a single bit pair of
0 as a stop symbol. MSI reverses the 1-2-4-8 BCD pattern for bit pair
weighting to 8-6-2-1.
QR Code (Quick Response Code)
QR Code is a 2D matrix symbology containing dark and light square data
modules. It has position detection patterns on three of its for corners and
features direct encodation of the Japanese Kana-Kanji character set. A 2D
imaging device such as a CCD camera is necessary to scan the symbology.
QR Code is designed with selectable levels of error correction. It supports
industry standard escape sequences to define international code pages and
special encodation schemes. QR Code is used for small item marking applications using a wide variety of printing and marking technologies. This
document includes descriptions of the character encodation, symbol structure, reference decode algorithm, and symbol quality measurements for
QR Code.
S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5)
The code S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5 Code) is designed primarily for:
S Warehouse inventory handling
S Identification of photo finishing envelopes
S Airline tickets
S Baggage and cargo handling
The code S 2 of 5 is simple and straightforward. All information is contained in the widths of the bars, with the spaces serving only to separate
the individual bars.
Bars can either be wide or narrow, and the wide bars are usually three
times the widths of the narrow bars. Spaces may be any reasonable width
but are typically equal to the narrow bars. Narrow bars are identified as
zero bits and wide bars as one bits.
Remember the code structure by associating the bar positions from left to
right with weighting factors 1, 2, 4, 7, and parity. Exceptions to this rule
are zero, start, and stop. This code is a discrete code, since the white spaces
between the characters are not part of the code. Because the white spaces
carry no information, their dimensions are not critical.
The S 2 of 5 code is self-checking, meaning a scanner passing through a
printing void would detect the proper ratio of wide bars to total bars.
When the scanner spots an error, a non-read will occur.
410
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies
Telepen
Telepen was devised by George Sims, Managing Director of SB Electronic
Systems Limited, in early 1972, this is the only symbology to directly represent the full ASCII character set without shift characters.Telepen carries
the double-density numeric-only mode and is very compact. The Telepen
symbol is up to 8 ASCII characters or16 digit per inch, and is easy to
print. It has a fixed 3:1 ratio, with a tolerance at least 0.4x. This symbology is extremely secure, with negligible risk of misreading. It is supported
by most leading manufacturers.
UPC (Universal Product Code)
The UPC (Universal Product Code) is the symbology used throughout the
grocery and retail industries. This bar code symbology contains two pieces
of numerical information encoded on the bar code, producer identification, and product identification information.
The UPC symbol is 12 characters long. The first character of the UPC
symbol is a number system character, such as “0” for grocery items and “3”
for drug- and health-related items.
The UPC symbology is for retail environments such as grocery stores, convenience stores, and general merchandise stores.
Some retail items are so small that a standard UPC bar code cannot fit on
the packaging. When this occurs there is a permitted shorter version of the
UPC symbology, referred to as UPC-E. UPC-E is six characters long
(eight including number system and check digit), approximately half the
size of a standard UPC bar code.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
411
Appendix B — Bar Code Symbologies
412
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
I
Index
The Classes and Functions Index covers classes and functions for the 700 Series
Color Mobile Computer.
The General Index covers all topics. Those in italics are figures, those in bold are
tables.
The Files Index is to assist you in locating descriptions for device drivers, applications, utilities, batch files, or other files within this publication.
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
413
Index
Classes and Functions
add_registry_section, [AddReg]
flags, 216
registry_root_string, 216
value_name, 216
AddReg, [DefaultInstall], 212
[AddReg], add_registry_section
flags, 216
registry_root_string, 216
value_name, 216
AddWep(), 263
AppName, [CEStrings], 209
BuildMax, [CEDevice], 210
BuildMin, [CEDevice], 210
[CEDevice]
BuildMax, 210
BuildMin, 210
ProcessorType, 210
UnsupportedPlatforms, 210
VersionMax, 210
VersionMin, 210
CESelfRegister, [DefaultInstall], 212
CESetupDLL, [DefaultInstall], 212
CEShortcuts, [DefaultInstall], 212
[CEShortcuts], shortcut_list_section
shortcut_filename, 217
shortcut_type_flag, 217
target_file/path, 217
target_file_path, 217
CESignature
[SourceDiskNames], 212
[Version], 208
[CEStrings]
AppName, 209
InstallDir, 209
CloseHandle()
DTR printing, 188, 189
IrDA printing, 182
NPCP printing, 183, 184
ConfigureProfile(), 268
Copyfiles, [DefaultInstall], 212
[CopyFiles], file_list_section
destination_filename, 215
flags, 215
source_filename, 215
CreateEvent(), 279
CreateFile()
DTR printing, 188, 189
IrDA printing, 182
414
NPCP printing, 183, 184
[DefaultInstall]
AddReg, 212
CESelfRegister, 212
CESetupDLL, 212
CEShortcuts, 212
Copyfiles, 212
DeregisterDevice(), 183
DTR printing, 188
[DestinationDirs], file_list_section, 214
DeviceIOControl(), 251
DTR printing, 188
NPCP printing, 183
DeviceIoControl(), NPCP printing, 184, 185
disk_ordinal, [SourceDiskNames], 212
DllRegisterServer, 212
DllUnregisterServer, 212
EnableSuppLogging(), 272
EnableWep(), 263
EnableZeroConfig(), 269
EncryptionStatus(), 264
EncryptWepKeyForRegistry(Deprecated), 273
file_list_section
[CopyFiles]
destination_filename, 215
flags, 215
source_filename, 215
[DestinationDirs], 214
filename, [SourceDiskFiles], 213
GetAssociationStatus(), 254
GetAuthenticationMode(), 255
GetBSSID(), 255
GetCCXStatus(), 262
GetCurrentDriverName(), 272
GetDiversity(), 256
GetLinkSpeed(), 256
GetMac(), 257
GetMedia(Deprecated), 273
GetMedium(Deprecated), 273
GetNetworkMode(), 257
GetNetworkType(), 258
GetNicStats(Deprecated), 273
GetPowerMode(), 259
GetRadioIpAddress(), 262
GetRSSI(), 259
GetRTSThreshold(Deprecated), 273
GetSSID(), 258
GetTXPower(), 260
GetWepStatus(), 261
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Index
InstallDir, [CEStrings], 209
isDHCPEnabled(), 271
isOrinoco(), 269
isSupplicantRunning(), 270
isZeroConfigEnabled(), 269
KernelIoControl(), 235
NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275
NLEDSetDevice, 275
OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber, 210
OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMajor, 210
OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMinor, 210
ProcessorType, [CEDevice], 210
Provider, [Version], 208
RadioConnect(), 253
RadioDisassociate(), 254
RadioDisconnect(), 253
ReadFile(), NPCP printing, 183
RegFlushKey(), 123, 225
RegisterDevice(), 183
DTR printing, 188
RegOpenKeyEx(), 278
RegQueryValueEx(), 278
RegSetValueEx(), 278
RemoveWep(), 268
RenewDHCP(), 271
ResetRadioToSystemSave(), 272
SetAuthenticationMode(), 265
SetCCXStatus(), 267
SetChannel(), 265
SetDiversity(Deprecated), 273
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
SetMixedCellMode(), 267
SetNetworkMode(), 266
SetPowerMode(), 266
SetRTSThreshold(Deprecated), 273
SetSSID(), 267
SetTXRate(Deprecated), 273
SHFullScreen(), 225, 226
shortcut_list_section, [CEShortcuts]
shortcut_filename, 217
shortcut_type_flag, 217
target_file/path, 217
target_file_path, 217
Signature, [Version], 208
[SourceDiskFiles], filename, 213
[SourceDiskNames]
CESignature, 212
disk_ordinal, 212
SourceDisksNames.MIPS, 213
SourceDisksNames.SH3, 213
StartScanList(), 270
StartSupplicant(), 270
StopSupplicant(), 271
string_key, [Strings], 209
[Strings], string_key, 209
SwitchPacketDriver(), 273
SYSTEMINFO.dwProcessorType, 210
UnsupportedPlatforms, [CEDevice], 210
[Version]
CESignature, 208
Provider, 208
Signature, 208
VersionMax, [CEDevice], 210
VersionMin, [CEDevice], 210
WriteFile()
DTR printing, 188, 189
IrDA printing, 182
NPCP printing, 183, 184
415
Index
General Index
Numbers
1470 Imager. See Imager
1551/1553 Tethered Scanner
See also Tethered scanner
configuring, 201
reset to factory defaults, 204
troubleshooting, 204
1D laser scanner, about, 191
1D OmniDir Decode Enable, configuration parameter,
328
2D Imager, about, 191
4820 printer, NPCP driver, 183
6804DM printer
DTR driver, 188
IrDA driver, 182
6804T printer
DTR driver, 188
IrDA driver, 182
6805A printer
DTR driver, 188
IrDA driver, 182
6806 printer
DTR driver, 188
IrDA driver, 182
6808 printer
DTR driver, 188
IrDA driver, 182
printer support, 181
681T printer, DTR driver, 188
6820 printer
IrDA driver, 182
NPCP driver, 183
printer support, 181
6920 Communications Server, ManifestName parameter,
229
700 Platform Build, version number, 349
740 Color Computer, 277
781 printers, DTR driver, 188
782T printer, printer support, 181
802.11 CR radio CORE module, 129
installing available modules, 126
loading a module, 126
802.11b
antenna color code, 127
API, 252
channel, 362
communications setup, 129, 361
configuration profiles, 252
CORE module, 129
LEAP
network EAP, 380
WPA encryption, 379
network type, 362
PEAP
network EAP, 369
WPA encryption, 368
416
profile label, 362
profile security information, WEP encryption, 365
profiles, 361
advanced settings, 381
basic information, 362
security information, 363
SSID (network name), 362
TTLS, WPA encryption, 376
WPA encryption, 366
Abstract Syntax Notation.1. See ASN.1
Accessory list, 22
Accounts, via Inbox, 75
ActiveSync
ActiveSync Help, 45
adding programs, 42
adding programs to Start menu, 43
Folder behavior connected to e-mail server, 74
installing applications, 119
Microsoft Reader, 90
Pocket Internet Explorer
favorite links, 94
mobile favorites, 95
Mobile Favorites folder, 94
Start menu icon, 27
URL, 44
Windows Mobile, 44
ActiveX control tools, unit information control panel, CAB
files, 352
AD command, with/without data, 331
Adding bookmarks, Microsoft Reader, 93
Adding drawings to text, Microsoft Reader, 93
Adding programs
ActiveSync, 42
Pocket Internet Explorer, 42
to the Start menu, 43
via ActiveSync, 43
via File Explorer, 43
Windows Mobile, 41
Adjusting settings, Windows Mobile, 41
Adobe Acrobat Reader, URL, 169
AE command, with/without data, 333
Aimer LED Duration, configuration parameter, 324
All-Day events, Calendar, 48
creating, 52
Alpha plane on keypad, 278
Alphanumeric keypad
alpha (blue) key sequences, 15
[gold/white] key sequences, 13
registry settings
alpha plane, 278
gold plane, 278
unshifted plane, 278
scan codes, 281
Ambient lighting, 2
Annotations index, Microsoft Reader, 93
ANT_DIVERSITY, GetDiversity(), 256
ANT_PRIMARY, GetDiversity(), 256
ANT_SECONDARY, GetDiversity(), 256
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Index
Antenna, radio type, 127
APIs
802.11b, 252
AT command interface, 169
IrSock, 182
App launch, control panel applet, 357
Application keys
app launch control panel applet, 357
wakeup mask control panel applet, 356
Appointments
Calendar
adding a note, 54
assigning to a category, 56
changing, 51
creating, 51
deleting, 58
finding, 58
making recurring, 55
setting a reminder, 53
viewing, 49
via Calendar, 46
APS linear imager, about, 191
ASCII
printing, 182
printing to a port, port print method, 182
raw text to printer, 182
ASN.1, 179
Asset management, DeviceURL parameter, 228
AT command interface, 169
testing, 170
Attaching notes to text, Microsoft Reader, 93
Audio, phone application, 167
Audio control panel applet, input mixing, 8
Audio files, Windows Media Player, 89
Audio system
external headset jack, 4
microphone, 4
speaker, 3
AutoCab, command line syntax, 124
AutoFTP, 233
AutoIP, 178
Automatic Private IP. See AutoIP
Automatic shutoff
bar code configuration, 382, 387
configuration parameter, 382
Autostart FTP, 233
AvantGo channels, Pocket Internet Explorer, 96
AXCommunication, 352
AXFileTransfer, 352
AXReaderCommand, 352
AXVWedge, 352
Backlight control panel applet
ambient light sensor, 2
keypad, 11
Backlight timeout
bar code configuration, 383, 387
configuration parameter, 383
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Bar code configuration
audio volume, 382
automatic shutoff, 382
backlight timeout, 383
key clicks, 383
Bar codes
configuration
audio volume, 386
automatic shutoff, 387
backlight timeout, 387
Code 39, 386
key clicks, 388
internal scanner supported symbologies, 195
scanning labels, 386
supported symbologies, 289
symbologies
Codabar, 392
Code 11, 392
Code 128, 394
Code 39, 392
Code 39 concatenation, 393
Code 39 full ASCII, 393
Code 93, 393
Data Matrix, 395
EAN, 395
I 2 of 5, 396
Matrix 2 of 5, 396
MaxiCode, 396
Micro PDF417, 397
MSI code, 398
PDF417, 396
Plessey, 397
QR Code, 398
S 2 of 5, 398
Telepen, 399
UPC, 399
tethered scanner supported symbologies, 205
Basic connect/disconnect functions, 253
Battery
ambient lighting, 2
low battery conditions, 6
RAM maintenance, 6
status, 5
Battery status, unit information control panel applet, 350
Beeper
configuration parameter
frequency, 321
volume, 319, 320
disabling the volume, 320
selecting a volume, 9
silencing the volume, 10
supported functions, 318
volume, turning it on, 7
when not available
beeper frequency, 321
good read beep duration, 323
good read beeps, 322
Bell Mobility activation process, 157
Block recognizer, Windows Mobile input panel, 32
417
Index
BlockSize, FTP Server, 228
Bluealps CORE module
installing available modules, 126
loading a module, 126
Bluetooth
accessing, 174
activating, 174
unit information control panel, main stack CAB file,
351
Bluetooth compatibility, network support, 174
Books, Microsoft Reader
adding bookmarks, 93
adding drawings, 93
annotations index, 93
attaching notes, 93
copying, 93
downloading, 90
highlighting, 93
reading, 92
removing, 93
searching, 93
Browsing the Internet, Pocket Internet Explorer, 97
Build information, software, 18
CAB files
after the extraction, 220
creating, 208
INF files, 208
with CAB Wizard, 223
installation functions, SETUP.DLL, 220
placing files onto storage card, 122
unit information control panel applet, 351
Cabinet Wizard
creating CAB files, 223
troubleshooting, 224
using the application, 208
Cabling, scanner, 199
Calendar
all day events, 48
creating, 52
appointments
adding a note, 54
assigning to a category, 56
changing, 51
creating, 51
deleting, 58
finding, 58
making recurring, 55
setting a reminder, 53
viewing, 49
categories, 47
meetings, sending a request, 57
options, changing, 59
Pocket Outlook, 46
recurrence pattern, 49
Start menu icon, 27
synchronizing, 47
418
Capacitor, internal super, 6
Capturing thoughts and ideas, via Notes, 71
Card support
CompactFlash cards, 19
MultiMediaCards, 19
radios, 21
Secure Digital cards, 19
Carrier, location of ESN, 140
Categories
calendar, 47
contacts, assigning to, 65
CDMA/1xRTT, 134
activation with SB555 Watcher, 140
Bell Mobility, 157
Sprint, 147
Telus, 157
Verizon, 143
WWANInit demo program, 157
antenna color code, 127
AT command set, 169
copying files from web site, 137
via Microsoft ActiveSync, 138
via storage cards, 138
CORE module, 134
location of ESC, 140
setting up, 137
terminology, 137
CEImager
location of the executable file, 122
migrating AUTORUN.DAT files, 122
Channel, 802.11 radio module, 362
ClassID field values
VN_CLASS_ASIC, 237
VN_CLASS_BOOTSTRAP, 237
VN_CLASS_KBD, 237
Clock
restore real-time after cold-boot, 355
setting date and time, 385
Windows Mobile settings, 41
Closing drivers, NPCP, 184
Codabar, 392
configuration parameter, 292
user ID, 311
Code 11, 392
configuration parameter, 306
user ID, 315
Code 128, 394
configuration parameter, 295
FNC1 character, 297
user ID, 311
Code 39, 392
configuration parameter, 290
user ID, 311
Code 93, 393
configuration parameter, 294
length, 294
user ID, 312
Code Division Multiple Access. See CDMA/1xRTT
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Index
Codes
11, 392
128, 394
39, 392
39 concatenation, 393
39 full ASCII, 393
93, 393
Cold boot, IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245
Cold boot, performing, 17
COM A, modem position, 354
COM B, serial position, 354
COM port
configuration, 197
wedge settings, 197
COM1, NPCP parameter, 183
COM1 port, 182
Comm port wedge
disabling, 197
enabling, 196
error messages, 197
limitations, 199
settings, 197
unit information control panel, 351
Command line syntax, AutoCab, 124
Common Object Resource Environment. See CORE
Communications
DTR, 189
NPCP, 186
Communications options, 125
CompactFlash cards
card support, 19
installing applications, 120
migrating applications, 122
packaging an application, 118
Computer shutdown, 6
Concatenation, 393
Configuration parameters
1D OmniDir decode enable, 328
aimer LED duration, 324
automatic shutoff, 382
backlight timeout, 383
beeper, 319
frequency, 321
volume, 320
codabar, 292
user ID, 311
code 11, 306
user ID, 315
code 128, 295
FNC1 character, 297
user ID, 311
code 39, 290
user ID, 311
code 93, 294
length, 294
user ID, 312
datamatrix, 308
date/time, 383
EAN
13 user ID, 314
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
8 user ID, 314
good read
beep duration, 323
beeps, 322
identification
contact, 345
location, 347
name, 346
image dimension, 326
interleaved 2 of 5, 303
user ID, 312
key clicks, 383
lighting mode, 327
macro PDF, 300
matrix 2 of 5, 304
user ID, 314
maxicode, 309
micro PDF417, 302
MSI, 299
user ID, 312
PDF417, 300
user ID, 312
plessey, 298
user ID, 313
prefix, 316
QR code, 307
security
encryption key, 342
read encryption, 340
read-only community string, 338
read/write community string, 339
write encryption, 341
SNMP, security subnet mask, 310
standard 2 of 5, 291
user ID, 313
sticky aimer duration, 325
suffix, 317
telepen, 305
user ID, 314
trap
authentication, 343
threshold, 344
UPC
A user ID, 313
E user ID, 313
UPC/EAN, 293
virtual wedge, 329
code page, 335
grid, 334
postamble, 332
preamble, 330
volume, 382
Connecting to
an ISP, 98
e-mail server, 114
work, 104
Connecting to a mail server, via Inbox, 75
419
Index
Connections
See also Getting connected
directly to e-mail server, 114
ending, 114
setting up an e-mail account, 114
to an ISP, 98
via Ethernet, 103
via modem, 98
to work, 104
via Ethernet, 113
via modem, 106
via VPN server, 111
via wireless network, 108
via Ethernet
to an ISP, 103
to work, 113
via modem
to an ISP, 98
to work, 106
via VPN server, to work, 111
via wireless network, to work, 108
Conserving battery power, 2
Contacts
adding a note, 64
assigning to a category, 65
changing, 63
changing options, 68
copying, 65
creating, 61, 63
deleting, 67
finding, 67
MSN Messenger
managing, 87
sending messages, 88
working with, 86
Pocket Outlook, 60
sending a message, 66
Start menu icon, 27
synchronizing, 61
viewing, 62
Control panel applets
Audio, 8
backlight, 2, 11
clock, 385
data collection, 288
beeper volume, 9
beeper/LED, 318
imager, 324
symbologies, 289
symbology options, 310
vibrator, 20
virtual wedge, 329
intemec settings
beeper volume, 10
vibrator, 21
420
intermec settings, 288, 336
power
battery status, 5
RAM maintenance, 6
SNMP, 337
identification, 345
security, 338
traps, 343
system, wireless network, 129, 361
unit information, 348
battery status, 5, 350
CAB files, 351
versions, 18, 349
utilities, 353
app launch, 357
dock switch, 354
registry save, 123, 355
wakeup mask, 356
wireless network, 359
Converting writing to text, 35
Copying, contacts, 65
Copying text, Microsoft Reader, 93
CORE, 126
802.11b radio module, 129
details, 131
general, 130
accessing from
Programs panel, 126
Today screen, 127
activating, 126
installing available modules, 126
loading a module, 126
module for 802.11b NIC, 252
WAN monitor, GSM/GPRS, 164
WAN radio module
CDMA/1xRTT, 134
general, 164
Creating
a modem connection
to an ISP, 98
to work, 106
a VPN server connection, to work, 111
a wireless network connection, to work, 108
an Ethernet connection
to an ISP, 103
to work, 113
CAB files, 208
with CAB Wizard, 223
contacts via Contacts, 61
document via Pocket Word, 78
drawing via Notes, 37
INF files, 208
note via Notes, 71
task via Tasks, 70
workbook via Pocket Excel, 82
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Index
Data collection
build version number, 349
configuration parameters
1D OmniDir decode enable, 328
aimer LED duration, 324
beeper, 319
beeper frequency, 321
beeper volume, 320
codabar, 292
codabar user ID, 311
code 11, 306
code 11 user ID, 315
code 128, 295
code 128 FNC1 character, 297
code 128 user ID, 311
code 39, 290
code 39 user ID, 311
code 93, 294
code 93 length, 294
code 93 user ID, 312
datamatrix, 308
EAN-13 user ID, 314
EAN-8 user ID, 314
good read beep duration, 323
good read beeps, 322
image dimension, 326
interleaved 2 of 5, 303
interleaved 2 of 5 user ID, 312
lighting mode, 327
macro PDF, 300
matrix 2 of 5, 304
matrix 2 of 5 user ID, 314
maxicode, 309
micro PDF417, 302
MSI, 299
MSI user ID, 312
PDF417, 300
PDF417 user ID, 312
plessey, 298
plessey user ID, 313
prefix, 316
QR code, 307
standard 2 of 5, 291
standard 2 of 5 user ID, 313
sticky aimer duration, 325
suffix, 317
telepen, 305
telepen user ID, 314
UPC-E user ID, 313
UPC-A user ID, 313
UPC/EAN, 293
virtual wedge, 329
virtual wedge code page, 335
virtual wedge grid, 334
virtual wedge postamble, 332
virtual wedge preamble, 330
vibrator, 20
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Data Matrix, 395
configuration parameter, 308
Date, setting, 385
Date/Time, configuration parameter, 383
Deprecated functions, 273
DeviceName, FTP Server, 228
DeviceURL, FTP Server, 228
DHCP, 178
Display full screen, 226
Dock switch, control panel applet, 354
Docks, modem support, 16
DRAM
low battery shutdown, 6
maintenance, 6
Drawing mode, Pocket Word, 81
Drawing on the screen
See also Notes
Pocket Word, 81
Drivers
DTR
communications, 189
installing, 188
opening, 189
removing, 188
writing to, 189
NPCP
closing, 184
communications, 186
I/O controls, 185
installing, 183
opening, 184
reading from, 184
removing, 183
writing to, 184
O’Neil. See DTR printing
DTR printing, 188
closing driver, 189
communications, 189
opening driver, 189
removing driver, 188
writing to driver, 189
E-mail account, setting up an account, 114
E-mail server, getting connected, 114
EAN, configuration parameter, 293
13 user ID, 314
8 user ID, 314
Editing a profile, 361
Edition information, 24
Encoded Code 39
concatenation, 393
full ASCII, 393
Ending a connection, 114
Epson Escape Sequences, 182
Error messages
comm port wedge, 197
tethered scanner, 197
421
Index
ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240
ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240
ESN, location on computer, 140
Ethernet
communications setup, 128
creating a connection
to an ISP, 103
to work, 113
ETSI GSM 07.05 interface specifications, 169
ETSI GSM 07.07 interface specifications, 169
European Article Numbering. See EAN
European Article Numbering code. See EAN
Favorite links, Pocket Internet Explorer, 94
File Explorer
adding programs to Start menu, 43
removing programs, 43
Windows Mobile, 40
File Transfer Protocol. See FTP
Find feature, Windows Mobile, 40
Flash File Store
migrating applications, 122
packaging an application, 118
Flash file system, control panel applet, 355
Folder behavior connected to e-mail server
ActiveSync, 74
IMAP4, 74
POP3, 74
SMS, 74
FRAME_NOT_ACKED, 185
FTP
client, 230
configurable parameters, 228
BlockSize, 228
DeviceName, 228
DeviceURL, 228
IDNATarget, 229
ManifestName, 229
PauseAtStartup, 229
Root, 229
FTPDCMDS subdirectory, 232
heartbeat, 230
RTC 959, 232
server, 230
installing applications, 120
server requests
CDUP, 230
CWD, 230
DELE, 230
HELP, 230
LIST, 230
MKD, 230
MODE, 230
NLST, 230
NOOP, 230
422
PASS, 230
PWD, 230
QUIT, 230
RETR, 230
RMD, 230
RNFR, 230
RNTO, 230
SITE, 231
SITE ATTRIB, 231
SITE BOOT, 231
SITE COPY, 231
SITE EKEY, 232
SITE EVAL, 232
SITE EXIT, 231
SITE GVAL, 232
SITE HELP, 231
SITE KILL, 231
SITE LOG, 231
SITE PLIST, 231
SITE PVAL, 232
SITE RUN, 231
SITE STATUS, 232
SITE TIMEOUT, 232
STOR, 230
SYST, 230
TYPE, 230
USER, 230
XCUP, 230
XCWD, 230
XMKD, 230
XPWD, 230
XRMD, 230
stopping server from application, 233
support, 230
web browsers, 232
FTPDCMDS subdirectory, FTP support, 232
Full screen display, 226
GDI approach, 182
General Packet Radio Service. See GSM/GPRS
Getting connected
directly to an e-mail server, 114
ISP, 98
setting up an e-mail account, 114
to an ISP, 98
creating a modem connection, 98
creating an Ethernet connection, 103
to work, 104
creating a modem connection, 106
creating a VPN server connection, 111
creating a wireless network connection, 108
creating an Ethernet connection, 113
Windows Mobile, 98
Gold plane on keypad, 277
Good read, configuration parameter
beep duration, 323
beeps, 322
Grid data, configuration parameter, 334
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Index
GSM/GPRS, 164
antenna color code, 127
AT command set, MC45, 169
CORE module, 164
phone application, 166
HAL, verion of Pocket PC
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO,
244
IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243
Handset
phone application, 166
volume, 168
Headset jack, external, 4
Helper functions, 268
Highlighting text, Microsoft Reader, 93
I 2 of 5. See Interleaved 2 of 5
I/O controls, NPCP driver, 185
ID field values
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM
ITC_NVPARM_80211_INSTALLED, 238
ITC_NVPARM_80211_RADIOTYPE, 238
ITC_NVPARM_ANTENNA_DIVERSITY, 237
ITC_NVPARM_BLUETOOTH_INSTALLED,
239
ITC_NVPARM_CONTRAST, 237
ITC_NVPARM_DISPLAY_TYPE, 237
ITC_NVPARM_ECN, 237
ITC_NVPARM_EDBG_SUBNET, 237
ITC_NVPARM_EDG_IP, 237
ITC_NVPARM_ETHERNET_ID, 236
ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_HW, 238
ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_SW, 238
ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_SOFTWARE_CONTENT, 237
ITC_NVPARM_LAN9000_INSTALLED, 239
ITC_NVPARM_MANF_DATE, 236
ITC_NVPARM_MCODE, 237
ITC_NVPARM_RTC_RESTORE, 238
ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL_NUM, 236
ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL2_INSTALLED, 239
ITC_NVPARM_SERVICE_DATE, 236
ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_HW_INSTALLED, 239
ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_SW_INSTALLED, 239
ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER, 237
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
ITC_NVPARM_VIBRATE_INSTALLED, 239
ITC_NVPARM_WAN_FREQUENCY, 238
ITC_NVPARM_WAN_INSTALLED, 238
ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RADIOTYPE, 238
ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RI, 237
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM
ITC_ DOCK_SWITCH, 241
ITC_ WAKEUP_MASK, 241
ITC_AMBIENT_FRONTLIGHT, 241
ITC_AMBIENT_KEYBOARD, 241
ITC_REGISTRY_SAVE_ENABLE, 241
Identification, configuration parameter
contact, 345
location, 347
name, 346
IDNA
DeviceName, 228
DeviceURL, 228
IDNATarget, 229
ManifestName, 229
IDNATarget, FTP Server, 229
Image dimension, configuration parameter, 326
Imager
beeper functions not available
beeper frequency, 321
good read beep duration, 323
good read beeps, 322
beeper/LED parameters, beeper, 319
control panel appet, data collection, 324
data collection parameters
1D OmniDir decode enable, 328
aimer LED duration, 324
datamatrix, 308
image dimension, 326
lighting mode, 327
maxicode, 309
QR code, 307
sticky aimer duration, 325
settings, 198
supported
beeper functions, 318
functions, 324
symbologies, 289
symbologies not available
CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical, 296
Code 11, 306
Code 128 FNC1 character, 297
EAN 128 ]C1, 296
Macro PDF, 300
Matrix 2 of 5, 304
micro PDF417, 302
Telepen, 305
423
Index
symbology user IDs not available
Codabar, 311
Code 11, 315
Code 128, 311
Code 39, 311
Code 93, 312
EAN 13, 314
EAN 8, 314
Interleaved 2 of 5, 312
Matrix 2 of 5, 314
MSI, 312
PDF417, 312
Plessey, 313
Standard 2 of 5, 313
Telepen, 314
UPC A, 313
UPC E, 313
vibrator, enabling, 20
IMAP4, Folder behavior connected to e-mail server, 74
Inbox
accounts, 75
composing/sending messages, 77
connecting to a mail server, 75
downloading messages from server, 76
getting connected, 98
managing e-mail messages and folders, 74
Pocket Outlook, 73
Start menu icon, 27
synchronizing e-mail messages, 73
using My Text, 39
INF files, creating, 208
Input Mixing, Audio control panel applet, 8
Input panel
block recognizer, 32
keyboard, 31
letter recognizer, 33
Pocket Word, 79
selecting typed text, 33
transcriber, 33
Windows Mobile, 28
word suggestions, 31
Installation functions, SETUP.DLL, 220
Installing applications
using a storage card, 120
using CompactFlash cards, 120
using Secure Digital cards, 121
with ActiveSync, 119
with FTP Server, 120
Installing drivers
DTR, 188
NPCP, 183
Instant messaging, 84
Integrated scanners. See Internal scanners
Interface specifications, ETSI GSM 07.0x, 169
Interleaved 2 of 5, 396
configuration parameter, 303
user ID, 312
Intermec Device Network Announcement. See IDNA
Intermec part numbers, 22
424
Intermec settings, 288, 336
beeper volume, 10
vibrator, 21
INTERMEC_PACKET_DRIVER, SwitchPacketDriver(),
273
Internal scanners
configuring, 194
supported symbologies, 195
Internet explorer
software build version, 18
Windows Mobile 2003 edition, 24
Internet Service Provider. See ISP
IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250
IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245, 276
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 244
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 235
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242
IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243
IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248, 276
IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245, 276
IOCTL_LOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, 251
IOCTL_NPCP_BIND, 185
IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL, 185
IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE, 185
IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR, 185
IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH, 185
IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249
IOCTL_UNLOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, 251
IrDA printing, 182
ISP
connecting to via Windows Mobile, 98
creating
a modem connection, 98
an Ethernet connection, 103
Pocket Internet Explorer, 94
Windows Mobile, 98
ITC_ DOCK_SWITCH, 241
ITC_ WAKEUP_MASK, 241
ITC_AMBIENT_FRONTLIGHT, 241
ITC_AMBIENT_KEYBOARD, 241
ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_INTEL_2011B, 238
ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_MAX values
ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_INTEL_2011B, 238
ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_NONE, 238
ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_NONE, 238
ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC_EVIO, 238
ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC2D_IMAGER, 238
ITC_DEVID_OEM2D_IMAGER, 238
ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_MAX values
ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC_EVIO, 238
ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC2D_IMAGER, 238
ITC_DEVID_OEM2D_IMAGER, 238
ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_NONE, 238
ITC_DEVID_SE900_LASER, 238
ITC_DEVID_SE900HS_LASER, 238
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Index
ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_NONE, 238
ITC_DEVID_SE900_LASER, 238
ITC_DEVID_SE900HS_LASER, 238
ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_NONE, 238
ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIEMENS_MC45, 238
ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIERRA_SB555, 238
ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_XIRCOM_GEM3503, 238
ITC_IFTP_STOP, 233
ITC_KEYBOARD_CHANGE, CreateEvent(), 279
ITC_NVPARM_80211_INSTALLED, 238
ITC_NVPARM_80211_RADIOTYPE, 238
ITC_NVPARM_ANTENNA_DIVERSITY, 237
ITC_NVPARM_BLUETOOTH_INSTALLED, 239
ITC_NVPARM_CONTRAST, 237
ITC_NVPARM_DISPLAY_TYPE, 237
ITC_NVPARM_ECN, 237
ITC_NVPARM_EDBG_SUBNET, 237
ITC_NVPARM_EDG_IP, 237
ITC_NVPARM_ETHERNET_ID, 236
ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_HW, 238
ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_SW, 238
ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_SOFTWARE_CONTENT, 237
ITC_NVPARM_LAN9000_INSTALLED, 239
ITC_NVPARM_MANF_DATE, 236
ITC_NVPARM_MCODE, 237
ITC_NVPARM_RTC_RESTORE, 238
ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL_NUM, 236
ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL2_INSTALLED, 239
ITC_NVPARM_SERVICE_DATE, 236
ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_HW_INSTALLED,
239
ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_SW_INSTALLED,
239
ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER, 237
ITC_NVPARM_VIBRATE_INSTALLED, 239
ITC_NVPARM_WAN_FREQUENCY, 238
ITC_NVPARM_WAN_INSTALLED, 238
ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RADIOTYPE, 238
ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RI, 237
ITC_REGISTRY_SAVE_ENABLE, 241
ITU-T interface specifications, 169
Keeping a to-do list, via Tasks, 69
KernelIoControl
IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250
IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245, 276
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO,
244
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 235
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242
IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243
IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248, 276
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245, 276
IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249
Key clicks
bar code configuration, 383, 388
configuration parameter, 383
Key sequences
alpha (blue) keys
alphanumeric, 15
numeric, 14
[gold] keys, numeric, 12
[gold/white] keys, alphanumeric, 13
Keyboard
See also Keypad
Windows Mobile input panel, 31
Keypad
advanced remapping, 279
alphanumeric
alpha (blue) key sequences, 15
[gold/white] key sequences, 13
scan codes, 281
backlight control panel applet, 11
change notification, 279
driver registry settings, 279
numeric
alpha (blue) key sequences, 14
[gold] key sequences, 12
scan codes, 280
planes, 277
remapping, 277
sample registry keys, 283
Laser scanner
configuration parameters, 286
data collection parameters
beeper frequency, 321
beeper volume, 320
codabar, 292
codabar user ID, 311
code 11, 306
code 11 user ID, 315
code 128, 295
code 128 FNC1 character, 297
code 128 user ID, 311
code 39, 290
code 39 user ID, 311
code 93, 294
code 93 length, 294
code 93 user ID, 312
EAN-13 user ID, 314
EAN-8 user ID, 314
good read beep duration, 323
good read beeps, 322
interleaved 2 of 5, 303
interleaved 2 of 5 user ID, 312
macro PDF, 300
matrix 2 of 5, 304
matrix 2 of 5 user ID, 314
micro PDF417, 302
MSI, 299
425
Index
MSI user ID, 312
PDF417, 300
PDF417 user ID, 312
plessey, 298
plessey user ID, 313
prefix, 316
standard 2 of 5, 291
standard 2 of 5 user ID, 313
suffix, 317
telepen, 305
telepen user ID, 314
UPC-E user ID, 313
UPC-A user ID, 313
UPC/EAN, 293
virtual wedge, 329
virtual wedge code page, 335
virtual wedge grid, 334
virtual wedge postamble, 332
virtual wedge preamble, 330
SNMP configuration parameters
identification contact, 345
identification location, 347
identification name, 346
security encryption key, 342
security read encryption, 340
security read-only community string, 338
security read/write community string, 339
security subnet mask, 310
security write encryption, 341
trap authentication, 343
trap threshold, 344
supported
beeper functions, 318
symbologies, 289
symbologies not available
Datamatrix, 307
datamatrix, 308
maxicode, 309
LEAP
802.11 radio module
network EAP, 380
WPA encryption, 379
profile security information, 378
WEP encryption, 378
Letter recognizer, Windows Mobile input panel, 33
Library, Microsoft Reader, 91
Lighting Mode, configuration parameter, 327
Line printing, 182
lpBytesReturned
IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO,
244
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 235
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242
IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243
IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240
IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249
426
lpInBuf
IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250
IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO,
244
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 235
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242
IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243
IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248
IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245
IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249
lpInBufSize
IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250
IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 235
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242
IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243
IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248
IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245
lpOutBuf
IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250
IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO,
244
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 235
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242
IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243
IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248
IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245
IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249
LPT9 printer device, 183
Macro PDF, configuration parameter, 300
Managing e-mail messages and folders, via Inbox, 74
ManifestName, FTP Server, 229
Matrix 2 of 5, 396
configuration parameter, 304
user ID, 314
MaxiCode, 396
configuration parameter, 309
Meetings
Calendar, sending a request, 57
via Calendar, 46
Menus, Windows Mobile settings, 41
Messages
sending to, contacts, 66
via Inbox
composing/sending, 77
downloading from server, 76
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Index
MIBs
ASN.1, 179
files, 179
object identifier, 180
OIDs, 180
Micro PDF417, 397
configuration parameter, 302
Microphone, 4
phone application, 166
Microsoft Developer Network Library. See MSDN library
Microsoft Exchange e-mail account, 84
Microsoft Passport account, 84
Microsoft Reader
books
downloading, 90
reading, 92
removing, 93
features, 93
adding bookmarks, 93
adding drawings, 93
annotations index, 93
attaching notes, 93
copying text, 93
highlighting text, 93
searching for text, 93
using the library, 91
Windows Mobile, 90
Microsoft’s Wireless Zero Config, 361
Migrating applications
Flash File Store, 122
CompactFlash storage cards, 122
Secure Digital storage cards, 122
Migrating to a 700 Color Computer, 124
Mobile Favorites, Pocket Internet Explorer, 95
Mobile Favorites folder, Pocket Internet Explorer, 94
Modem position, COM A, 354
Modems, creating a connection
to an ISP, 98
to work, 106
MP3 files, Windows Media Player, 89
MSDN library, 233
MSDN Windows CE documentation, 178
MSI, 398
configuration parameter, 299
user ID, 312
MSN Messenger
about, 84
accounts
Microsoft Exchange e-mail, 84
Microsoft Passport, 84
contacts
managing, 87
sending messages, 88
working with, 86
setting up an account, 85
using My Text, 39
MultiMediaCards, card support, 19
nDeviceId, NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_ENABLED
EncryptionStatus(), 264
GetWepStatus(), 261
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_KEY_ABSENT
EncryptionStatus(), 264
GetWepStatus(), 261
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_ENABLED
EncryptionStatus(), 264
GetWepStatus(), 261
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_KEY_ABSENT
EncryptionStatus(), 264
GetWepStatus(), 261
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_ENABLED
EncryptionStatus(), 264
GetWepStatus(), 261
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_KEY_ABSENT
EncryptionStatus(), 264
GetWepStatus(), 261
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_DISABLED
EncryptionStatus(), 264
GetWepStatus(), 261
NDIS_ENCRYPTION_NOT_SUPPORTED
EncryptionStatus(), 264
GetWepStatus(), 261
NDIS_MIXED_CELL_OFF, SetMixedCellMode(), 267
NDIS_MIXED_CELL_ON, SetMixedCellMode(), 267
NDIS_NET_AUTO_UNKNOWN
GetNetworkMode(), 257
SetNetworkMode(), 266
NDIS_NET_MODE_ESS
GetNetworkMode(), 257
SetNetworkMode(), 266
NDIS_NET_MODE_IBSS
GetNetworkMode(), 257
SetNetworkMode(), 266
NDIS_NET_MODE_UNKNOWN
GetNetworkMode(), 257
SetNetworkMode(), 266
NDIS_NET_TYPE_DS, GetNetworkType(), 258
NDIS_NET_TYPE_FH, GetNetworkType(), 258
NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_2_4G
GetNetworkMode(), 257
SetNetworkMode(), 266
NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_5G
GetNetworkMode(), 257
SetNetworkMode(), 266
NDIS_NET_TYPE_UNDEFINED, GetNetworkType(),
258
NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_OFF
GetCCXStatus(), 262
SetCCXStatus(), 267
NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_ON
GetCCXStatus(), 262
SetCCXStatus(), 267
NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_1, GetTXPower(), 260
NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_15, GetTXPower(), 260
NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_30, GetTXPower(), 260
NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_5, GetTXPower(), 260
NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_63, GetTXPower(), 260
427
Index
NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_UNKNOWN, GetTXPower(),
260
NDIS_RADIO_ASSOCIATED, GetAssocationStatus(),
254
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_AUTO
GetAuthenticationMode(), 255
SetAuthenticationMode(), 265
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_ERROR
GetAuthenticationMode(), 255
SetAuthenticationMode(), 265
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_OPEN
GetAuthenticationMode(), 255
SetAuthenticationMode(), 265
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_SHARED
GetAuthenticationMode(), 255
SetAuthenticationMode(), 265
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA
GetAuthenticationMode(), 255
SetAuthenticationMode(), 265
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_NONE
GetAuthenticationMode(), 255
SetAuthenticationMode(), 265
NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_PSK
GetAuthenticationMode(), 255
SetAuthenticationMode(), 265
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_AUTO
GetPowerMode(), 259
SetPowerMode(), 266
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAM
GetPowerMode(), 259
SetPowerMode(), 266
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_FAST_PSP
GetPowerMode(), 259
SetPowerMode(), 266
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_PSP
GetPowerMode(), 259
SetPowerMode(), 266
NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKNOWN
GetPowerMode(), 259
SetPowerMode(), 266
NDIS_RADIO_SCANNING, GetAssociationStatus(), 254
NDIS_SUPP_LOGGING_OFF, EnableSuppLogging(),
272
NDIS_SUPP_LOGGING_ON, EnableSuppLogging(),
272
NDISUIO_PACKET_DRIVER, SwitchPacketDriver(),
273
Network adapters
802.11b, 129
antenna color code, 127
Ethernet communications, 128
no networking, 132
428
wireless printing, 174
WWAN radio options, 134
Network EAP
LEAP security method, 380
PEAP security method, 369
Network type, 802.11 radio module, 362
nInBufSize
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO,
244
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240
IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249
nInfoId, NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275
NLED driver, vibrator, 274
NLED_COUNT_INFO, NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275
NLED_SETTINGS_INFO_ID
NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275
NLEDSetDevice, 275
NLED_SUPPORTS_INFO_ID, NLEDGetDeviceInfo,
275
Notes
adding to
appointments, 54
contacts, 64
creating a note, 71
drawing on the screen, 37
creating a drawing, 37
selecting a drawing, 37
Pocket Outlook, 71
recording a message, 38
Start menu icon, 27
synchronizing notes, 72
writing on the screen, 34
alternate writing, 35
converting writing to text, 35
selecting the writing, 34
tips for good recognition, 36
nOutBufSize
IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250
IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO,
244
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 235
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242
IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243
IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248
IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245
IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Index
NPCP printing, 183
about, 183
closing driver, 184
COM1 parameters, 183
communications, 186
driver I/O controls, 185
installation, 183
LPT9, 183
opening driver, 184
reading from driver, 184
removal, 183
sample code, 186
unit information control panel, NPCPTEST CAB file,
351
writing to driver, 184
Numeric keypad
alpha (blue) key sequences, 14
[gold] key sequences, 12
registry settings
alpha plane, 278
gold plane, 278
unshifted plane, 278
scan codes, 280
O’Neil printing
See also DTR printer
installing driver, 188
Object Store, packaging an application, 118
Object store
IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248
IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245
Oldstyle device ID, 242
Opening drivers
DTR, 189
NPCP, 184
Owner information, Windows Mobile settings, 41
Packaging an application
CompactFlash storage cards, 118
Flash File Store, 118
Object Store, 118
Persistent Storage Manager, 118
Secure Digital storage cards, 118
Page format printing, 182
Password
Pocket Excel, 82
Windows Mobile settings, 41
PauseAtStartup, FTP Server, 229
PB20 printers, printer support, 181
PDF417, 396
about the laser scanner, 191
configuration parameter, 300
user ID, 312
PEAP
802.11 radio module
network EAP, 369
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
WPA encryption, 368
profile security information, 367
WEP encryption, 367
Performing a cold boot, 17
Persistent Storage Manager. See PSM
Phone jack position, control panel applet, 354
PhoneUtility, 166
ring, 167
vibrate, 167
pInput, NLEDSetDevice, 275
Planes, keypad, 277
Plessey, 397
configuration parameter, 298
user ID, 313
Pocket Excel
about, 82
creating a workbook, 82
Pocket Internet Explorer
about, 94
adding programs, 42
AvantGo channels, 96
browsing the Internet, 97
favorite links, 94
getting connected, 98
mobile favorites, 95
Mobile Favorites folder, 94
software build, 18
Start menu icon, 27
viewing mobile favorites and channels, 97
Pocket Outlook, 46
Calendar, 46
Pocket PC
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO,
244
IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243
Pocket Word
about, 78
creating a document, 78
drawing mode, 81
recording mode, 80
synchronizing, 81
tips, 83
typing mode, 79
writing mode, 80
POP3, Folder behavior connected to e-mail server, 74
Postamble
configuration parameter, 332
with/without data, 333
pOutput, NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275
Power
control panel
battery status, 5
RAM maintenance, 6
Windows Mobile settings, 41
Preamble
configuration parameter, 330
with/without data, 331
Prefix, configuration parameter, user ID, 316
429
Index
Printer support, 182
IrDA printer driver, 182
NPCP printer driver, 183
O’Neil printer driver, 188
Processor information, IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249
Profile label, 802.11 radio module, 362
Profiles
802.11 radio module, 361
advanced settings, 381
basic information, 362
security information, 363
editing, 361
Programs, adding or removing, Windows Mobile, 41
PSM
determining build version, 16
packaging an application, 118
PSM build, 288
QR Code, 398
QR code, configuration parameter, 307
Query Information functions, 254
Quick Response Code. See QR Code
Quick Response code. See QR code
Radios
See also Network adapters
card support, 21
Reader commands, 384
configuration change, 384
date and time settings, 385
Reading from drivers, NPCP, 184
Real-Time Clock, restore after cold-boot, 355
Reboot methods
IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 276
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 276
IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 276
Record button, recording a message, 38
Recording, via Notes, 38
Recording a message, Pocket Word, 80
Recording mode, Pocket Word, 80
Recovery CD
AutoCab method, 124
AUTOUSER.DAT file, 123
RegFlushKey() API, 225
S9C upgrade, 352
updating the system software, 121
Recurrence pattern, Calendar, 49
RegFlush utility, 123
Registry
FTP Server parameters, 228
keypad remapping, 279
sample view of key mapping, 283
save location, IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM,
240
writing to a storage card, 123
Registry Save, control panel applet, 355
430
Registry settings
AutoCfg, 178
AutoFTP, 234
AutoInterval, 178
AutoIP/DHCP, 178
DhcpMaxRetry, 178
DhcpRetryDialogue, 178
EnableDHCP, 178
keypad driver, 279
keypad planes
alpha, 278
gold, 278
unshifted, 278
Removing drivers
DTR, 188
NPCP, 183
Removing programs, Windows Mobile, 41, 43
Reset button, 17
RFC 959, 232
Root, FTP Server, 229
RTC. See Real-Time Clock
S 2 of 5. See Standard 2 of 5
S9C
unit information control panel, upgrade files, 352
version number, 349
Sabre 1551E or 1553
See also Tethered scanner
cabling, 199
settings, 198
Sample code, NPCP printing, 186
SB555 Watcher
activation, 140
Bell Mobility, 157
Sprint, 147
Telus, 157
Verizon, 143
WWANInit demo program, 157
copying files to computer, 137
via Microsoft ActiveSync, 138
via storage cards, 138
location of ESN, 140
Scan codes
alphanumeric keypad, 281
numeric keypad, 280
SCAN Mute, Audio control panel applet, 8
Scanner
beeper volume
selecting, 9
turning it off, 10
turning it on, 7
mute feature, turning it off, 8
unit configuration parameters
automatic shutoff, 382
backlight timeout, 383
date/time, 383
key clicks, 383
volume, 382
utilities configuration, button wakeup mask, 356
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Index
Scanner cabling, 199
Scheduling appointments and meetings, via Calendar, 46
SDK, unit information control panel, 352
SDMMC Disk, 122
Searching for text, Microsoft Reader, 93
Secure Digital cards
card support, 19
installing applications, 120, 121
migrating applications, 122
packaging an application, 118
Security, configuration parameter
encryption key, 342
read encryption, 340
read-only community string, 338
read/write community string, 339
subnet mask, 310
write encryption, 341
Selecting, drawing via Notes, 37
Sending and receiving messages, via Inbox, 73
Serial port, modem support, 16
Serial position, COM B, 354
Set information functions, 263
Setting date and time, 385
Setting up an e-mail account, 114
SETUP.DLL, installation functions, 220
SIM cards
IMSI assigned
CDMA/1xRTT, 136
GSM/GPRS, 165
installation status, GSM/GPRS, 165
phone number assigned, GSM/GPRS, 164
protection hardware, 239
protection software, 239
software installed, 239
Simple Network Management Protocol. See SNMP
SMS, Folder behavior connected to e-mail server, 74
Snap-on modems, 16
SNMP, 179
configuration parameters
identification contact, 345
identification location, 347
identification name, 346
security encryption key, 342
security read encryption, 340
security read-only community string, 338
security read/write community string, 339
security subnet mask, 310
security write encryption, 341
trap authentication, 343
trap threshold, 344
SNMP OIDs
1D OmniDir decode enable, 328
aimer LED duration, 324
automatic shutoff, 382
backlight timeout, 383
beeper, 319
frequency, 321
volume, 320
codabar, 292
user ID, 311
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
code 11, 306
user ID, 315
code 128, 295
FNC1 character, 297
user ID, 311
code 39, 290
user ID, 311
code 93, 294
length, 294
user ID, 312
datamatrix, 308
date/time, 383
EAN
13 user ID, 314
8 user ID, 314
good read
beep duration, 323
beeps, 322
identification
contact, 345
location, 347
name, 346
image dimension, 326
interleaved 2 of 5, 303
user ID, 312
key clicks, 383
lighting mode, 327
macro PDF, 300
matrix 2 of 5, 304
user ID, 314
maxicode, 309
micro PDF417, 302
MSI, 299
user ID, 312
PDF417, 300
user ID, 312
plessey, 298
user ID, 313
prefix, 316
QR code, 307
security
encryption key, 342
read encryption, 340
read-only community string, 338
read/write community string, 339
write encryption, 341
security subnet mask, 310
standard 2 of 5, 291
user ID, 313
sticky aimer duration, 325
suffix, 317
telepen, 305
user ID, 314
trap
authentication, 343
threshold, 344
UPC
A user ID, 313
E user ID, 313
UPC/EAN, 293
431
Index
virtual wedge, 329
code page, 335
grid, 334
postamble, 332
preamble, 330
volume, 382
Software Developer’s Kit. See SDK
Software versions, 18, 349
700 Series Computer, 18
unit information control panel applet, 349, 351
Speaker, 3
Speakerphone
phone application, 166
volume, 168
Sprint activation process, 147
SSID (network name), 802.11 radio module, 362
Standard 2 of 5, 398
configuration parameter, 291
user ID, 313
Start Menu, adding programs, 43
via ActiveSync, 43
via File Explorer, 43
Status icons, Windows Mobile, 26
Sticky Aimer Duration, configuration parameter, 325
Storage media, 19
Stream device driver
NPCPPORT.DLL, 183
ONEIL.DLL, 188
Suffix, configuration parameter, 317
Symbologies
internal scanner supported symbologies, 195
scanning labels, 386
tethered scanner supported symbologies, 205
user IDs
Codabar, 311
Code 11, 315
Code 128, 311
Code 39, 311
Code 93, 312
EAN 13, 314
EAN 8, 314
Interleaved 2 of 5, 312
Matrix 2 of 5, 314
MSI, 312
PDF417, 312
Plessey, 313
Standard 2 of 5, 313
Telepen, 314
UPC A, 313
UPC E, 313
when not available
imager, 298, 299, 300, 302, 304, 305, 306
laser scanner, 307, 308, 309
Synchronizing
AvantGo channels, 96
Calendar, 47
contacts, 61
e-mail messages, 73
favorite links, 94
mobile favorites, 95
432
notes, 72
Pocket Word, 81
Tasks, 70
Tasks
creating a task, 70
Pocket Outlook, 69
Start menu icon, 27
synchronizing, 70
TCP/IP client, DHCP server, 178
Telepen, 399
configuration parameter, 305
user ID, 314
Telus activation process, 157
Testing AT commands, 170
Tethered scanner
capabilities, 199
disabling, 197
enabling, 197
error messages, 197
limitations, 199
settings, 197
supported symbologies, 205
Text messages, Windows Mobile, 39
Time, setting, 385
Tips for working, Pocket Excel, 83
TLS
802.1x profile
certificates, 373
WPA encryption, 372
profile security information
WEP encryption, 371
WPA encryption, 372
Today, Windows Mobile settings, 41
Today screen, Windows Mobile, 26
Tools CD
Bluetooth documentation, 174
CAB files, 120, 351
CE Imager, 122
Comm Port Wedge CAB file, 351
management tools installed on desktop, 119
MIB files, 179
sample NPCP code, 186
Wireless Printing Development Guide, 174
wireless printing sample, 352
wireless printing SDK, 174
Tracking people, via Contacts, 60
Transcriber, Windows Mobile input panel, 33
Trap configuration parameters
authentication, 343
threshold, 344
Traps, control panel appet, SNMP, 343
Troubleshooting
1551/1553 Tethered Scanners, 204
CAB Wizard, 224
TTLS
802.11 radio module, WPA encryption, 376
profile security information, WEP encryption, 375
Typing mode, Pocket Word, 79
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Index
Typing on the screen, Pocket Word, 79
UDP, FTPDCE, 230
UDP broadcasts, IDNATarget parameter, 229
Unit, configuration parameters
automatic shutoff, 382
backlight timeout, 383
date/time, 383
key clicks, 383
volume, 382
Unit information
battery status, 350
CAB files, 351
ActiveX control tools, 352
Bluetooth stack, 351
Comm Port Wedge, 351
NPCP printer, 351
S9C Upgrade, 352
SDK, 352
Windows configuration, 352
wireless printing sample, 352
versions, 18, 349
700 Platform Build, 349
DataCollection Build, 349
S9C, 349
Unit Manager, date/time, 383
Universal Product Code. See UPC
Unshifted plane on keypad, regular keypad, 277
UPC, 399
configuration parameter, 293
A user ID, 313
E user ID, 313
Updating, bootloader, 119
URLs
ActiveSync, 44
Adobe Acrobat Reader, 169
AT command interface
CDMA/1xRTT SB555, 169
GPRS/GSM MC45, 169
full screen display, 226
MIBs, 179
Microsoft Exchange e-mail account, 84
Microsoft Passport account, 84
Microsoft support, 25
MSDN library, 233
MSDN Windows CE documentation, 178
Windows Mobile, 25
Windows Mobile support, 25
Utilities control panel applet
app launch, 357
dock switch, 354
registry save, 355
wakeup mask, 356
UUID, 242
Verizon activation process, 143
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Vibrator
enabling, 20
phone application, 167
programming, 274
Video files, Windows Media Player, 89
Viewing mobile favorites and channels, Pocket Internet
Explorer, 97
Virtual wedge
bar code configuration
grid, 389
postamble, 389
preamble, 389
configuration parameter, 329
code page, 335
grid, 334
postamble, 332
preamble, 330
VN_CLASS_ASIC, 237
VN_CLASS_BOOTSTRAP, 237
VN_CLASS_KBD, 237
Volume
bar code configuration, 382, 386
configuration parameter, 382
phone application, 166, 168
VPN server, creating a connection, to work, 111
Wakeup mask, control panel applet, 356
WAN monitor CORE module
CDMA/1xRTT, 134
GSM/GPRS, 164
installing available modules, 126
loading a module, 126
WAN radio IDs
ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_NONE, 238
ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIEMENS_MC45, 238
ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIERRA_SB555, 238
WAN rado CORE module
installing available modules, 126
loading a module, 126
WAP pages, 94
connecting to an ISP, 98
Warm boot
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248
IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245
Watcher applications
activating, Sprint, 147
downloading, Sprint, 147
using
Sprint, 150
Verizon, 143
Web browsers, FTP support, 232
Web pages, 94
connecting to an ISP, 98
Welch Allyn 1470 Imager
cabling, 199
settings, 198
433
Index
WEP encryption
LEAP security method, 378
PEAP security method, 367
profile security information, 364, 365
TLS security method, 371
TTLS security method, 375
Windows CE documentation (MSDN), 178
Windows configuration, unit information control panel,
WinCfg CAB file, 352
Windows Media files, Windows Media Player, 89
Windows Media Player
Start menu icon, 27
Windows Mobile, 89
Windows Mobile
ActiveSync, 44
basic skills, 26
Calendar, 46
command bar, 28
Contacts, 60
edition information, 24
getting connected, 98
Inbox, 73
MSN Messenger, 84
navigation bar, 28
Notes, 71
notifications, 29
Pocket Excel, 82
Pocket Word, 78
pop-up menus, 29
programs, 27
status icons, 26
support URLs, 25
Tasks, 69
Today screen, 26
where to find information, 25
Windows Media Player, 89
writing on the screen, 34
Wireless Network, creating a connection, to work, 108
Wireless network, 129, 361
434
Wireless printing
Bluetooth compatible module, 174
unit information control panel, WP_SAMPLE.CAB file,
352
Wireless TCP/IP installations, BlockSize parameter, 228
Wireless WAN
AT command interface
CDMA/1xRTT SB555, 169
GPRS/GSM MC45, 169
CDMA/1xRTT, 134
GSM/GPRS, 164
testing AT commands, 170
Work
creating
a modem connection, 106
a VPN server connection, 111
a wireless network connection, 108
an Ethernet connection, 113
getting connected, 104
WPA encryption
802.11 radio module, 366
LEAP security method, 379
PEAP security method, 368
TLS security method, 372
TTLS security method, 376
Writing mode, Pocket Word, 80
Writing on the screen
See also Notes
Pocket Word, 80
Writing to drivers
DTR, 189
NPCP, 184
WWAN. See Wireless WAN
WWANInit demo program, 157
creating a new connection, 159
setting up, 158
using the program, 161
Xscale processor ID, IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Index
Files Index
Numbers
80211API.DLL, 252
80211CONF.EXE, 252
80211SCAN.EXE, 252
802PM.DLL, 252
AUTOUSER.DAT, 120, 121
CABWIZ.DDF, 223
CABWIZ.EXE, 208, 223
CEIMAGER.EXE, 122
COREDLL.DLL, 274
CPL802.CPL, 252
DEVICEID.H, 242
EXITME.BIN, 232
FTPDCE.EXE, 230, 232
AutoFTP, 234
FTP Server, 227
FTPDCE.TXT, 232
INTERMEC.MIB, 179
ITCADC.MIB, 179
ITCSNMP.MIB, 179
ITCTERMINAL.MIB, 179
MAKECAB.EXE, 223
MOD80211.DLL, 252
NETWLAN.DLL, 252
NLED.H, 275
NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
NLEDSetDevice, 275
NPCPPORT.DLL, 183
NRINET.INI, 352
OEMIOCTL.H
IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250
IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247
IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO,
244
IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243
IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236
IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240
IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248
IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245
ONEIL.DLL, 188
PKFUNCS.H
IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242
IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249
PRISMNDS.DLL, 252
REBOOTME.BIN, 232
__RESETMEPLEASE__.TXT, 220
RPM.EXE, 213
RPMCE212.INI, 213
SETUP.DLL, 212, 220
DllMain, 220
TAHOMA.TTF, 213
URODDSVC.EXE, 252
WCESTART.INI, 213
435
Index
436
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual
Corporate Headquarters
6001 36th Avenue West
Everett, Washington 98203
U.S.A.
tel 425.348.2600
fax 425.355.9551
www.intermec.com
700 Series Color Mobile Computer User's Manual - October 2004
*961-054-031G*
P/N 961-054-031 REV G

Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 458
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:bf564f49-298a-4cb4-b906-8cdbe93e3c94
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2004:07:06 08:37:08-05:00
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2
Modify Date                     : 2004:07:16 18:48:00-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2004:07:16 18:48:00-07:00
Document ID                     : uuid:a1cd04e8-b853-41c0-858a-baa7de67efeb
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : legal
Creator                         : ThingA
Author                          : ThingA
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: EHAEM3420

Navigation menu